FO R EST AND S T REA M BO O K S .

Canoe ana ’
B oa t B uil di ng , By w P
S t eph e n
. . s .

260 pp .
, an d fi ft y p lat s e o f w o r k i n g d r aw i n g s .

Priat
Canoe H andl i ng ,
By C P r ice $ x . oo .

Ca mpé Cano e Cooke ry

"
,
B y “ S en eca , ” Pri ce
Wooaer af t
’
,
By “
N es s m u k , ” P r i ce

D og Tr a i ni ng , By S . T H am m
. ond, P ri c e

A ngl i ng Ta l ks, B y G eo r g e D aw s on , Pri ce 50 cen t s .

A n tel ope a nd B eer o f A mer i ca , By Joh n D ea n

Cato n , L L D , r i ce
. . . P
Sma l l Yae/z ts, By C . P . K u n h ar dt , Q ua r t o . ( S iz e

of page , “590 2 55 ,
w i th si x ty - th ree full - pag e
p l at es . ) Pri ce
T/ze Cano e A ur or a , B y D r C h as . . A . N eid e , Pri ce
OA NOE A N D BOA T
B U I LD I N G .

A COMPLETE MANUALFOR AMATEURS .

C O N T AI N I N G PLA I N A N D CO MPR EHE N SI VE D I REC T I O N S

FO R T HE C O N S T R U C T I O N O F C A N O ES R O W ,

I NG AND SAI LI N G BO A T S AND

HU N T I N G C RA FT .

W . P . STE P H E N S,
Ca no ei n g Ed i to r f Fo res t
o and S tr ea m .

WITH N U MER O U S I LL U S T RAT I ONS AND F I FTY P L A TE S OF

W ORK ING DR A WI NG S .

FO U R TH E DI TI O N .

R EV I SE D AND E X TEN D E D TO D A TE .

N EW Y O RK
FO RE S T AND ST RE AM P UB LI SHING Co .
 P R E FA C E .

THE character and obj ect of this b o ok are s et forth on its

title page I t is a manual designed for the pr actical assist
.

ance o f those who wish to build their o wn canoes .

The nu mber boating men who find pleas ure merely i n

Of

sailing a boat is s m all co mpared with those who delight not

only in handling but as well in planning building i mprov
, . ,

”
ing or ‘
tinkering generally on th eir pet craft and undoubt ,

edly the latter derive the greater a mo unt of pleasure fro m

the Sport T hey no t only feel a pride in the result o f their
.

work but their pleasure goes on independent o f the seasons

, , .

N o sooner do cold and i ce interfere with sport afloat than

the craft is hauled up dis mantled an d for the next half
, ,

year beco mes a source o f unli mited pleasure to her owner

and a nui sance to his fam ily an d friends . We kno w o ne

eminent canoeist who keeps a fine canoe in his cel lar and
feeds her on varnish an d brass s cre ws for fifty weeks of

every year .

This class of boating men to who m by the way m ost of

, , ,

the i mprove ments i n boats and sails are due usually l ab or ,

under great disadvantages Their ti me for such work is

.

li mited ; they have not the proper outfit o f shop an d tools ,

nor the practical kno wledge and skill only acquired by the
professional builder after years o f careful and patient labor ;
and the latter as a cl ass are un willing to co mmunicate freely
what they have acquired with so much di ffi culty and are ,
 PR EFA CE .

seldom willing to as sist th e a mateur even with advice

, . His
only other source of information is reading and while there ,

are books treating of the construction of large vessels and ,

others of the use of boats there are none giving precisely

,

the instructions n eeded by the beginner in boat bui lding .

Having experien ced most of the trials and mishaps th at

fall to the l ot of the tyre we olf er in these pages such help
,

as h as proved of the greatest value to oursel ves T o the .

profession al builder som e of the instructi o n s may see m ele

,

mentary and unnecessary ; b ut it must be re me mbered that

we are n ot writing for him wh o by long practice h as
. ac

quired an accuracy of eye and dexterity that en abl e , h im to

shorten or to dispense altogether with many of the opera
,

tions described We are writing for the a mateur wh o i n

.
,

defaul t of this train ing m us t make up for i t by extra care

,

and patience even at the expense of ti me and the m etho ds

, ,

given are those which have proved best adapted to his pecu
liar require ments .

Canoe building is treated i n detail as the processes i n ,

volved are co mmon to all boatbuilding only req ui ri ng greater ,

care and skill than ordinary work ; and the principles on ce ,

mastered m ay be applied to the construction

, of any Of the
si mpler craft such as ro wboats and skiffs
,
'

l t has been i mpossible to give due credi t to the origi nators

fo r many of the devices an d i nvention s describ ed ; but to all
such we return thanks i n behal f o f the great ar my of ama

teuf builders and sailors in which we cl ai m a place

, .
 C O N TEN TS .

I NTR ODUC TI ON ,

DE SI GNING ,

MOD E L MAKI N G ,

LA YING DO WN ,

MET HO D S OF BUI L DING ,

TOO LS AND MA TE R IA LS ,

BUIL DING ,
WELLS ,

AP R ON S ,

PADD LE S ,

SAILS AND RIGGING ,

CEN TE RRO AR D S,
RUDD E RS ,

TA BE RN AOLE S ,

TE NT S AND BE D S ,

STOV E S AND LA M P S ,

CANV A S CAN O E S ,

BO AT BU IL DING ,

APPEND I X ,

DESCRI PT I ON OF PL A TE S ,
 I N T RO D U C T I O N .

HE word can oe has two distin ct meanin gs having been

T applied for how long a ti me n o o ne kno ws to boats o f
,
,

long and n arro w proportions Sharp at both ends and pro ,

pell ed by paddles held i n the hand wi thout a fix ed f ulcrum , ,

the cre w facing for ward The m e mbers of this great fa mil y
.

vary greatly i n size an d m odel fro m the kaya k of the Esqui ,

mau to the long war canoes 80 to 1 00 feet long of the

, , ,

islan ds o f the Pacific Within the past t wenty years the word
.

has been applied i n England and A merica i n a more li mited

sense to s mall craft used for racing traveling and explori ng
, , ,

as well as the general purposes of a pleasu re boat the m ain ,

essen tials being those m entioned abo ve whi le sails and a deck ,

are usually added the double paddle being used exclusively

,
.

I n Canada the ter m h as for a long ti me been app l ied to a

simil ar boat u sed for hunting and fishing without decks
, , ,

and propelled by a single paddle The follo wing pages wil l .

refer only to the second mean ing gi ven as the o ne o f most ,

i mportance to the a mateur builder an d as the instructions ,

given will apply equally to the si mpler and less co mpli cated
Can adian ope n canoe .

The m odern canoe whi ch although i n use for som e yea rs

,

previously may be said to date fro m Mr MacGregor s

, .
’

crui ses and books 1 865 6 an d 7 was i n its early years

, , ,

di vided into two distinct classes Ro b Roy and N autilus to , ,

which a third Ringleader was after ward added but the

, ,

many changes and i mprove ments have so m ulti plied the

m odels that such nam es as N autilus Pearl Shado w Jersey
, , , ,

Blue etc convey no definite idea o f the boat s m odel or

’
.
, ,

di mensi on There are now n o less than nine widely diff er

.

en t mod els n a med Nautil us six na med Pearl the Jersey

, ,
 I N TR OD UCTI ON '
.

Blue h as changed entirely and half a dozen builders each ,

o ffer a di ff erent Shado w while dozens of other m odels have ,

sprung up so that such a division is no longer possi ble

, .

Modern canoes m ay ho wever be classed in a d ifi erent , ,

man ner according to the relative proportions of their pad

,

dl ing and sailing qual i ties thus ,

Paddli ng Canoes—Propelled solely by paddle .

b az lable Paddli ng— Sail being used as auxiliary as in the

‘
’
,

early Rob Roy

Saili ng a nd Paddling—
.

Both qualities being about equal as ,

in most cruising canoes .

Paddleable Sai l i ng— Fitted m ainly for s ai l ing as the later ,

English boats the paddle being a uxiliary

, .

Saili ng—Larger boats for two o r three using oars as aux ,

iliari es as the Mersey canoes

,
.

For racing purposes a di ff erent classification h as been

adopted here w hich with the English is given in the A p
, , ,

pendix .

The first point i n building a canoe is to decide o n the

model and di mensions and this each m an must d o for h i m ,

self considering caref u lly the purpose for whic h he will use
,

h is canoe the water She will sail on the load to be carried

, , ,

and si milar details T he designs given cover al l the d iffer

.

ent classes o f canoes and fro m the m o ne can be selected as

,

a basis for m od ification and i mprove ment to suit the builder , .

The follo wing general d irections will aid the novi ce in de

ciding on the m ain features o f his craft
Fo r s m all strea ms and rivers where portages h ave to be ,

m ade and sailing is Of but little i mportan ce a canoe

, ,

1 4ft x 27 in i s most co mmonly used

. . She Should have a flat .

floor little o r no keel ends well rounded little sheer For

, , , .

general c r uising work under sail and paddle a canoe l 4ft x , .

3 0i n with flat floor good bearings sternpost nearly upright

.
, , , ,

model full enough to carry cre w an d stores easily a keel of ,

2 to 3 in o r a centerboa rd
. For l arge ri vers bays and open .
,

Waters a canoe 1 4ft x 3 3 in o r 1 5 ftx 31 § in fitted with a metal

, . . .
,

centerboard o f greater or less weight The tyro will be safe .

 A MA TE UR CA NOE B UI LD I N G . 9

in following either of these types according to his purpose , ,

as they are the ones usually preferred by canoeists .

A ny O bj ect floating i n water will sink until i t displaces 0 .

weight of water equal to its own weight thus with a canoe , ,

if the hull weigh s 90lbs fittings 1 3 1b s sails and spars 1 51b s .

,
. .
,

cre w l 45l b s and tent stores ets 50lbs the total weight
.
, , .
,
.
,

being 3 131b s i t will sink unt i l it displaces 3 13 l b s o f water

.
,
.
,

or 62 5
cubic feet as one cubic foot ,
of fresh water weighs
62 51bs
. salt w ater the divisor would be 65 a foot o f
. I f in , ,

the latter being 2i ib s heavier than fresh . .

N o w if that portion of o ur canoe w hich is belo w her pro

,

posed waterline contains less tha n 5 cu ft through being .

cut a way too much the boat will sin k d eeper than was i h,

tended d i minishing the fre e board an d in creasing the draft

—
.
,

This fault is found in so me o f th e s mal ler camé s with fine

'

lines as when loaded to their full capaci ty they sink so deep

,

as to be hard to paddle and unsafe i n rough water TO ,

.

guard against it a rather ful l m odel is desirable for cruising

, ,

where stores etc m ust be carrie d it being hardly n ecessary

, .
, ,

to calcul ate the displ ace ment as is done with larger boats ,
.

I f in making a model a block of wood be taken 1 4in

, , .

long 25m wide and tin thi ck or o ne t welfth as large each

,
1 . .
,
-

way as the p ortion o f a l 4i t canoe belo w water i t will co n .

,

tain cu i h and if o ur m odel when out fro m thi s block

. .
, , ,

con tains but 5 cu in it will be or 28 of the original block

. . . .

This fraction 28 is called the coe ffi cient o f the displace

,

m en t and expresses t he p oportio n between the bulk o f the

,
r

boat belo w water and a solid whose di mensions are the

len gth on l oadl ine the beam on l oad l ine and the depth fro m
, ,

l oadl ine to the outside o f the botto m next the keel In .

yachts it varies from 25 to 50 the for mer being called . .

,
” ”
"
light displace ment and the latter heavy displacement
“

boats .

The displace ment can be Obtained if desired by first , ,

weighing the entire block and after cutting out the model ,

weighing that al so the ratio o f on e to the other bei ng the

,

coefficient of d isplace men t mentioned above .

 I N TR 0D UCTI ON .

In the fir st class of cano es referred to i t is i mpo rtant t o ,

have the draft as light as is possible as t h ey are used Often ,

in very shoal waters If built with a flat floor they need not
.

draw over 41} o r 5ih th e keel addin g about l i n more .

,
. .

Can oes of the second class usually draw Gin exclusive of .

keel which varies fro m 1 to 3 ia the latter be i n g the ex

,
.
,

tre me li mit allo wed by the A ssociation rules The larger .

can oes are m ostly centerboar d boats and d ra w fro m 6 to ,

7in with no outside k e e l

. The draft should be decided o n .

and the position O f the w aterli ne fixed i n the design and the ,

canoe tri mm ed to i t as nearly as possible at first changes in ,

the b all asting being after ward m ade if they seem necessary .

The freeboard is the distan ce fro m the water to the deck ,

“
and in m ost canoes i t is l ess th an i t Should be T he least .

”
freeboard or the distance fro m the water to the lo west
,

point o f the deck m ay be 4 5 and Gi n respectively for each

, , , .

of the classes .

Th e cu rve of the g un wale fro m the b ow do wn war d to the

m iddle of the boat and up again at the stern is called the
, ,

sheer The height O f th e b ow above th e point wht re the

.

freeboard is least is usually 3 in in the first class o f canoes

, .
,

‘
and 6 to 7i h i n th e latter two the stern being about 2in
.
, .

lower than the b ow i n each .

The rocker i s the curve of the keel upward fro m a straight

line an d Should be about 2i n for a l 4 i t boat
, . . .

The m idshi p section i s a section across the boat at its

greatest bea m an d on its shape the m odel of the boat largely
,

depends As a canoe m ust carry a comparatively heavy

.

load on a light draft and must sail with little ball ast a flat
, ,

floor is desirable The sides shoul d be vertical or slightly

.

“ ”
flaring the tu mble ho me or rollin g in of the upper streak
,

detracting from stability and being of n o use , .

The round O f deck may be 3 i n i n a 7: 7in boat an d 3 am . .

, .

in a 30 to 33 ih boat as a h igh cro wn adds greatly to the

.
,

roo m belo w frees t he d eck quickly of water and no vali d

,
,

ob j ection can be made to i t .

 D ES I G N I N G .

go into the subj ect of designing at any length is outside

T
O
of the scope of our present work but a short descrip ,

tion of the m ethod of drawing and tools used wil l enable the ,

begin ner to do all the work necessary for a s m all boat and ,

will also serve to introduce him to a m ost fascinating em

ployment for his leisure hours the i mportance o f which to
,

the intelligent and progressive yachts man or boat sailor is

now generally ad m itted .

The a mateur will requi re a drawing board which for canoe

-
,

work need be only a s mooth piece of white pine three feet

.

long on e foot six in ches wide and three quarters of an i nch

, ,
-

thick ; the lower and left hand edges be i ng straight and at a

right angle to each other ; a T square about thirty si x inches -

long one o r two triangles of wood or better of hard rubber

, , ,

a pair of dividers with plain and pencil points several ship ,

curves of various patterns scal es and splines These latter

, .

are long flexible strips of wood or rub b er and are used for ,

drawing cur ves They are usually held in place by lead

.

weights at short intervals but an easier and cheaper way is

‘

to confine the m by s mall pins driven into the board The .

best scales are those printed o n strips Of bristol board eigh ,

teen inches long costing t wenty cents each They may be

, .

had with any desired nu mber of parts to the inch The most .

convenient scale for a canoe dra wing is two inches to the foot
 D ESI GN I N G .

( one sixth f u ll size) o r one and a hal f in ches i n which case

-

, ,

a co mm ontwo foot rule m ay be u sed each division of on e

-
,

eighth O f an in ch o n which will represent one inch For .

the sail plan the scal e m ay be o n e quarter of an i nch to -

the feet .

A good paper for work ing dra wings is the roll detail
”
paper which is strong bufi i n color and m ay be had Of ,

fo u r o r five feet i n width and Of any length So me dra wing .

pins are also needed to fasten the paper to the board or if it ,

is to re m ain there for so m e ti m e s m all copper t ack s m ay be ,

used as the sq u are and triangle will work over the m more
,

easily A few pencils an d an I ndi a r u bber will co m plete

.

the necessary o u tfit a drawing pen bei ng added if the draw

,

ings are to be inked i n when co mpleted as they should be , .

I f m uch work is proposed a few m ore curves may b e added

“

a pair of s m all spacing dividers b ow p en and pencil ,

.

Three views are al ways used in delineating a vessel as ,

sho wn in Plate I These are called the sheer plan

.
;

half breadth plan and body plan The sheer plan is a

, .

vertical section len gthwise Of the boat sh owing the c u rve Of

, ,

ste m and ste m the rabbet lines the sh eer or deck l ine
, ,
'
a b c and the buttock lines
,
as curved lin es ; and the water
,

lin es N os 1 2 3 4 and the fram e lines 1 to 1 3 as str aight

, .
, , , , , ,

lines .

The half breadth plan Sho ws the width of o ne Side of the

boat at th e deck and at each of the water lines t hese l i nes ,

bein g cur ved ( as well as the diagonals N os 1 and the fra m e .

and b u ttock lines being straight The body plan Shows the .

cross section at every fra me line or square station (1 to

also the line of the dec k a b c as it appears from a poin t
, , ,

directly in front of the boat The lines ih the right han d .

- -

h al f ( 1 to X ) are the sections of the for ward body an d those ,

to the left ( X to 1 3) the after body The water lines buttock .

,

l ines and diagonals are all strai ght in this plan .

The general type O f can oe being decided on we will make ,

out a table O f di mensio ns for reference in drafting as ,

follo ws
 A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LD I N G . 13

DIM EN SI ON S OF CR U I S ING C ANOE .

L e ng th , o ve r al l

Beam at water l in e
,

Draf t o f wate r .

Depth wate r lin e to rabbe t ( d is tan c e f h)

.

Depth o f k eel
Freebo ard b o w ( dis ta n c e a e)
.

Fr eeb oa rd m id s hi ps ( d is tan c e b f )
,

Freeb o ard s te rn ( di s tan ce 0 g)

,

Sh ee at b o w r . .

Sh ee at s t e n
r r .

Ro un d ( o cr wn ) f de k r o ,
O c .

Th i k n ess o f plan k an d d e k
c c

Keel i d e d ( thi k n ess )

,
S c

Keel m o ul d ed ( d epth )
,

Ste n and s te n s id e d ( thi kn ess)

r r ,
c

Rak e f s te rn po s t
o .

With the paper stretched as tightly as possible and the ,

board on a table of convenient height before us the light ,

coming fro m the upper left hand corner of th e paper we ,

first d raw a bas e line A B near the lower edge o f the paper , ,

and in length eq u al to l i ft o n our sc ale using the T square .

,

with its head held firm ly agains t the left hand edge Of the -

board N ow starting at O th e right hand end o f the base

. ,
-

li ne we lay off with the dividers 14 Spaces of 1 ft each

,
.
,

n umb crin g the m fro m 1 to 1 4 as in the drawing and shif t , ,

ing the T square to the lo wer edge of the board we dra w

vertical lines at each point of division or 1 5 I n al l pro , ,

longing them sufli ciently to cross the Sheer plan above .

N ow at a di stance fro m A B eq ual to half the extre me

bea m i n this case 2 or 1 5i n we draw a horizontal li ne
,
3 51
.
, .

Leavin g a little space bet ween the upper li mit o f the

h alf breadth plan and the Sheer pl an we dra w the base line ,

of the latter C D and parallel to it and at any convenient

, , ,

distance apart the water lines N 05 1 2 etc drawing

, , .
, ,

i n first the load water l ine at a distance f 71 above C D equal , ,

to 5ih .

The other w ater lines one above and two belo w th e load ,

w ater l ines are spaced 2i n apa rt as the most conveni ent

, .
 division i n this case The middle buttock and b o w lines
.
,

and any others that m ay be necessary are n o w dra wn in the ,

half b readth and body plans and the diagonals are also ,

dra wn i n the latter .

TO avoid con f u sion of th e m an y l in es n ecessary i t is ,

wel l to dra w these construction li nes w hich are the fra me

“ ”
,

work o n which th e dra wing i s c on str u cted i n red ; th en ,

when t he dra win g i s co mpleted the water lines and ,

di agonals in the h alf bread th pla n are dra wn i n blue the ,

latter lines being broken t h e fo r mer f ul l The re m ainin g , .

outlines are drawn i n full black li nes Th e base line 0 D is .

supposed to pass thro u gh t h e l o west point o f the hull o f .

the boat exclusive of keel which poin t in nearly all

, , ,

canoes would be th e botto m of the plan k i ng at midships

, ,

next the keel .

Having the p aper laid off we will begin with the sheer ,

pl an laying O flf b et ween stations 7 and 8 the least freeboard

, ,

b f or 5ih making a s mall circle to mark the place

.
, Now .

at the b ow we m easure up a e or l 1 in from th e water li ne .

to the deck line at th e sa m e ti me m easuring i n the wi dt h

,

th at our ste m is to be outside of the rabbet 1} i h ; an d , , .

si milarly at the stern measure u p 9i h and in 1 i n to , . .

the points a and 0 Tak ing a long Spline we will lay I t oh

.
,

the drawin g; SO as to pass through these three s pots con ,

fining it by lead w eights or by s m all pins on either side Of

”
it at each point I f it does not take a fair curve without
.
“

any abrupt bends other pins or weights must be added at

,

various points until i t is true and fair thr oughout when the ,

line may be drawn i n with a pencil .

N ext the outline o f the b o w botto m Of keel and stern may ,

be d ra wn in with a Spline or the curves and also the rab b et ,

line showing the ending of the pl ank The height of th e

, .

crown of the deck at midships m ay also be laid Off an d the ,

middle line of the deck dra wn The cen ter lin e of the mi d .

ship section is E F the manner of finding its position bein g

,

given further on and on each side of it at a d istance eq u al

,

to h alf the extrem e bea m the perpen diculars 3 s are drawn ; ,

then using a s mall spline or a curve the midship section is

, ,
 D ESI GNI N G .

first that in most of the canoes there described the m idshi p

,

section is placed at about t he middle o f the l eadline which ,

in o ur heat would be 23m aft of Station 7 the lengt h on 1 . ,

l eadl ine bei ng 1 3 ft 3 in the fore body being 6ft 85m and
.
z .
,
. 1 .

after bod y 6ft 8 in A n inspection o f th e tables sho ws that

. .

”
the length of the m iddle ordin ate (k l) in ca n oes o f a me
“

di um type is about 3 7 per cen t o f the bea m at the water .

l ine . Tak ing 36} per cent of esm we have 1 05m as the
1 . .

half breadth at the mid d le of the fore body

For purpos es of co mparison o f the various can oes a ,

dividin g buttock and body line is also used be i ng drawn i n ,

the body and half breadth plans m id way bet ween the center ,

and the extre m e bea m The distan ces ( r s— t e) of the inter

.

sections of this line with the load w ater line afi o rd a com ,

parativ e m easur e o f the degree of fullness of t he b oats ,

which for the b ow ranges fro m 29 to 4 7 per cent o f the .

length o f the fore body and for the stern from 25 to 4 6 per
,

cent of the after body the l arger fraction of course indi

.
, , ,

cating a finer boat For the fore body we will take 3 6 per
'

cent as an average of cruising boats then 36 per cent of , .

6i t
. 6in which laid off along the b ow li né fr o m
. , ,

the fore side of the ste m at water l ine gives a point o n the ,

water li ne and si m ilarly ta ki ng 40 per cent ( a rather l arge

, ,
.

figure b ut the boat i n question has a very fine run ) we h ave

,

4 0 per c ent o f 6i t 8i n =2ft 8in which is laid o ff from th e

. . . . .
,

after side of stem at w l With these five points given a .

spl ine is readily set an d the water li ne dra wn i n .

Turning n ow to the body pl an ( th e right hand sid e of

which represents the fram es of the fore body an d the left ,

those of the afterbody) the sheer o r deck line a b c is d rawn , .

The T square is laid across the board at the he i ght o f the

stem ; or in the sheer plan is s quared across to the hal f siding -

o f the ste m at a i n the body plan and si milarly the heights ,

at Stations 2 4 6 are squared in N ow the hal f breadth

, , , .

at Station 6 is t aken from the half breadth plan with the

’

dividers and set off to the ri ght o f E F at the proper height ,

then 4 and 2 are t reated in the same mann er after which ,

a curve is dra wn fro m X through the spots to a showing ,

 A MA TE UR CAN OE B UILDI N G 17

the deck line o f the port side of the canoe as it appears from ,

a point di rectly in front after which the lin e is drawn in th

,

after body in the sa me m ann er O f course th is l w e gives the .

upper endi ngs of all the fra m e lines 1 to 1 3 , .

O nly every other one of t hese is drawn in the moulds ,

thus being 2ft apart but by laying off th e stations 1 ft apart

.
, .
,

the bulkheads m asts e tc are m ore easily located

, , .
, .

The lo wer ends of all fra me li nes will be o n the side lin e
o f keel in body an d half breadth plan s the heights being ,

taken al ong the rabbet at each station i n th e sheer plan .

Stations 4 and 10 are n ow co mplete d the breadths on the ,

w ater li ne bein g transferred from the half b readth to the

body pl an and curves dra wn through the three points in each
,

fram e thus obtained .

N o w th e re maini ng water lines Nos 1 3 an d 4 may be , .

, ,

drawn in the h alf breadth plan th eir endings being foun d ,

by squaring do wn from their intersections with the rabbet in

the sheer plan and the breadths at 4 X and 1 0being taken fro m
the body plan When all the water l i nes are fair the fram e lines
.
,

at 4 and 1 0being alter ed slightly if necessary to corr e s po nd , , ,

the re m aining stations 2 6 8 and 1 2 may be co m pl e ted

, , , . .

The design is now ready for the final fa iring for which ,

“ ”
the diagonals N o 1 an d N o 2 are drawn in the body plan
. . .

These lines should be so dra wn as to intersect all the fra me

l ines at as n ear a right angle as possi ble The distan ces along .

the diagonal from the point z to the intersection of each

“

fra me li ne are taken off in turn and laid o ff on their corres

, ,

pondin g stations in the half breadth plan and a l ine is ,

drawn through the points I f th e line is unfair it must be

.

alte red the co rresponding points in the water and fra me

.

lines being changed at the sa me ti m e until all coincide the , ,

breadth s and heights of eve ry int ersection being the sa m e in

all three plans when it may b e ass umed that the dra wing is
,

The endings o f the dia gonals are found by squaring across

from the points i n the b od y plan where they cross the siding
o f ste m and ste m to the rabbet line o n ste m an d stem in the

sheer plan and then squaring down these points to the sidi ng
,
in the h alf breadth plan The diagonals may be laid off i n
.

”
two ways either an
“
,
expanded as al ready described or a , ,

“ ”
level diagonal in whi ch the d istan ces fro m E F in the
,

body pl an to each i ntersection are m eas ured horizontall y as

gd .

As an additional test fairness oth er buttock lines may

of

b e run in These are drawn i n the body and half breadth

.

plans parall el to the center lines and are transferred to

, ,

the sheer plan by taking the height of each i ntersection in

the body plan and setting i t off o n the correspon ding sta
”
tion the curve being drawn through th e spots after ward
,
“
.

The endings o f the buttock l ines are found by squaring up

fro m the points in th e half b readth pl an where they cross
the deck line to the deck line i n the sheer plan
, .

“ ”
The process o f fairing may be considered as co mpleted
when all the curved li nes are true an d fair and the heights .

and breadths o f every intersection are the sa m e in each o f

the three plans .

This co mpletes th e c onstruct i on dra wi ng fro m whi ch

“
,

the cal culations if any are made Plate I I represent s the

, , . .

”
completed working drawing of the sa m e canoe sho wi ng ,

di m ensions o f keel ribs etc an d the position of all fittings

, , .
,
.

This may be a separate dra wing or th e details m ay be ,

”
added to the construction drawing after which all lines
“
,

are i nked i n as before direct ed

,
.
 M O D EL M A K I N G .

the method of designing described be followed there

I
F
will be no necessity for a m odel but unless the a mateur
,

h as h ad so m e practice in d rafting it will be easier for hi m to

first m ake a m odel shaping it by eye and then to take the
, ,

lines fro m it .

I n this case the design will be started on paper as previ ,

o usl y described the sheer plan co m pleted and the deck line
,

dra wn in th e half breadth plan To m ake the m od e l a block

.
,

o f soft dry white pine is required of a siz e to correspond

w ith th e scale o f the dra wing The portion belo w the

.

water line will be m a de of several thicknesses of pine and

walnut or m ah ogany placed alternately Each piece will .

FI G 1
. .

be of the sa me thi c k ness as the distance between the water

lines A s u fficient nu mber o f these pieces are taken to make
.

up the required depth and are fastened together with a few

,

screws so placed near the back as no t to interfere with the

shaping of the model and on to p of all the pine piece is
,

scre wed m aking a block like Fig 1

, . .

This block is n o w laid o n the drawing each of the divi ,

 M OD EL M A K I N G .

sions marked on i t and num bered an d the lines dra wn on

each of the four sides O n th e back o f the bl ock the s h eer
.

plan is drawn o mitting the keel i t any which will be added

, , ,

afterward The h alf breadths o n deck are now taken with

.

the dividers fro m the h al f breadth plan and transferred to

the top o f th e block the curve r un i n wit h a splin e pinned
,

to the spots and the block is cut to the line A B C

,
.

The lines on the bottom o f the block are now sq u ared up

across the new face Fig 2 the heights of the deck line taken
, .
,

FI G . 2 .

fro m the sheer pla n and set o ff on their proper stations and ,

a line A D E drawn through the spots The wood is no w .

cut away to this li ne o n the curved side and the li ne repre

senti r g the m iddle of the deck on the back leaving o f co u rse ,

the sa m e crow n to the block as it is intended that the d eck

shal l have N ext the b ack o f the block is cut to th e lines of
.

the b o w stern and botto m

, .

The block is now sc re wed fast to a piece o f board which ,

latter is n ailed or screwed to the w ork ben ch so as to hold it -

fir mly and cut to the shap e desired by the builder the mid
, ,

ship section being first roughed out then the en ds being cut ,

a way and al l finally finished off with sandpaper To com

, .

pl ete the m odel it is m ounted o n a board the keel added b e , ,

ing glued to the board i t i s varnished and screw eyes put in

, ,

to hang it up by The model itself should be sc re wed to the

.

board s o as to be easily re m ove d .

To take the lines from the block m od el the pieces ar e un

scre wed and each laid in turn on the half breadth plan and
the edge traced th e reon giving the water lines fro m which
, ,
 A MA TE UR CA N O E B UI LDI N G

th e body plan may be drawn in I f i t is desired to m ake a .

m odel fro m a dra wing already co mpleted the operation is ,

“
reversed the pieces or lifts are planed to the proper thick
,

ness the stations laid off across each and th e h alf breadths
, ,

set o ff the curve o f the water lin e drawn and the piece
, ,

trimm ed a way to the line After a piece is prepared for .

each water line all are screwed together and the edges
,

roun ded o ff for ming a fair surface

, .

I t is so meti mes n ecess ary to take the lines from a solz d

’

rr o del to do which the sheer pl a n is traced on paper the

, ,

h alf breadths o n deck an d the heights to deck line are taken

,

off by the div i ders an d the lines dra wn on the paper

,
then ,

the frame lines are obtained b y bending a thin strip of lead

around th e model and tracing the outline o f it o n the paper
i n the proper position sho wn by the deck an d sheer lines
, .

The drawing being co mpleted the next operation is laying ,

down .

LAY I G D O WN .

This is the enlarging of the dra wing to the full size of the
'

boat and is necessary i n all boat and ship building For

, .

l arge vessels the dra wing is m ade on the floor of the

“
mould loft either i n o ne continuous length or i n the case
, ,

of very Iong vessels i n two portions overlapping each other

, .

For s mall work a wide board will answer 1 6ft long and 2ft , . .

wide or less according to the size o f the boat

, , .

O n this co mmon roll dra wing paper is laid and tack ed ,

and i t is div i ded off as was described for the detail drawing
, ,

except that the half breadth plan will n ow overlap th e sheer

plan to save roo m Referring no w to the detai l drawing
.
,

“
a table of off sets is made A sheet of paper is ruled in .

vertical col umns one for each square station and also i n
, ,

horizontal lines as follows I n this table is set down the.

heights above base line of the stern rabbet and sheer and , ,
 M ODEL MAKI N G .

the hal f bread th at the deck , on each waterli ne and

, on the
d iagonals :

Half Br ead ths .

Fro m t his table the lines are laid down full si z e on the
paper each distan ce being m easured o ff on its proper fram e
,

or water line an d a long th in batten of pine run through

, ,

the spots thus found A s we are no w working from a s mall er

.

scal e to a l arger al l errors are

,
increased in the same ratio ,
 M OD EL MAKI N G .

is l aid on the drawing and the center lin e w ater l ine ,

diagon als lai d off on it .

Fl G 4
. .

To make th e complete m ould a piece of l in pine is

, .

planed up on o ne edge H I Fig 5 a center l ine E F is d ra wn

‘

, , , . ,

at right angles t o it and also the l oad water li ne then th e

, ,

pattern is laid on this board ad j usted to the cen ter and

,

water lines and one half m arked o ff ; th e n the patte rn is

,
~

tu rned over adj us ted on the other side of E F and that side
, ,

also m arked off the diagon als being marked at the sam e
,

t i me
.
A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI NG
. 25

FI G 6
. .
 M OD EL M AKI N G

As the boat tapers fro m midships to the ends it wil l be ,

evident that the after side o f the for ward moul ds will be
slightly larger than the fore sides and the reverse wi ll be the
,

case with the after m oulds N 0 X having both sides the

, .

sam e i n mo st canoes To allo w fo r this bevel moulds 2 4

.
, , ,

and perhaps 6 m ust b e sa wed out i in larger than the m arks

.

sho w The bevels at the deck height and o n each diagon al

.

are no w taken from the dra wing with a com mon carpenter s
’

bevel applied in turn to each of the above poin ts and the

, ,

edges of the mould are tri mmed accordingl y .

To co mplete the m ould a n otch K m ust be cut at th e

,

bottom to ad mit that portion of the keel or keelso n inside of

the rabbet as will be explained later
, .

Besides the m ou l ds descri bed there will be requ ired a ste m

m ould ( Fig 6) giving the outl in e o f the ste m a rab b et m ould
.
,

m ade to the rabbet line ( if the stern is curved si m ilar m oulds

wi l l be required fo r it) and a bea m m ould showing the curve ,

and depth o f the der k bea ms These shoul d be made of i in

. .

pine They are t aken off b y ei ther o f the above methods

. .

The tenden cy of light boats is to spread in wid th i n bui ld

ing to avoid whi ch in a can oe where a small excess o f beam
, ,

m ay b ar the boat from her class in racing the model an d all ,

the drawin gs are so meti m e s made about one in ch narro wer

a mid ships than the desired b eam o f the can oe an d the sides ,

are allowed to spread when the deck bea ms are put in if ,

they have not done so previously as often happens unless

,

great care is take n .

 M ET HO D S OF B U I LD I N G .

W H I LE b ut few of the m any different methods o f buildin g

are adapted to the p urpose of the a mateur a descrip ,

tion o f the principal ones will enable him to understand the

entire subj ect more clearly O f these two are by far the most.
,

comm on the carve] and th e lapstreak al so called ch aker or

, , ,

clin cher I n the first usually e mployed for ships boats

.
,
’
,

ya wls Whi tehall and other boats where lightness is n ot of

, ,

first i mportan ce the planks (six to eight on each side ) are

,

laid edge to edge n ot overlapping an d nailed to the ribs or

, ,

ti mb ers that m ak e the fra m e the l atter being spaced fro m ,

nine to fifteen inches apart To prevent lea k age a s mall .

,

thread of raw cotton la mp wick or in large boats oa k u m

, , , ,

is driven into the sea m s with a mallet and caulkin g chisel ,

and the sea m s after ward filled with putty m arine glue or if , ,

oaku m is used with pi tch To stand th e strain of caulki ng

, .

and to hold the cotton the planks must be at least gin , .

thick w hich would be too heavy for a canoe

,

I n a lapstreak boat the pl anks l ap over each other a d i s

tance o f one h alf to one in ch the edges being held together
-
,

by rivets some of these also passing through the ribs I n

, .

all cases the upper board laps on the outside o f the o ne b e

l ow I t Three objections are m ade to this mode o f building
.

liability to leakage difficulty of cleaning inside and the o h

, ,

struction tha t the laps off er to the water .

As to the first it is al m ost entirely dependent o n the skill

,

and care u sed in the construction and although a lapstreak ,

boat may so m eti mes leak when first put in the water after
drying out for a long ti me it will very soon be perfectly
ti ght While the second po rnt is an obj ection it is by no
.
,

means a serious one and with a little care the boat m ay be

.
 ME THOD S OF B UI LDI N G .

kept perfectly cl ean if n ot a strea m o f water fro m a hose

, ,

wi l l wash o ut all dirt The third point is the one most em

.

phasiz ed by the oppon ents of the lapstreak but th ey ever ,

look the fact that the laps or lands as they are usual ly , .

called i n England are very nearly parallel no t with the

, ,

water lines but with the course of the water which is largely
, ,

down and under the boat At the en ds the lands are di min .

ished to nothing if the bo at is properly built and that they

, ,

detract nothing fro m th e speed is well proved by the fact

that a very large m ajority of all canoe races have been won
by lapstreak boats .

A s to the i r ad vantages they are light easily repaired , ,

When da maged and they wi ll st and harder an d rougher us age

than any other b eats of their weigh t without inj ury Th e .

lan ds o n the botto m protect it greatl y when a shore and if ,

anything they add sli gh tly to the initial stability .

The oyster skifl s o f Staten I sland Sound and Pri ncess Bay ,

bo ats fro m 1 8 to 25tt long lapstreak of gin pl ank are con

.
, , .
,

si dered by the fisher m en to be stiffer and to ri se m ore quickly

than s mooth built beats of the sa m e m odel As after so me

-
.

experien ce with differen t modes of bui ldin g we have settled ,

on the lapstreak as the best for canoes and th e easiest for ,

a mateurs we shall l ater o n des cribe it in detai l

, .

I n order to obtain a s m ooth skin canoes are so meti mes ,

carve] built as b efore described b ut of i in stu ff and as

, ,
.
,

this cann ot be caulked a strip o f wood about i in thi ck and

, .

1 in wide is placed on the inside o f each sea m bet ween the

.
,

ti mbers the edges of the planks being nail ed to it This is

,
.

“ ”
called the ri b and batten plan and is largely u sed i n Canada , .

Another and si milar plan the ribbon or more properly , ,

”
ribband carve] ( not ri b and carvel ) is used in Massachu
“

setts and Connecti cu t for whal eboats and in England for ,

can oes I n these boats the ribbands are of o ak or ash l i x

.
,

i in slightly rounded on the b ack and as long as the boat

.
,
.

They are sc rewed to the m oul ds when the l atter are i n posi ,

ti on j ust where the seams of the planks co me an d as eac h

, ,

pla nk is laid on its edges are n ail ed to the ribbands for their
,

entire l ength When the ribs are p ut in they m ust be

.
 A MA TE UR CA N O E B UI LDI N G . 29

j ogged notch ed over the ribbands I n both of these

or .

m ethods the bo at is i mproved i f a stri p o f varni shed o r

pain ted muslin is laid along the seam under the ribband , ,

but this is ofte n di ffi cult to do I n a si milar way the beats of

.

the yacht Tr iton are s mooth built with a stri pof brass inside
,

each sea m instead of a ribban d of wood While having a .

very fine surface these boats are us ually not as tight as the
lapstreak and are m ore eas ily damaged
, .

I n another method so me ti mes e mployed for canoes the ,

skin is double the boat being first planked with tin bo ard s
, .

and then with a second layer crm in g the inner one The
, .

first layer so meti m es is l aid diagonally sloping aft fro m ho w ,

to ste m with th e second layer slopin g the other way so as ,

to cross it nearly at right angles ; a m ethod used in U S . . .

N avy laun ches an d lifeboats .

Som eti mes the inner ski n runs across the boat and the ,

“ ”
outer fore and aft as in the well kno wn Herald canoes
,
-
,

and so meti m es both run fore and aft the seam s o f one skin ,

co mi ng in the centers o f the planks o f the other rivets being ,

placed along all the edges a m ethod of building foll owed

,

also in so me of o u r largest cutter yachts .

With eith er of these m ethods a thic kn ess of musli n is laid

in paint bet ween the two s k ins and both are well n ail ed,

together While m a k ing a very strong b eat it is often

.
,

h eavy and when water once penetrates bet ween the skins
, ,

as it will i n ti me ( wi th the thin plank used in boat building) ,

the leaks cannot be stopped and the wood will soon rot
, .

A nother serious obj ection to i t is the great di fficulty of

maki ng repai rs .

Boats and canoes are so meti mes buil t o f tin copper o r ,

galvan ized iron soldered and riveted together a method

, ,

usuall y co nfined to ships boats and lifeboats Two ti n

’
.

can oes were present at the first meet in 1 880 and seemed ,

strong li ght and servi ceable though o f poor shape N o

, , .

doubt an excellent m noe could be built of sh ee t copper that ,

would not leak and w ould be indestructible ; but the cost

,

and weight would be consi derable .

I n order to obtain a s moo th skin with the ad van tage o f the

 M ETHOD S OF B UI LDI N G .

l apstreak th e planks are so m eti mes rabbeted on their ad

,

j oini ng edges half the thickness being taken fro m e ac h

,

plank leaving s mooth surfaces i nside and o ut but thicker

, , ,

plank m u st be used th an i n the lapstreak and the working ,

is more d ifficult I n another m ode the planking is i n narro w

.

strips perhaps 1 x gin O n e of thes e is l aid i n place and

,
-
.

nailed through fro m edge to edge i nto the keel then another , .

is l aid alongside of i t and n ailed to it and so in succession ,

until the boat is co mpleted A few fra mes are needed to .

stiffen the boat near the m asts .

I n the b oats m ade by the O ntari o Boat Co mpan y thes

strips are tongued and grooved the n stea med an d forced ,

together the strips in so me boats run ning fore and aft and
, ,

in others r un ning around the boat fro m g u n wale to gun ,

wale I n shell boats where a very fine surface is of m uch

.
,

greater i mportance than i n canoes the skin is m ade of Sp an ,

ish cedar about ti n thick laid i n fo ur or six pieces j oin

, .
, ,

ing on the keel and once or t wice in the length of the boat
, ,

making on e l ongitudinal sea m and one or two transverse

ones ; but thi s m eth od is not strong en ough for canoes .

P a per h as been used for the past thirteen years as a ma

teri al for can oes but although the boats are strong tight
, , ,

and but little heavier t h an the lapstreak they hav e not ,

b eco m e pop ular and are but little used

,
The process of .

construction is paten ted and requires both tools and eXpe .

ric uce b eyond the reach of the a mateur Canoes h ave bee n .

buil t during the l ast five years on a si milar system using ,

thi n veneer in three thick nesses i nstead o f paper but besides , ,

the i r great weigh t no glue or ce men t can be depended on

,

when long i mmers ed i n water ; they are Open to the sa me ob j ec

tions as al l double s k inn ed b eats i t is only a m atter o f ti me
-
,

befor el e akage begins after which they are practically ruined

,
.

O ne o f the oldest m odes o f boat building was to make a

fra me o f wickerwork or si mil ar m aterial cov e ring it with ,

leather a method still follo wed except that can vas is sub
, ,

stituted for the l e ather This m od e of b u ilding is perhaps

.

the easiest of all for the am ateur and we shall devote a chap ,

ter specially to it further on .

 TOOL S A ND MA TERI A LS .

For the sides of a centerboard trun k clear dry white pine , ,

is good but m ahog any is better though much more costly

, , .

The ti mbers or ribs a e usuall y o f oak though elm is excel r

,

lent for this p urpo se The wood m us t be clear and of the .

best quality in order to b end easily The best o ak for this .

purpose is found in th e shape o f stave ti mber used by c00pers

fo r the staves o f barrels These pieces are from three to .

five feet long and about two b y five i nches square o ne

, ,

being suffi cient for an ordin ary lapstrea k boa t .

Fo r planking the very best m aterial is white c ed ar varie

, ,

ties oi whic h are found along the entire length o f the A tl antic
seaboard i t is u sually sold in boards 2 1 and l i in thi ck for
. , .

boat work and from 1 2 to 20 feet long For small boat s i t

, .

should be clear fro m sap and knots but for l arger w ork ,

that is painted the latter i t hard an d sound do not matter

, , ,

much in fact the knotty cedar is considered tougher and

, ,

stronger tha n the clear .

Where cedar cannot be had white pine can be used to ,

advantage ; in fact the a mateur will o ften find it m uch easier

,

to buy pin e of i i n alrea dy plan ed th an to work up the .

thick cedar hi ms elf while pine is n ot so apt to chan ge its ,

shape in working a source o f much trouble with ced ar ,

.

Where neither of these can b e had spruce may be used but ,

it is inferior Mahogany and Span ish cedar m ake excell ent

.

planking but they are n o better than white cedar and cost
,

m uch more M ost o f the English boo ks on can oeing reco m

.

m en d oak for planking but it is never used here being too , ,

heavy .

For the bulkheads floo r boards and inside wor k white ,

pine is the best ; for dec k s rud der and upper streak o f plank ,

ing mahogany and fo r deck bea ms an d carlings spruc e

. , , .

T he gun wale may be o f spruce o r pine o r if outside as .

, , ,

will be shown o f mah ogany oak or yello w pine the, , ,

coa mings o f the cockpit being o f o ak Paddl es an d spars .

are m ad e either o f white pine or spr u ce the latter being

.
,

s tiffer and stronger but a little h ea vier

The other necessary materials—nail s scre w s metal work
.
,

etc —will be mentioned in detai l as are required

, ,

. .
 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G . 33

The excellence of am ateur work depends not as many i m ,

agine o n the num ber of tools at h and but on the care

, ,

and perseveran ce d evoted to it The best work may be done .

wi th very few tools ; but o n the other hand it can be done , ,

m uch more q u ickly with a l arger number .

I f the a mateur desires to build but one boat at as s mall an ,

outlay for tools as possible the follo wing will be sufficient ,

Pan el saw , 1 6in .

,t eeth to th e inch
8 $1 00
Rip saw. 28in . . 5 t ee t h to the inch . 2 00
Co mpa ss
sa w, 12m 40
J ac k pl an e
d o uble i ron , 1 00
Sm oo thi ng plan e d o uble i r on 85
Thum b plan e 20
Claw h amme r . 75
Rive ting hamm e r 40
l ers tubbs s H
a
. .

ut
C t i ng p i , S ll s ’
or
’
S5C to . 1 25
Sma ll s e r ver
c r wd i . 50
T h ree gim lets 1 1 6 ,
-
. Min 50
Three b ad awls r 25
35
Spo k eshave 50
10
Chi s els , l in 75
Two f oo t rule 25
u es 1i n ns id e bevel
Go g , - i 50
ls e
O i to n . 1 00
Co mpasses 5in ,
40
Fo u r i ro n cl am ps 4in ,
2 00
Chal k l i n e an d s rat h awl c c 25

$ 15 25
The above are about th e prices o f the best quality t ools ,

cheap ones not being w orth buying and with the m any kind ,

o f s m all heat can be built but the addition o f the follo wing ,

tools will save som e ti m e and trouble :

E igh t in ch ratc h e t brace
-

Ce n ter an d Ge rm an b i ts va ri o us s izes ,

Ra bbe t plane
B ead plan e n qua te in h , o e- r r c .

D aw k ni f e n i n e in ch wid e blad e
r ,
-

Scre wd i ve r ten in h
r ,
-
c

T wenty si in h hand saw I ns te ad f si tee n

§inch pan l saw i
-
x -
c o x
E ig h t in h ba k saw
-
c c e
 TOOLS A ND M A TE RI A LS .

These will be all that are needed except a few files and , ,

two or three dri lls t o fi t the brace for th e brass work suc h . ,

as the stemb and but there are som e others tha t are very use
,

ful though by no m eans in dispensable as follows :

, ,

Two foot steel square

-
.

Ben ch axe .

Expansion bit seven eighths to th ree inch

.
- -
.

Level .

Convex spokeshave for cars an d paddles , .

M ortise gauge .

A dze for larger boats

, .

Small h and d rill stock with dril l s

-
.

Two or three round sole planes for spars .

Besides these tools there will b e needed a block of iron

“
called a set or riveting iron used to hold against the head ,

”
o f a nail in r i veting ; a burr star ter which is a pi e ce of iron ,

or brass rod gi n i n dia m eter and 3 i n long with a s m all

. .
,

hole i n one end used to drive the burrs on to the n ails and
, ,

so me woode n clamps shown i n Fig 7 The solid ones are

, . .

s awed out of oak 6 to 8ih long and l in thick strengthened

’

.
, .
,

by a rivet throu gh the m Th e others are of the sam e size .

,

but i n two pieces j oin ed by a b el t or rivet I n use a

, .

wedge is driven in the b ack closing the other ends of th e ,

j aws .

A work bench of so m e kind must be had the si m plest ,

for m being a plan k z in thick mm wide and if possibl e .

, .
, , ,

several feet longer than the intended boat so as to allow ,

roo m for a vise on one end as we l l as space to plane up long ,

boards This plank should be securely fastened along a

.

w all 2ft 8i n above the floor and with its outer edge 20in
, . . .

fro m the wal l the space at the back being filled in with l i n
, .

boards making a ben ch 20m wide the to p being level and

, .
,

s m ooth as th e material to be planed on i t will be very thin

,
.

A vise of so me kind must be placed near the left hand end ,

an iron one being the best but the co mmon wooden one will ,

ans wer an d is m uch cheaper

,
.
AMA TE UR CA N OE B UI LD I N G
. 35

FI G . 7
.
 TOOLS A ND MA TERI A LS .

Fi g 8 shows a per manent b en ch fastened to the wall The

.
.

to p is 3 in thi ck of oak and should b e z4 in wide an d at

.
, ,
. ,

least 1 0ft long a pi e ce of 2in plan k bein g; fastened at the

.
, .

right hand end by way of an extension for planing long

stuff A series of gin holes about 3 in apart are bored in
. . .

each leg a peg being i nserted in one of the m to support long

,

boards in plani ng the edges A b en ch hook ( a) is pla ced

,
.

near th e vise ; the bracket (c) is cut out of 2ih stuff and is .

bolted to the bench bei n g used to support spars paddles

, ,

an d si m ilar pieces one end being held i n the vis e

,
an d the ,

other resting on the bracket .

D ra wers are provided un der the bench for too l s n ails , ,

scre ws etc A t the back of the bench an u pright board 1 2in

, . .

wide carri es a r ack for the chisels gouges gi m lets and

, , ,

s mall tools above it o n the wall the saws d ra w knife

, , , ,
-
,

spokesh ave brace etc are hung a rack for the s mall
, , ,

planes and another for sandpaper is fastened als o s mall

, ,

boxes for such nai l s an d screws as are m ost frequently re

quired .

Two saw horses or b enches are also n ecessary the tops ,

being 3 in thick 6ln wi de and 3 ft long and the legs

.
, . .
,

2ft long
. Two pi n s of h ard woo d l i n i n di a m eter are
. .

driven tightly into holes about l ain apart i n one of the .

benches When n ot i n use they are driven do wn flush with

.

the top but in slitting l ong bo ards they are drive n up

, ,

and the board wedged bet ween th e m .

A nother useful piece o f furniture is a stoo l about 1 ft x .

1 8in on t0p and 18i n high one half of the top being a seat
. .
,
-

an d the other h alf the right hand side m akin g a tray to

, ,

hold nails scre ws ha mm er pliers and other s mall tools

, , , ,

used i n fastening the plank thus avoi d ing the necessity ,

of stooping over the work and al so keeping the tools 011 .

the floor .

A fra m e work of so m e description is al ways necessary to

support the boat o r vessel i n bui lding I f a ship or yacht .
,

the keel is laid on blocks a short distance apart b ut in boat ,

w ork the stocks as they are called are us u ally a plan k

“
, , ,

set o n ed e at such a heigh t a b ove the floor as will bri ng

g ,
A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LDI N G
. 37
 TOOLS A ND MA TERI A LS .

the boat i n a convenien t posi tion ( Fig The piece (a) is .

a common pin e o r spruce board l in thick 8 o r mm wide , . . .

and l 3i t long th e upper edg e being cut to the roc k er of the

.
,

keel as taken fro m the drawing This bo ard is supported

, .

FI G 9 . .

on three legs and securely bra ced i n all directions the top ,

bei ng 20in fro m the fl oor so as to gi ve roo m to work o n the

.
,

garboards .

A nother style of stocks is sho wn i n Fig 1 0 a table being .

,

built about l 3 i t long and 30in W i de so mewhat like a canoe

. .
,

in breadth ; th e to p w hich is 20in fro m the floor is per

, .
,
~

fectl y level A line is dra wn d own the center while across

.
,

FI G 1 0
. .

the board battens l in wide a nd i tin deep are n ailed 2ft

, . .
, , .

apart to eac h of which a mould is scre wed the b oat of

, , ,

course being built keel upward

, .

This m ethod of building (si m ilar to th at e mploye d for shel l

boats ) is the easiest and best but in vol v es m ore labor in the
,

construction of the table or stocks ; ho wever if several boa ts ,

are to be b u ilt it will pay to m ake a strong level table as

, ,

when once a set of m oulds are m ade and each fitted to the
s crew holes i n its respective crosspiece they may be set in
-
,
 BU I LD I N G .

HE drawing o f the bo at being co mpleted the m oul ds ,

made from i t and th e b en ch an d stocks being ready as

previously described the first step i n the actual work of
,

bu il di ng is the shapin g o f the keel I f the boat has no

, .

cen terboard t runk the keel is m ad e of the sa me siding o r

,

thi ckness as the stem an d stern for i ts entire length i ts , ,

depth belo w the rabbet being taken from the dra wing and
i in the thickness of the plan k added
. , The keel may be , .

made l i in deep the extra depth if more is required being

.
, , ,

made up by a false keel scre wed to it which may be re ,

m oved for sh oal water as sh own in Fig 1 1 I n selecti ng

, . .

the wood for the keel and keel batten the layers shoul d li e ,

h orizon tally as sho wn

, .

I f for a centerboard either of the usual form or o ne of the

, ,

patented varieties requiring a trunk a flat keel m ust be used ,

as sho w n in the plate which represents the cross section o f a

,

flat keel and cen terboar d trunk The wi dth for the length .
,

o f the trunk will be 3§ i n o n top tapering to the siz e of the

, .
,

stem an d stern at its ends the dept h o r thickn ess o f the ,

keel being unifor m fiin to l i n throughout its length

, . . .

Wi th the edge keel a keel batten is necessary as sh o wn in

, ,

t he cro ss section This will be i in thick and l in wider

. .
, .

than the keel to which it is nail ed thus overlapping the

, ,

l atter grin on each side form ing a rab b e t for the garboards
.
, .

I f the flat keel is used the rab b et is cut directly on the keel
, .

Th e ste m is n ext sa wed out from a hack m atack knee and ,

planed up g or l in thick for an ordin ary canoe an d the

.
, ,

fore ed ge rabbet and bearding li nes m arked on it using the

, ,

moul ds made for each .

Th e rabbet line of a boat marked a in the drawing is the , ,

A MA TE UR CA N O E B UI LDI N G . 41

FI G . 11 .
 line where the outer surface of the ski n or planking j oins the
surface o f the stem stern and ke e l ; the inner or back rabbet
, , ,

6 sho w n by the d otted lin e is the line along which the inner
, ,

side o f the plank j oins the l o wer edge or ends of the sa me ,

and the bearding lin e 0 shown by a broke n l ine is wh ere

, , ,

the i nner surface of the s k i n j oi ns the dead woods keel ste m , ,

and stern The b ack rabbet is found by squaring i n fro m

.

th e ra bbet line a distance equal to the thickness o f the

,

plank .

A fter the rabbet an d bearding lines are l aid o ff the rabbet ,

is cut a piece o f wood i i n thick and several inches long

,
.

being used applied to the rabbet as the cutting progre sses

,

to test its depth and sh ape The rab b et is not cut quite to .

its ful l depth at present .

The sternpost i n m ost canoes is made of a knee the rabbet ,

be ing curv e d as at the b ow (see drawing of the D ot) but .

there is no good reason for so doing unless th e rake of the ,

sternpost is excessive as is now seldo m the case and a better

,

plan is to make the sternpos t of a straight piece as sho wn

’

, ,

the rabbet for mi ng a right angle or a li ttlem ore at the ,

junction of keel and post This piece is pl aned up the rah .

,

bet marked and cut as in the ste m and fastened to the

,

keel by a 25m screw passing up i nto it as shown and

1 .
, ,

f urther secured by a check of oak nailed or screwed in the

angle .

To fasten ste m and keel together a scarf is cut of the shape ,

shown in the d ra wing about 8l n l ong copper n ails being

, . ,

dri ven through the keel and ste m and rivetted over burrs on .

the to p o f the for mer The keel batten is no w nailed o n top

.

of keel butting against the ste m for ward and the chock aft
,
.

The bearding line is dra wn i n where it has bee n o mitted

across the scarf for ward an d ch e ck aft and the rabbet ,

tri mm ed at these points an d the fra me laid on the l arge

drawing fro m whi ch the water line is m arked on ste m and
,

stern an d the positions o f m oulds b u lkheads mast s teps

, , , ,

trunk etc on both to p and bottom of keel

, .
,
.

I f a cen terboard trun k is required it m ust be put i n n ow ; ,

being constructed as sho wn by the sec tional vie ws The .

 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G .

head ledges for mi ng the ends of the trunk are of oak 1 5m

, , , .

Wi de an d as thick as the slot or Opening gi n for a thi n i ron , .

board and 2 to l i n for a heavy iron or a w ood e n o ne The

,
4
. .

slot is first cut l i in longer at each end than th e req uired

, .

Opening then a groove i in wide and deep is ploughed o n

, , .
,

each side of i t for i ts e nti re length .

The head l edges are no w fitted i n place projecting over ,

the k eel i in fore and aft to allo w for caulking and fast
.
, ,

ened by a copper rivet through th e keel and l ower end o f

each to keep the keel fro m splittin g The sides of the case .
,

of d ry pine are gin thick on the lo wer edges each o f whi ch

,
.
,

has a tongue o n i t to fit the groo ves i n keel and tin o n , .

upper edges A thread of cotton la mp wick is laid i n the

.

grooves the i nner surface o f the sides as well as their lo wer

, ,

edges the keel and the head ledges are wel l pai nted and
, ,

they are put i n place and d riven i nto t he grooves Before .

the p ain t is hard the sides are rivetted to the head ledges
w ith 2i n co pper nails and brass scre ws E
. l fi n long spac ed
,
.
,

Gi n apart are put through the keel up into the sides the
.
, ,

hole s for the m b e ing very carefully bored and coun ters unk
into the keel I f the board is hung o n a bolt the hole for it
.
,

m ust no w be bored as i t cannot be done later , .

The moulds m ust no w be fitted to their places a s mall ,

piece b eing cut o ut of each to ad mit t hat part of the keel and
keelson inside of the bearding lin e after which i f the , ,

boat is to be built with the keel down the fra m e is placed ,

in position on the stocks secured by a few n ails dri ven ,

through the keel into the latter ( which will be dra wn and
the holes plugged when the boat is ready to tur n over) the ,

ste m and stern are pl umbed with a pl u mb line and fas tened -

by shores from the floor or roof the m oulds put in position , ,

ad j usted by a cen ter line fro m ste m to stern and also shored ,

fir mly .

I f the latter m ethod of building is follo wed the mould s ,

are scre wed to the table the fra me l aid on the m and all , ,

firmly shored fro m floor to ceili ng N ow a ribband one half .

-

inch square is n ail ed along o n each side at the height o f the ,

de ck bein g fasten ed to the ste m stern and the moul d s and

. , .
th e positions of the bulkheads and ribs are squared up or
do wn o n to the m .

To prevent any leakage thr ough the scarfs stopwaters are ,

n ext put in These are s mall plugs of dry pine the hol es for
.
,

which are bored where th e sea m or j oint cross es the rabbet .

They should be bored bet ween the inner and outer rabbe t
lin es Fig 1 2 so as to be covered by the caul king if i n a
, .
, ,

l arge boat or by the edge o f the plank where the s a m is n ot

,
e

caulked as in a canoe This shoul d be done at all scarfs

, .
,

o r where water is li able to follo w a sea m .

FI G . 12 .

The rabbet is n ow co mpleted by tri mming it out with a

sh arp c hi sel us ing as a guide a strip l x i in and long
, , .

enough to cross at l east two m oul ds This is held do wn .

across the m oulds one end being applied to the rabbet and
, ,

the wood cut a way until t he surface of the strip and the o ut
side of ste m and s tern coincide .

The positions of the ribs are no w laid o ff as sho wn in Fig , .

1 3 which represents the fore end of a can oe set up on a

, ,

bui ldin g table or bench The d istance apart of the ri bs will

.

be 5i n with an i nter m ediate rivet through each lap bet wee n

. ,

every pair o f ti mbe rs Begin ni ng at station 7 the spaces of

5m are laid off to ward b o w and stern to within a foot 0)
.

each end and m arked on t0 p and botto m of keel so as to b i

,

seen fro m i nside or outside when the plank is o n and alst ,

squared down o n the ribba nd .

 AMA TE UE CA N OE B UI LDI N G .

Perhaps the most d iffi cult part o f boat buildi ng certainl y ,

the m ost difficult to m ake plain to a n ovice is the planking , .

I n order to o b tain both strength and d urability each piece ,

must be put o n i n s uch a way that it will bring no s trai n on

any o ne part and will not itsel f be forced i nto an unnatural
,

shape to attain which en ds though it may be bent o r

, ,
”
twisted i t m ust no t be sprung edge ways or i n the direc
tion of i ts breadth or it can never be m ade to fit properly
, .

“ ”
Although strakes are so meti mes sprung o n by experienced
builders the a m ateur should not atte mpt it as the chances
, ,

are that the fra m ework wil l be pulled o ut of shape .

Before co mmencing to plank the beginner can obtai n an ,

idea of ho w the planks must l ie by taking a piece of board

as long as the boat 4 or 5ih wide and i i n thick t acking the
, . .
,

middle o n moulds 6 an d 8 at about the turn of the bilge and ,

then bending the plank until it lies on all the other moulds ,

but n ot forcing it edgeways to o r from the keel The ends .

o f co urse will co m e up higher o n b o w and stern than the

middle and if the piece be laid i n a si milar manner along

,

the keel they w il l also be higher The garboard streak o r .

,

that next the keel will be 4 to 5in wide i n mos t can oes
, .

then marki ng o ff the width desired i l in for i nstance o n ,

t
g ,

moulds 6 and 8 the board mentioned above h aving one

, ,

straight edge is laid over the m oulds its straight edge Mi n

, , .

from the keel and the ends bent down and tacked to each
mould and the ste m and ster n and a m ark is m ade where ,

the board crosses sho wing the position of the upper edge o f
,

th e garboard By upper ed ge is meant the edge ne arest the

.

gun wale in all c ases whe ther the boat is built keel up or
, ,

other wise With so me m odels it will be better to vary

.

somew hat fro m this line of which the bui lder mus t j udge
,

fo r hi mself according to the circumstances of the case

, .

Next to lay off the upper streak we will take a width of

, ,

ai m at midships 2ih at b o w and 1 § in at stern m ar king

.
, . .
,

off these d istances ( Fig 1 3) fro m the upper edge of the

‘

streak already marked by a ribband and putting a si milar ,

ribband through these three poin ts bending it fair an d mark ,

ing where it crosses each mould There should be six .

 streaks on each side so th ere sti ll re mai n four to be laid off ;
,

to do which the distance fro m the lo wer edge o f the up per

,

streak to th e upper e dge o f the gar b oard en b o w s te m an d ,

each m ould is divided i nto four equal parts m aking the ,

planks all the sa m e wi dth o n any g iven m ould tho ugh of ,

course the widths on o ne mould di ffer fro m those on another ,

as the planks taper to ward the ends the girths at ho w and ,

ste m being m uch less than a midships .

The planks being laid ofif the n ext operation is to get the
.

“ ”
sh a pe of the garboard to do which a staff is necessary
, .

This is a piece of board fo ur or five inches wide o ne quarter ,

-

inch thick and as long as th e boat several , havi ng m ore or

, ,

less curvat ure being necessary for the different st rakes For
, .

accurate work especially where there is no help at hand it

, ,

is best to have two short pieces each about one foot longer ,

than half the boat s length O ne of these pieces is cut roughly

’
.

to the shape of the fo rward rabbet and fastened i n plac e

with a scre w cla mp or a s m all pi ece o f w ood with a n ail
,

through it called a h a tch ec k ( l ) Fig 1 3 I t is then bent . .

carefully over the m oulds as far as it will reach and f ast ,

‘

ened to each with a hutchoek The staff shoul d be of uni .

form thi c k ness and quali ty so as to bend fairly and is bes t ,

cut so as to lie in the rabbet though i t need not fit closely

,
.

A si milar piece is no w fitted aft la pping so me two feet over ,

the for mer and the two are nailed fir mly together so as to
, ,

p reserve their relative positions when re moved fro m the

m o ul ds
. A s the fitting o f the garboard depends mainly o n
the m anner in whi ch the spiling is taken great care is ,

needed to prevent the staff springi ng or buckling i n applyi ng

it
.

Whe n it is properly adj usted a series of m arks are mad e

with the rul e and pencil on the rabbet line on the fra m e and ,

also across the sta ff about two in ches apart where the line
,

is curved as at the stem an d four inches where it is

, ,

straighter along the keel These m arks are to ins ure the
.

c ompas ses being set at the sa me poi nts i n taking th e spil ing .

and in transferring from the staff to the plan k afterward as ,

will be understood later .

 No w with the co mpasses set to any conveni ent d istance,
,

usually fro m two to three i n ches a circle is first swept on the ,

staff to reset the m by if accidentally changed ; then one

,

point is applied to a mark o n the rabbet line as at n and , , ,

with the other a prick mark is m ade on the sa m e li ne at 0

, ,

o n the staff Th e co m passes are applied in successi on to

.

each Of the other po ints on the rabbet line and m ar ks made

o n the staff one l i n e on the ste m m arked X X ( m m) being
,

called a s i r mark by whi ch the plank is finall y ad j ust ed

, .

Before re moving the sta ff fro m the m oul ds the positio n

of each m ould must be m arked on it as th e breadths ,

will be laid off after ward at each mould .

A board is now selected free fro m knots sap or checks ,

fo r the g arboard If it can b e h ad planed to the thickn es s

.
,

i in much trouble will be avoided but where thi s is not

fl ,

po ssibl e a board i or l i n thick is planed sm oo th on both

,
n
.

sides the staff is taken c arefully fro m the m oul ds laid o n

, ,

it and held by a few tacks then with the com passes still set ,

to the sam e distan ce the m eas uremen ts are reversed placing

. ,

a po int of the compasses on the m arks on the staff an d ,

m easuring o ut on the board T his Operati on if accurately .

,

perfor med wil l give th e exact shape of the lower edge o f

,

th e garboard .

The sirm ark is now transferred to the bo ard and al so the ,

position of the m oulds after which the staff is re moved and ,

a batten is run through the spo ts the curves on the ends ,

being drawn in with the rabbet moulds To lay o ff the .

upper edge the breadths on the ste m stem and each m oul d
, , ,

as previ ously m arked Ofi are taken an d transfe rred to the ,

respective points on the board an extra width o f gi n bein g , .

added for th e lap an d a li n e drawn through the m with a

,

batten .

So me woods ced ar and o ak especial ly wi ll spring o r

, ,

change the ir shape when a strip is sawed off o ne edge and ,

i f this happens the shape may be so al tered that it wil l be

,

very diffi cul t to m ake the plank fit I f a straight li ne is .

dra wn do wn the center or th e board before sa win g and

'

then tested after o ne edge i s sa wn to s hape it will show ,

 A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LDI N G .

whether the plank sprung at all and if it has a strip

has , .

should be sa wn O ff the ot her edge leav ing the b oard still a , .

l ittle wider than the finished strake will be and then the ,

plank should be laid O ff ane w fro m the sta ff as i n the fi rst ,

instance after which the edges may be pla ne d up with little

, ,

danger o f fur ther springing .

If the board is thick enough to make two strakes gauge ,

lines are now r un around the edges l in fro m eac h sid e the .
,

piece is laid o n the saw benches o ne end wedged fast b e ,

t ween the two upright pieces previously mentioned and i t is ,

sawn through using the rip saw held nearly vertical a few
, ,

i nches bei ng sa wn fro m o ne edge t hen the piece being turned ,

over and sa wn for a short d istance fro m the other edge this ,

p rocess being repeated until the sa wing is finished as the ,

saw wi ll cert ai nly run i f used entirely fro m one side

When the bo ard is sa wn in two the pieces are each plan ed ,

to thi ckness o n the inside after which the edges m ust be ,

beveled to fit the rabbe t The best bevel for this purpose is .

m ade of two pieces o f w ood gi n wide and 1 5m l ong o ne . .

,

piece i i n th ic k h aving a saw cut in one end in whic h the

, .
, ,

other piece 316 m thic k is sli pped The bev e l is applied to

, .
, .

di ff erent poin ts o f the rabbet about Gi n apa rt in succession .

,

and the angles transferred to the respective points on the

str ake after which the entire edge is planed to corre s po nd to
,

these spots .

The second or broad strake will of course lap over the , ,

first b ut at the ends the laps must di minish until the surface
,

o f both planks is flush with the ste m at the rabbet To .

secure thi s the adj oi n ing surfaces o f b o th are beveled off ,

beginning a b out 1 8in from each end and increasing i n depth

until about half is taken from each pie ce at the rabbet o f
stem and s tern Th is may b e done with a rabbet plane o r
.

sharp chi sel The lo wer edge o f the bro ad strake is left
.

l i n thick a rabbet being cut in the garboard to receive it

j s . , ,

but the upper edge Of the garboard is si mply planed to a

feather edge Before cutt ing this rabbet the width of th e
.

lap gin
,
shoul d be m arked with a scratch gauge on the
o utside of the garboard as a guide for settin g the next plan k .
 B UI LDI N G .

All being read y the garboard is n o w held in place with

, ,

the help of an assist ant each part o f i t being tri e d in the

,

rabbet to t est the acc u ra cy o f the beve ls I n doing thi s

, .
,

the plank is not put i n place for its entire length at once but ,

o ne en d is tri e d then the m iddle and fi nally the other end

, .
,

The fitting b e ing co mpl e te the stopwaters i n and the , ,

hole bored for the center b oard b o l t i f any ; the garboard is ,

fitted in place on the fore end adj usted by the sirm ark the , ,

after part being held well up by an assistant an d one or ,

m ore cla mps are put o n to hold it then hol es are bored and ,

countersunk for the scre ws whi ch will be gin N O 5 brass , . .

,

and the garboard is scre wed fast as far as it lies i n place .

I n fastening such light plan k great care is needed to avoid ,

splitting it ; the pieces m ust be in contact before the s crew

o r n ail is put in other wise i f i t is attem pted to draw the m
, ,

together with the scre ws the plank will usuall y split Screws
,
.

are only used at the extre me ends where nails cannot be ,

driven throug h and riveted but along the keel th e latter are
,

put i n A fter the fore en d is fastened the p l an k is laid i n

.
,

place along the mi ddl e of the boat and nailed every oth er ,

nail being omi tted to be put in after the ti mbers are in place ,

after whi ch the stern is scre wed fast .

I f the operations described have been carried o ut correctly ,

th e garb oard should fit ex actly with out any further cutting ,

and the greatest care should be taken to d o so as if the strake ,

do e s not fit at first i t is very di ffi cult to m ake it d o so by

,

cutting it after ward When both garboards are on a spiling

. ,

is t aken for the broad strake ; i t is got out and put on i n a

si milar manner the staff however in this cas e being in o ne
, .
,

length After the stra k e is i n place and screwed at the

.

fore end it is fastened with cla mps and the positions of the
, ,

nails o mittin g all that will pass through t he ti mber are

,
s
,

marked off using a thin batten ben t arou nd the b o at f ro m

, ,

the mark s o n the keel to those on the ribband to insure ,

the ro ws of nails being str aight .

The n ail s for this work are of copper } o r l in l ong As ,

4
. .

the holes for them are bored th ey m ay so meti mes refuse t o ,

hold at first i n which case a block o f soft wood 1 m square

, ,
.
 A MA TE UR CA N O E B UI LDI N G .

is held i nside the seam and the nail driven into it the blo ck ,

being re moved before riveting I t may so meti mes be neces .

sary to d rive a n ail through the plank into a m ould using ,

a h utcho ek to h old the plank do wn b u t this should be ,

avoided if possible as the hole will have to be plugged after,

ward .

To recapitulate the process o f preparing and pl acing a

,

plank is as follows : First to set the sta ff mark it an d take , ,

the spiling with the co mpasses mark positions Of m oulds , ,

plane bo th sides o f board re m ove stafl place i t on board ,

’
. ,

nail it spile O H o n the board mark position of moul ds o n

, ,

latter rem ove st aff m ark line of lo wer edge through the
, ,

spots l ay O ff breadths at each m ould o n pl ank leaving in

, ,

extra for lap line upper edge thro u gh t hese spots saw o ut
, , ,

plane up edges ( if a thick plank gauge edges slit and plane , ,

insides ) bevel edges gauge upper edge on outside fo r l ap

, ,

cut rabbets at each end for n ext plank (o n the bilge it will b e
necessary to bevel the upper edge of plan k on outside for i ts
entire length ) p u t in place cla mp scre w fore end in rabbet
, , , ,

nail along l ap and cut and scre w af ter end

, .

Where there is a q u ick turn to the bilge it is best to use ,

gin stuff fo reach plank h ollo wing the insid e with a plane
r . , ,

and r o u nding the o u ts ide to fit th e curve of th e m oulds A t .

the ends where the laps are thinned down tacks J, and gi n
, , , .

long are us ed i nstead Of n ails

, .

The planking b e ing co mpleted the canoe if built with , ,

the ke e l up is t urned over o n the stocks and shored i n posi

,

tion the keel being blocked to th e proper rocker then the

, ,

ribs or ti mbers are sa we d out of a piece of stave ti mber ,

gx i i n the upper corners are rounded off and if not flexible ,

enough to ben d easily they are put in the stea m box o r laid ,

in bo rling water .

The holes for the nails are now marked O ff by means of a

wide thin batten which i s bent into the bottom Of the boat
, ,

and ad j ust ed to the m ark on keel and also so that it stands .

up right ; then a m ark is m ade wh ere it crosses each lap and ,

a hole bor e d i n the middle of the lap with a .l i n Ger man ,,

-
.

bit When all the holes are bored the ribs are taken one
.
,
 B UI LD I N G .

by o ne, bent over the kn ee and pressed down into the b ot

to m of the boat then the nail s whi ch have prev iously bee n ,

dr i ven li ghtly into th e h ol es are driven up through the ti m ,

~

her using a set to hold o n the top o f latter alongside o f the

,

n ail as i t com es thr ough The l o west nail m ust al ways be .

driven fi rst then t he others i n success ion from keel to gun

,

wale .

As m an y ribs as po ssible shoul d be put i n before th e

m oul ds are re moved th ose alongside o f the b u l k heads how
, ,

ever be ing o mitt ed entirely A nail m ust be put through

, .

the mi ddle o f the garb oard and broad i n to each ti mber .

Af ter all are in the b oat is kept fro m spreading by m ean s

,

of cross spal ls piece s holding the gun wales together an d

, ,

the m oul ds are re moved ; the block s are then pull ed o ff the
ends o f the n ails an d the rivetin g up begi ns, .

A CO pper burr or was her is slipped over a nai l an d dri ven

ho me with a burr starter an atte ndant ou tside holding the ,

set o n the head of the nail When the burr is o n the end .
,

o f the n ail is cut o ff close to it and th e proj ectin g part ,

( about fain ) is headed with a few blo ws fro m a light ri vet

.

ing h amm er the ta cks at the ends m erel y having their ends
,

turn ed down A fter the ri vetin g is co mplet ed the gun

.

wal es are put on .

These were formerly put inside th e boat bei ng j ogged ,

over the h eads o f the ti mbers but a st ron ger an d h eater plan ,

is to put the m outside m aki ng the m o f a h ard w ood pref , ,

erab l y m ahogany The deck is scre wed to the m and they

. ,

se rve also as chafi ng battens protecting the sides They ,

.

should be about l gi n wide at middle 1 } at fore and I t at .

,

after en ds and gin thi ck

, A rivet is put through the stem
. .

and both fore ends and another through the stern th us , ,

strengthen i ng what was formerly one o f the weakest points

of a can oe N ails ar e al so dri ven through the m and the
.

upper streak an d the head o f each ti mber and riveted ,

making a m uch stiff er side than the o ld me thod A fter the .

gun wales are i n the cross spalls may b e shi fted if neces sary
,

un til th e curves o f both sides of the boat are per f ectl y fai r
and symmetric al .
 A MA TE UE CA N O E B UI LDI N G
'

The bulkhead ti mbers will be sa wed fro m h ack matack

kn ees gin deep and tin wide They must be fitted accur
.
«
. . .

ately to place i n order to make a water tight j oint to do -

,

which a piece o f thin board is cut to fit closely the ti mbers

, ,

be ing marked from it After the ti mbers are fitted as tightly

.

as possi ble by this means a little dark paint is l aid on where,

the ti mber will co me the l at ter is put i n place and pressed

,

do wn with a sli ght fore and aft m ove ment and o n remov
, ,

ing it the points where it touches will be marked with paint

, .

These are cut a way slightly the piece re pl a ced an d the , ,

Operation repeated un til the paint shows o n the enti re sur

face of the ti mber ; it is then pai nted with thick white lead ,

p ressed into place and fastened by screws or nails through

,

the planks at each lap and also i n the middle of each strake ,

or if a wide strake with two n ails , .

The bulkheads wil l be of white pin e gin thick ; they are , .

placed on that side o f the ti mbers neares t the end of the

boat and are riveted to th e m A door is so meti mes cut
, .

i n th e bulkh ead to give access to the co mpa rt m ent i n place o f

a deck hatch These latter are to be avoided if possible as
.
,

they are never to be relied on as water t ight and being ex ,

p osed to rain and waves are apt to wet all belo w whi le a , ,

door i n the bulkhead even if n ot tight is only exposed to

, ,

water in case of a co mplete ca psiz e .

I t is still custo ma ry i n m any cano es to place the floor

boards directly o n the ti mbers giving a little m ore space ,

belo w deck but allo wing the water to cover the floor if
,

there is the least l eakage or a wave is shipped A better .

plan shown i n Plate I V is to rai e the floor above the

,
.
,
s

garbo ards fro m 1 4} to 2in according to the depth of the .

,

boat th us gi ving space below for ballast if desired an d a l so

, ,

k eeping crew and stores dry even though th ere is co nsid ,

crable water on board .

The floor is carried o n ledges z z B in deep at the m iddle , , .

by gin wide fitted closely to the plankin g an d se cured by

. , ,

scre ws through the l aps Small l imb crhol es shoul d be cut.

in each piece to pe rmit the free passage of water These .

pieces also serve to strengthen the botto m of the can oe

 materially The floor boards 71 n are i n three widths gin
‘

. .
, , , .

thi ck of pine the si de pieces being screwed to the l edges

, , ,

while the middle piece can be lifted o ut to sto w b allast

belo w A n oval hole i n the latter piece about under the
.
,

knees o f the cre w ho lds a spo nge for bailing The deck , .

bea ms — o i pine spruce or hac k m atack —are marked out

,

fro m a bea m mould which is m ade fro m the l arge dra wing , .

The a m oun t o f crown to be gi ven to the deck m ust be ,

decided on by the builder From 3 to 3 i in is not to o .

‘
.

much for a 3 0 i n bo at as the space belo w for air and sto w

-
.
, ,

age i s m uch greater than with a flat deck ; the boat will free
,

herself fro m a wave quicker and there is nothing to be s aid ,

against i t Before putt ing in the deck beam s the ti mb ers

.

m ust be cut off level with the g un wale and the latter planed ,

down until the sheer is perfectly fair from end to end the ,

bea m mould being used at the s ame ti me as a gui de by which

to bevel the gun wal r s to suit the deck bea ms The latter .

are Spaced about as sho wn i n the dra wing being fastened ,

by a 2in brass scre w through gun wale and upper streak

.

into each en d The bea ms will be l in deep and ti n wide

. . .
,

except the partner bea m that supports the main mast which ,

will be 4 m w ide so as to take a Q i in hole for the mast

.
, .

tube and the bea ms under the butts of the deck which wi l l
, ,

be l i in wide . .

Can oe decks are so meti mes l ai d in but two pieces with ,

on e sea m only do wn t he center but while this m akes a very

, ,

handso me deck i t is n ecessary to take off the entire hal f

deck every ti m e that repairs or alterations are to be made .

I t is often desirable to open on e of th e end compart m ents ,

and to do this quickly the dec ks are no w very often l aid in

si x or more pieces one j oin t being over the forward bulk ,

head and one over the after one A t these points the beam s .

are m ade l i in wide an d but gi n d eep each piece o f deck

. .
,

lapping gi n on the bea m A fter the beams are in ridge

. .
,

pieces are fitted do wn the center of the deck fore and aft
o f the well They are fro m 2 to 4 m wide according to
. .
,

the size o f the m asts and gi n thick being halved do wn into ,

.
,

the deck bea ms and bulkheads and nailed to th e m The .

s crewed to the botto m about over th e se cond lap protectin g ,

the boat i n hauling up .

The outside o f the boat an d the i nside of well has n ow a

coat o f raw lin seed o i l an d the i nside o f the co mpartm en ts , ,

the botto m under the floor and the deck fra me i s pain ted
, , ,

with white lead and oil sufficien t black being added to m ake ,

a lead color N o w the bul kheads should he tested to do

.
, ,

which th e boat is securely blocked up a short distan ce above

th e floor and each bulkhead i n turn filled with wate r the
, ,

l eaks i f any being carefully n oted an d m arked

, , After the .

ends are tes ted the water may be bailed into th e middle of
,

the boat an d the leaks there m arked also W hen these h ave
, .

been made tight the d ecks may be l aid the pieces being , ,

first fitted and then the under side o f the m b eing painted
, ,

an d the edges o f the gun w ales ridge pieces an d bulkheads ,

being a ls o covered with thick pain t o r varnish While this .

is fresh the pieces o f deck are laid i n place an d fas ten ed with
gin N o 5 brass screws placed 3 in apart along the gun
. .
, .
,

w ales ridge pieces deck bea m s b u lk heads and side pieces

, , ,

o f th e w ell I n all the older can oes the scre w heads were
.

counte sun k and puttied over bu t it is custo mary n ow only

r
,

to scre w the m fl us h with the wood a ll o wi ng the head to ,

sh ow I f puttied o ver i t is di ffi cult to re m ove the m and

.
,

the decks will be m ore o r less defaced i n clearin g o ut the

hard putty in order to do so .

A fter the deck is on enough quarter round b eading o f ,

-

m ahogany m ust be got out to go around the well and a lso ,

so m e half round to cover the sea m do w n the center o f the

-
,

deck These are n ailed with half inch brass or C opper nail s
.
-
.

The d eck s are next O i led the ma t plates cleats s crew eyes ,
s
, , ,

an d other fittings s cre w ed fast the r u dder hatches etc , , ,

.

co mpleted an d al l the o utsi de of hull an d inside o f the W e ll

,

is varnish ed with so m e variety o f wood filler of which there ,

are several in th e m arket This first coat is merely to fill the .

grain o f th e wood an d has n o polish o f its own A fter it is

, .

thorough ly dry a coat o f spar co mposition should be gi ven

, ,

an d allo wed full ti me to dry before using the boat .

 C A NO E FITT I N GS .

W HI LE the first requisite i n a c anoe is a properl y de

signed and constructed hull there are a nu mber of ,
-

minor parts generally su mm ed up under the head o f “ Fi t

,
”
tings that are h ardly less essential to safety co mfort and
, ,

convenien ce and which with th e sails and rigging m ake up

, , ,

a complete craft Perhaps a m ore correct ter m for these

.

n umerous details wo u ld b e equi p men t but the w ord fittings ,

is generall y used .

THE W ELL .

Th is feat ure distin gui shes the modern can oe from its sav
age progenitors as excepting the kayak savage canoes are
, ,

undecked and i ts shape and position a re i mportant co nsid

,

eratio ns As a general rule the s m aller the well the better ;

.
, ,

as less water can g e t below there is more covered sto wage ,

roo m and the boat is much stronger ; b u t o n the other h and

, , ,

there m ust be an opening long enough to per mi t sl eepin g ,

storing l ong spars below gi ving access to hatches below ,

deck and on oc casion taking a co mp anion

, ,
The wells of
, .

the early Ro b R o x s were elliptical 20in wide and 3 2 to , .

36in l ong re q u i ri n g no hatch t he coa ming l in high

.
, , , .

above d eck bei ng bent i n o ne piece as i n the d ra wing

, . .

Th is s mall well rese mbl ing that of the kayak was al most
, ,

a necessity as the boat was so l o w and wet in rough

,

water .

A st ep in advance was the o ld N aut ilus well which was ,

fro m 4 ft 8i n to 5ft lon g and 20i n wid e a length of

. . .
, .
,

l ti n being shut o ff b y a movable bulkhe ad j ust s haft the

i
.
 cr e w s back ; this po rtion being c overed by a movable hatch
’

with a si milar hatch at the for ward end lea ving an open ing ,

o f 2ft or a l ittle m ore for the cr e w

. Th is well with its .
,

ugly octagonal for m w hile a d ecided im prove m ent in many

,

ways more t han any other fea ture earn ed for the ca noe the
,

dis mal epithe t of cofli u once so frequen tly ap plied to it ; ,

besid es whi ch owin g to the n u mber of pieces ( eight) it gave

,

no strength to the deck and the j oints soon Opened and l eaked
. ,

whil e the al most square end forward did not thro w the w ater
fro m the deck but se nt sp ray back ov er the c r w
,
e
.

I n 1 87 8 th e Shadow canoe ca me out with an e l li pti cal well

20i n by 5ft covered by four hatches so arranged as to close
. .
, ,

the w ell en tirely i n shi pping the can oe ; or by re mo ving o ne

o r two hatches m a king roo m for the cre w when afloat
, The .

first point was a decided advan tage b ut it was fo und in ,

c ruis i ng that o n a warm day the canoe be ca me very hot

below wi th hatches fittin g cl os ely around the can oeist and ,

when th ey were re moved there was no roo m for them unless

piled three high for ward an d lia ble to be l os t overboard , .

A t the sa m e ti me the first Jersey Blue can oe appea red with

a rectangul ar w ell 1 8in by 5ft 1 ft being s haft the c re w . .
, .
,

the coam ing at sides of well exten ding over the for ward deck
and for ming slides for a sliding hatch w hi ch coul d be ,

quic k ly pul led aft covering as m uch o f the w el l as des ired

. ,

whi le a rubbe r apron kept rol led up on top o f the hatch

, ,

comp leted the coveri n g T his arrange ment answered the .

purpose of prote ction but the square corne rs an d slidin g

,

hatch w ere clumsy an d heavy in appearan ce .

A t the s ame ti m e a can oe was buil t in Harle m having a

poin ted coa mi ng forward with a s l ight flare the first o f its , ,

ki nd in A meri ca at l east an d in 1 380 the Sandy Hoo k and

, ,

J ersey Blue can oes w ere fitted wi th poi nted coam ings but ,

no t flaring the fir st o f the style n o w so common bei ng put

,

i n the D o t i n place of the Shado w well in 1 88 1 .

This form of well show n in Plate I V is in outline , .

,

si mi lar to a Gothic ar ch and i n addition th e sides flar e ,

out ward thro wing o ff all spray at the sides The af ter
,
.

en d is m ade either round o r square the latter giving ,

A MA TE UR CA NO E B UI LDI N G
. 59
 CAN OE F1 TI I N GS .

more roo m when two are carried A chock Of m ahogany .

( q) i n the drawing is fitted i n the angle belayin g pins

, ,

or cleats being someti m es put o n it This form of .

coami ng is well fitted to hold an apron the fore end Of ,

which being fitted to the point of the coa ming cann ot wash
, ,

Off and no spra y can beat i n under it

, The well may be .

partly or entirely covered by hatches as desired , .

A nother i mportant feature in a well is its width whi ch ,

must be regulated by the size and in tended use of the canoe .

I n a narrow and shoal boat such as the Ro b Roy a width of

, ,

1 8in will be enough as the side de cks will be wider and less
.
,

water will co m e over the si de while the cre w can stil l lean
,

out to wind ward but in a wider and deeper boat there is l ess
,

danger of water over the side and the coam ing being hi gher
,

above the floor will interfere wi th the cre w leaning over and ,

therefore shoul d be m ade wider the u s ual width being 20i n , .

American practice in canoe sailing especially in racing , ,

di ff ers materi al ly fro m the Engl i sh ; the cre w in A meri ca , ,

al most i nvariably being seated on the weather deck i n sail ,

ing to wi n d ward the feet brac ed under the lee deck the body
, ,

leani ng wel l to wind ward and the steeri ng being done by

,

means of a tiller on the after deck but i n Englan d the crew ,

is seated l ow down in the canoe a portion of the deck abreast ,

the body being cut a way and the Opening closed at wi ll by a

hinged flap the weath er one being closed an d the lee one
,

Opened at the end o f each tack only the head and sho ulders
,

being above deck otf ering but little surface to the wind
,
.

With this arr ange men t a n arro w well is allowable .

That canoeists m ay j udge for themselves as to the val ue of

this feature for their work we quote fro m the London Field
,

the Opinions of Messrs Baden Po well and Tredwen con cern

.
-

“
i n g the m Th e fo rm er gentle m an says : I n describing the
.

can oe fittings of the present day the side deck flaps must not ,

be o mitted I n a sailin g canoe i t is all i mportant but 1 do

. ,

n o t ad mit its great utility in a traveling canoe at least n ot for ,

general work Where the chi e f work is to be lak e sailing si d e

. ,

flaps will be very useful ; but wh e re m uch hauling out and

ju mping in and out i s to be the order of th e day side flaps ,
 A MA TE UR CA N O E B UI LDI N G . 61

are utterly plac e The side flap was first introd uced
out o f
. .

in the Rob Bo y in 1 868 but did n ot appear in the next edi

,

ti on of that na me I t h as however now beco me a general

.
, ,

favori te and i t is to b e found in every sai li ng canoe I f

, .

fitted to the traveli ng can oe the after end o f the flap sho uld ,

be just forw ard of the backboard bea m an d it should be ,

strongly hinged at the outer ed go ; and in short strongly , ,

fitted in every way as i t is j us t about the place that one s

,
’

hands lay hold o f to rai se the body in case of a sudden j u mp

up or out A broken and perhaps lost overboard flap would
.
, ,

be a dangerous m ishap to a can oe if caught at the ti me in a ,

”
breeze at a mile or two from l and .

Mr Tr edwen after describ ing som e of the canoes that he

.
,

has designed and built d uri ng the past fifteen years con ,
“
tinues : I t has already been observed that the flap side dec ks
have not bee n fitted to al l the Pearl canoes and that where a ,

canoe has been bui l t with the m they have been subsequently ,

discarded and that the next canoe bu ilt without the m has
,

subsequently been altered b y the ad dition Of t his contri

vance The result o f this varied experien ce is to establish
.

th em as a very valuable ad j unct to a cruising canoe if p rop

erly appl ied an d fitted oth er wise they are bet ter o mitted
, .

There are two esse ntials be sides the flaps the mselves consist ,

ing of two sets of coa mings aroun d the openings cut in the
deck The first co amin gs are parallel and clos e to the cuts
.

across the deck an d conseque ntly at ri ght angles wi th the

,

ordinary well coamings and are sc rewed securely to the,

d eck and their in board ends butt on to the w ell coa mings
, .

They entirely prevent any leakage along the deck from for
ward or aft into the openings o f the flap side deck
, .

“
The second set of c oa mings are placed transversely hinged ,

to the dec k and when raised their i nboard ends fit closely

,

again st the headi ng or coam ing of the hatch cover ; and they

are no t i ntended to exclude leakage along the dec k but the y ,

serve as catches around which the mackintos h coat fits to .

prev en t any se a breaki ng in to the well The inboard en ds .

must therefore proj ect about half an inch above the hatch
cover when they are rai sed Many c anoes have had these .
 CAN OE FI TTI N GS .

hing e d co s m ings fitt ed without the fixed coa mings and with ,

out sufii ci ent width to proj ect above the hatch cover and as ,

they neith er exclude water running back along the deck nor ,

provide a holdfast for the mack intosh the whol e centri ,

c

vance has been conde mned .

I n t his country the first step i n this directi on was i n the

Elfin a N ew Y ork can oe which in 1 8 78 had her coa m ings
, ,

cut and hinged ; th e fi rs t real si d e flaps being put in the

Sandy Hook i n 1 881 si nce w hi ch they have been tried in
,

vari ous canoes but have not co me into general use Thei r
, .

construction is sho wn in t he d rawings .

I n the Pearl canoe the well w hich is al most rectangular

, , ,

is covered by a for ward hatch i n two parts the after po rtion , ,

extending to the body being hinged to the fo rward part so

, ,

as to lie fl at o n it when open ed O n i ts a fter end is a bead

, .

ing over which the s kirt of the can oe j acket is d ra wn this

, ,

skirt also being held by a r u bber band r un ar ound its lo wer

,

edge; to a si milar bead ing o n the after hatch and to the ,

hinged coa mings des cribed ; the dec k flaps opening i nside the
wide skirt so that th ere is n o entrance fo r water bel o w
, .

Where i t is desired t o close th e canoe en tirely the wel l is ,

covered by thr ee or 1 our hatches fitting closely to gether as , ,

shown in the drawing of the Sh ado w These are he ld down .

by a bar running over the m fore and aft o ne end of which ,

is i nserted in an eyebolt at fore end o f well the other pad ,

l ocking to a si milar bol t aft .

APRO N S .

In rainy wea ther or i n rough w ater it is necessar y to cover

th e we l l entirely either by h atch es o r by an apron fitting
,

closely around the body The si mplest form o f apron and

. ,

o n e especially adapted to the poin ted coa ming is a cover of ,

cloth cut to the shape of the coa m ing and turned do wn o n

,

the edges to b u t ton over scre w heads i n the latter n ear the
, ,

deck I t also extends aft about 6in over the b atch or deck
. .

i mmediately behind the back A hole is cut for the body of

.
cutting the cover Extra strips are se wn o n the l ower side
. ,

under the car l in s t o hold dow n the cover, For rough w ater .

an extra apron is used being a short s k irt fitting under the, ,

arms the lower edge gathered i n by an elastic cord An

, .

extra wire (k) is attached to the fra me work form ing a coa m ,

ing o n the after end of the apron and a wooden coa mi ng ,

also runs across the after hatch The lo wer edge of the .

skirt is dra wn over these coa mings an d also over two k nobs ,

( l) at the sides the elastic holding all in place

. .

The apron o n a Rob Boy o r s mall canoe is som eti m e s held

do wn by a strip o f wood (m) o n either side o f the coa ming ,

to which th e apron is tacked each strip h aving a flat brass ,

hook ( n) to hol d i t to the coa ming the forward end of apron ,

bein g held down by a rubber cord passing around the fore

end of well .

Th e m aterial for an apron should be stout m uslin and ,

after being cut and se wed it should be stretched tightly ,

well da mpened and coated with a m ix t u re of turpentine one

,

part boiled l inseed oil three parts and raw o il six p arts
, , ,

laid o n very thin a secon d coat being given when the first
, .

is perfectly dry To co mplete the covering of the well

.
,

either with hatches or aprons a waterproof coat is n eces ,

sary m ade in the form of a l oose shirt Opening abo u t Gin

, ,
.

in front the sleeves being gathered in at th e wrists with

,

elastic The coat is j ust long enough to touch the floor

.

when seated and i t should h ave a flounce outsid e j ust under

, ,

the arm s and long en ough to fasten over the coa mings o r
, ,

hinged pieces of the side flaps if the l atter are used the , ,

coat being full enough to allow the m to be opened inside of

it To put o n the coat i t is rolled into a ring slipped
.
,

quickly over the head the arm s thrust in to the sleeves after
, ,

which it m av be ad j us ted at leisure C are sh ould be ta k en .

in putting i t on as an upset while entangled in it would be

,

serious .

A seat o f so me ki nd is necessary in a can oe ; it should

be as l ow as possible i n order to keep the weigh t d own b ut
, ,

still high enough to be co mfortable when paddling I n a .

boat o f l l in or more depth the cre w must si t several

.
A MA TE UE CAN O E B UI LDI N G . 65

c an o n m o s s, ETC .
in ches above the botto m to paddle co mfortably and i n such ,

a boat a high seat all o ws th e body to lean further to win d

ward ; but i n a shoal boat al l that is necessary is a s mall
cushion o n the floor boards
m
.

The tent clothes bag or blankets

, ay serve as a seat ,

though it is better that all bedding should be sto wed belo w

deck and out o f the rea ch of any m oisture Some c anoes are .

fitted with a seat O f press ed wood such as is used for chair .

seats and in so me c ases the seat is si mpl y a box without to p

,

o r botto m abo ut mm square and 3 m deep the top being

, . .
,

covered with can vas o r leather straps , .

A feature that is peculiar to the canoe and that adds ,

greatly to the co mfort o f the canoeist is the backboard , ,

usually a fra mework with two verti cal strips j oin ed by two
crosspieces as sho wn at o and hung fro m the shifting bulk
, ,

head by a strap The verti cal pieces are 2gin wide and
. . .

at hi ck sli ghtly rounded o n the fore side and are placed 21

, ,
»

i nches apart thus supporting the back o n either side of the

,

backbone an d the crosspieces are ri vetted to the m

, .

So meti mes a flat heard about 8x 1 2in is us ed either , .

, ,

w ith or w ithout a cushion ; but t he fra me is better For .

paddling d ouble an extra bea m is used across the cockpit

, ,

w i th a backboard b un g o n it for the forwar d m an or a seat

fi
,

is m ade Of two pieces of board hinged together on e forming .

the bac k being supported by a brace hinged to it (p) This

,

back may be used at any point desired being independent ,

of the well and coami ng and the angle of the back m ay be ,

changed at will while i t is easily folded and sto wed a way

,

when n ot in use .

To in crease the sto wage roo m an d to secure a better d ispo

sitiou of weights fore an d aft b atches are som eti mes cut i n ,

the dec k but to be really valuable two points are essential

, ,

w hich have never yet been obtained ; they must be quic k ly

Opened and closed and ai rtight when closed As good a
, .

method as any is to make a regular coa ming to the Openi ng

in the deck to l in high the hatch fitting On to this coa m
.
,

ing with a beading proj e cting do wn two thu mb sc re ws ,

being used to secure it I ts water ti gh t qual ities may be i m

.
-
 AMA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G . 67

proved by a square o f rubber cloth laid over the Open i ng

before putting on the h atch This b atch is heavy and .

clu msy in appearance co mpared with hatches flush with the

deck but the latter al ways leak and are never to be relied on
, , .

I n so me cases where it may be desirable to get at the i a

side Of the co mpart ments occasionally for repairs a hatch ,

may be cut in the deck and c ov ered with a piece of ki n .

m ahogany decking l in larger each way than the o pening

,
.
,

and fasten ed by brass screws as the deck is the laps b eing ,

first painted This piece will be airtight and yet can be re

.

moved and replaced i n a few minutes when repairs are

needed .

For transporting the canoe o n shore a yoke is nec essary and ,

may be ma d e in several ways the si mplest for m being that

,

used for the gui des boats in the A dirondacks a piece Of

’

wood (r ) hollowed to fit over the shoulders and around the

neck the boat bottom up of course resting with o ne gun
, , ,

wale o u each end o f th e yoke Another for m is a box .

(s) with n o top or botto m long enough to fit i n the width of

,

the well and having two straps (t) across one side which
, ,

rest on the shoulders ; the coaming of the boat resting o n

the ends o f the box .

A plan lately devised by Mr Farnh a m e m ploys a fra me .

o f four pieces which also serves i n pl ace Of a sliding bulk

,

head When used as a yoke two straps are buckled across

. ,

it and support i t o n the shoulders the boat being inverted ,

on it
.

PADD LES .

Th e principal point Of diff erence b e t ween a canoe and

other boats is the mode of propulsion the paddle being h e ld
, ,

and supported by both h ands while in b eats the ear or scull

,

is suppor ted o n the boat an d i ts m oti on is di rected by th e

,

hand The for mer is the pri mitive m ode and even to d ay
.
,

the craft used b y s avage tribes are propelled al most entir e ly

by paddles the o ar being used by civilized nations
,

The shape Of the paddle di ffers greatly in various locali ties

‘

,
 PA DD LES .

but two for ms only are kn o wn to m od ern can oeists the ,

singl e blade shown in th e center of the acco m panying

,

plate and the d ou b le blade various form s of which are

, ,

also sho wn The for mer derived fro m the N orth A m erican
.
,

I ndians is about 5& ft l ong with a blade 5in w ide and is

, .
, .
,

m ade o f m aple beech or sp ruce The upper end is fash

, ,
~

i oned so as to fit easily i n the h and the fingers b ei ng doub l ed ,

over the top The single paddle is used continuo u sly on the
.

sa me sid e Of the boat and i ts m otion i n skilled h ands i s , , ,

noiseless .

The double paddle the o n e best known i n connection wi th

,

modern canoes fro m the ti me o f MacGregor is derived ,

directly fro m the Esqui m au and his kayak The length .

varies with the beam o f the canoe fro m 7 to 9i t the for m er , .

,

size being the one first used with the s mall c anoes but a ,

gradual increase in lengt h has been going o n for so me years ,

and Of l ate m any canoeists have adopted 9f t i nstead o f 8 as .

,

for merly for b eats of 30m bea m and over V arious patterns
, . .

o f paddles as m ade by di ff erent builders are sh o wn in the

, ,

plate half Of each paddle only being given T he blades vary

, .

in width from 6 to 7i n and i n lengt h fro m 1 8 to 20i n .

, .

Paddles o f over 7ft are us ually cut i n two and jointed the
.
,

joint consisting o f two brass tubes the l arger o ne 5& i a lo ng , .

an d fro m to 1 11 Outside diam eter ; the s m all e r o n e 213m

° .

long and fitting tightly inside the former The sh oz t piece

, .

is som eti mes fi tted with a s m all pin fitting n otch es in the ,

l onger piece s o that wh e n the pad dle is set either w ith bot h
, ,

blades in the sa me plane or if paddling against the win d , ,

th e blades at righ t angles no further motion is per mitted i n

the j oint ; but this pl an i s n ot advisable as wh en the j oint ,

sticks as i t O ften w ill it is necessary to turn the pa rts to

, ,

loosen t he m which of co u rse the pin prevents

, .

Tips Of sheet brass or Copper are put on the ends to pre

serve the m fro m in j ury against stones and logs i n pushing
O ff
. Pine o r spruce are the best m aterials for padd l es of this
styl e TO preven t the water dripping do wn on th e h ands
.
,

rubber washers are u sed o r two round rubber bands on each ,

end about z in apart will ans wer the sa m e purpose O n e

, . , .
A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G . 69

CAN OE P AD D LE B
.
 SAI LS A ND RI GGI N G .

h alf of the double paddle is so meti mes used as a single bl ad e ,

an extra piece si milar to the head sho wn on the double blade

, .

being inserted in the ferrul e ; o r when sailing o ne half , ,

lengthened o ut by a hand le 1 8i n l ong may be carried o n

.
,

deck ready for any e mergen cy the other half being sto wed
, ,

belo w The half pad dle i n this case is held with the blade
. , ,

under a cord stretched over the for ward deck the after end ,

being held by a cord l ooped over a cleat abreast the body .

Fo r racing and li ght paddling spoon blades are used the

, ,

general outline being the sa me as the straight blad es but the ,

latter ar e stronger and better for cruising work .

SAI LS AN D RI GGI N G .

T he success Of a canoe as a sailing craft depends largely

o n the proportioning of the sails to the bo at and the
work to be done —o u their proper fitting and on the perfec ,

tion Of all the s maller details Of the rigging A l most every .

kn o wn rig h as been tri ed on can oes all but a few h avi na

,
r

been in ti me rejected so that to d ay but three types are at

all po pular with canoeists —
,

the leg Of mutton the l atcen , .

and th e l ug .

Before deciding on the shape O f the sails the first que stion ,

is Ho w mu ch sail to carry ? a question only to be decided

,

by a co mparison with other b oats and th eir rigs Attem pts .

have been made to for m ulate expres sions by which the area
o f sail may be cal culated when the di mensions and weight

Of the boat are kno wn ; but in a can oe t he greatest ele men ts

in carryin g sail are the personal qualities Of the cano ist his e
,

skill activity d aring prudence and good j udgme nt ; and

, , ,

their value is easil y appreciated when o n the sa me can oe on e

man can carry 1 00 square feet o f sail while another w ill ,

h ardly be safe with ti tty This being the case it is i mpos

.
»

sible to calculate what area a can oe wil l carry but a co m ,

parison with si milar boats will give the average c ruising rig ,

the canoeis t making such an addition to it as he considers

will suit his individual wants .
 SAI LS A ND RI GGI N G .

bein g ahea d These points would be des cribed in techni cal

.

language as the co mmon center Of gravi ty O f the sai ls and ,

the center of gravity Of the i mmersed vertical l ongitudinal

section including rudder an d centerboard
, .

The center o f l ateral r e istance can b e ascertained by s

drawing accurately to scale o n a piece of card b oard the ,

Outline of that portion Of the hull below the wat e r line i a ,

cludin g rudder keel or board taking it fro m the sheerpl an

, , ,

then cutting o ut the piece and bal anci ng it o n a fin e needle

stuck in a cork The poin t on which it will balan ce is th e
.

center Of lateral r esistance .

To ascertain the center of e ffort so me calcul ation is ne ,

cessary .A sa il draft is first m ade sho wing the sails masts , ,

h ull and center o f lateral resistance the scale being usuall y ,

or l i n to the foot for a canoe o r s mall boat

. .

Fi rst to determine the area Of the sail if triangular a line

, , ,

is drawn fro m o ne an gle perpendi cq to the Opposite side ,

or to t hat side produced Then the area will be equal to

.

one h alf Of the side m ultiplied by the distance fro m the side
-

to the angle ; for instance in the triangle B C D in the first ,

figure which represen ts the cal culations for a sail Of 89

,

square feet a line pe rpendi cular to C D woul d not pass

,

thr ough B ; so 0 D is produced to g then 1 2ft 3in x 7ft 6in . . . .

are a of B C D I f the sail is n ot tri .

ang ular it may be divided i nto several triangl es each being ,

co mputed separately Th e sai l sho wn will first be divided

.

by the line 0 D fro m throat to cle w; the area O f B C D

'

has been as certained to be 4 5 9ft and si milarly the area of . .

,

A C D is 4 2 9 then the entire area will be 88 8ft A shorter

.
, . .

rule and one that in most sails is suffi ciently co rrect is to

. ,

m ultiply the distance A B by C D and t o t ake h al f o f the

prod uct but i n a high narro w sai l this would n ot ans wer
, , , ,

as in this case where i 6ft 4i n x 12ft

, . . .

or an error of i l ft .

The area being known the center o f gravity o f each tri ,

angle is next foun d by drawing a line from the m iddle Of o ne

side to the Opposite angle and laying off 1; of this line as in
, ,

the triangle B C D where half of C D is taken at a a li n e

, , , ,
 A MA TE UR CA N O E B UI LDI N G
. 73

a B
,
drawn and 1 of it taken giving the point d the center
,
»
, ,

Of the tria ngle The point 0 is fo und i n a si milar man ner

.
,

and we kno w that their co mmon center of gra vity must be

on the lin e 0 d
. New divi ding the sail by a line A B into
, , ,
 SAI LS A N D RI GGI N G .

another set of triangles A B C and A B D we find their , ,

centers at c and f and drawing the line 6 f its intersection

, ,

with c d will be the cen ter o f gravity and consequently ,

center o f eff ort o f the entire sail

, .

To deter m in e the co mm on cen ter o f two or more s ai l s a ,

vertical lin e is dra wn j ust ahead Of the forward sail and the ,

distance o f the center Of each s ail fro m this line is measured

and m ultiplied by the area o f the sail I n th e dra wi ng . ,

showing two b alance l ugs Of 4 5 an d 20ft the cruising rig .

, ,

for a 1 4x 30 canoe these figures would be 40x 5ft 2i a = 23 2

, . .
,

and 20x 1 3 ft 7in =27 3 or 505 N O W dividing this sum by

. .
, .
,

the total area of the sails o r 65 ft we have or 7ft , .

,

9in the di stance of the cent e r O f eff ort fro m the vertical
.
,

l ine I n this case the center Of effort of the sail s and the
. .

center Of lateral resis tan ce of the hull will fall in the same
vertical .

To be safe a boat should al ways carry sufii cien t weather

,

hel m to luff easily or i n oth er words when sail ing on the

, ,

wind the leverage o f the after sail should be enough to re

,

quire that the hel m be carried sli g htly o n the weather side
to prevent her co ming up into the wind then if i t be left ,

free she w ill lu ff instantly To do this requires i n theory .

that the center of eff or t should be aft Of the center o f lateral

resistan ce but i n the cal culations i t is assum ed tha t bo th
,

sails and h ul l are plane surfaces whil e i n reality they are ,

both curved and the wind pressure is distri b uted unequally

over the sails ; while the pressure of th e wave o n the lee b ow ,

aided by a decrease Of pressure under the l ee quarter tend ,

to shove the boat to wi nd ward i ndependently of her sails so , ,

that she will h ave a greater weather hel m i n any case than th e
calculations sho w varying with t he fu lln ess o f her bows
, ,

an d the center Of eff o rt may Often be pl aced som e distan ce

ahead of the center of lateral resistan ce .

I t will be s een fro m this that suc h calculations are n ot

absolutely exact but they are the best guides we have and
, ,

if the calcul ated cen ters and actual worki ng i n practice o f

,

di ff erent boats ar e recorded a com parison will show wh at ,

allowan ce is n ecessary in the case of a si milar boat .

 A HA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G .

’
In pl anning a canoe s sails then three things should b e
,

kept i n vie w ; to distribute the sail well fore and aft keep
,

ing a l ow center o f effort ; to keep the latter about over the

center o f l ateral resistance and to keep as short a main boom

,

as is consistent with the first point.

I n order th at a boat should sail equally well with her

.
 SAI LS A ND RI GGI N G .

board up or down the center Of the board should come

.

under the cen ter of lateral resistance other wise if th e boar d , ,

he for ward and the boat balances with i t lo wered o n raising ,

it the center of lateral resistan ce at once m oves aft and the

, ,

center of eff ort being un changed the greater leverage is for ,

ward and the boat s h ead fall s O ff

,
’
.

I f it is necessary to pl ace th e board well forward it may ,

be done by us ing a s mall mizzen a reef being shaken out in ,

it when the board is rai sed A m ainsai l is so meti mes rig g ed

'

and tried with a cheaply m ade mizzen Of any shape until the
proper balance is Obtained whe n a suitable mi zzen is rigged ,

per manently .

The si mplest rig for a canoe is the leg of mutton or as , ,

it is so meti mes call ed sharpie rig consisti ng Of two tri , ,

angular sails requiring on ly m ast boo m h alliard and sheet

, , , ,

and o n a narrow bo at where bu t a small area can be carried

, ,

they will ans wer very we ll but where a l arge spre ad is ,

n eed ed the spars m ust be so l ong as to be un manageable ;

,

for instance to spread 60 square fe e t with an 8ft boo m

, , .
,

would requi re a mast 1 6ft abo ve th e deck A nother disad . .

vantage is the necessi ty O f using rings o n the m ast as they ,

are liable to j am in hoisting and lowering .

A si mple sail on ce used o n canoes i s the spritsail but it

, ,

was abandoned o n account o f the d i ffi culty Of h andlin g the

sprit in so sm all a boat Th e ordinary boo m and gaff sai l is
.

als o obj ectionable as it requires tw o halli ar ds and the rings

o n the m ast are apt to j am
, .

The lateen sail as adapted by Lord Ross is m uch used

, ,

on canoes espe ciall y the s malle r ones I t has the ad

, .

vantages O f a short mas t l ow cen ter of effort an d few li n es ;

, ,

but the yard and boo m must be very long the s ail c ann ot be ,

furled or reefed when before the wind an d it is n ot suited ,

for large areas The lateens i ntr oduced by the Cincinnati

.

C C are practical ly leg o f m utton sails the yard pea k ing

. .
,

up into the position o f a top m as t as shown i n the dra wing , .

The ordi nary lateen rig consists of a tri angular sail laced to
a yard and b oo m both spars be ing j oin ted togeth er at the
,

ta ck and a pole m ast with a spike several i nches l ong on

,
 SAI LS A ND RI GGI N G .

top . brass ring i s l ashed to the yard n ea r i ts lower end

A ,

and a j aw ( a) o f w ood o r m etal is fastened to the boo m a ,

short distance fro m the forward en d I n setti ng the sail .

,

the yard is lifted until the ring c an be hoo k ed over the spike
o n the m ast then the boo m i s d ra w n bac k lifting the yard
, , ,

and the j aw is dropped i n pl ace aroun d the m ast the Oper ,

ation being revers e d i n takin g in sail .

The follo wing meth od O f r eefing the lateen ( see p 83) was de .
~

vised by Gen O liver o f the M ohican C C

.
, The fore end of . .

the bo o m is fitted with a j aw ( b) w hich en circles th e m ast when

the sai l is set making a leg of m utton sail while on the boo m
, ,

is a j aw ( a) I n reefin g the j aw ( b) is re moved fro m the m ast

.
, ,

allo wing the boo m t o co m e for ward unti l a to u ches the m ast ,

the slack o f the sai l being taken in by a reef line d d d ,

.

O ne en d o f this l in e is m ade f ast at the tack it is then rove ,

through grommets i n the sail and the other end mad e fas t ,

on the leach th e slack being taken in by hoo ki ng the cord

,

over a scre weye ( e) on the boo m forward and another aft ,

.

A nother si m ilar plan dispenses with th e j aw o n th e en d o f

the boom using i nst e ad a se cond j aw o n the boo m n ear the
,

first the shape of th e sai l being a little difi erent but the
, ,

detail s of reef line etc the sa me , .

A nother sail devised by Gen O li ver and called by h im the .

,

”
Mohican sail is in tended to co mbine the short boo m and
,

facil ity in reefing o f the balan ce lug w ith the short m as t of

the lateen ‘ .

Fig A represen ts the sail set

. The short mast with pin . ,

and the spars to ggled to ether Of the Ross lateen are u sed g
,

w ith the addi tion Of a j aw at the end O f boo m The sail is .

set in the usual l ateen m anner and t he s par B beco mes vir , , ,

tuall y a hi gh m ast and is treated as s uch ,

Four very li ght .

ba mboo ba ttens are put i n the sail t o i ncrease the area and ,

the sail is attached to the spar B as far up as the ring and , , ,

fro m that poi nt to a batten (a) and this batte n is attached to .

B by halliard b which p a ses through block to foo t and

, ,
s

back to hand Th e sail can be lo wered by halliard (b) or

.

taken Off m ast A i n th e usual m anner of lateens

. , .

The first reef is taken by letting go hal liard and pulling in

‘ Th s s il
i a is li tt le use d a t pre s e n t a n d th e n a m e “
M o h i ca
. n
”
is
appli ed so lel y to th e se tt ee sa i l d e c r i bed o n pag e 159 s
.
 80 SAI LS A ND RI GGI N G .

ordinary lateen The halli ard and reef l ine may be mad e
.

fast on boom and sho uld be so when sai l is sto wed

,

FI G B
. . M O HI CAN SAI L SI N GLE REEF .

This sail can be unshipped and sto wed exactly as

l ateen and with the same advantages I t is al ways sto wed
, .
 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G . 81

on deck made fast to side of coaming ; and it has the reefing

,

advantages of the balance lug the short boo m and the height
, ,

to catch light winds with none of the dis advantages as to

,

m any ropes and high masts .

FI G C
. . MO HI CAN SAI L . DO U B LE REE F

A is the j aw ; B the spar or top m ast C the boom

,
°

, .

Fig B sho ws sail with o ne reef and Fi g C with two

. .
, .

Fi rst reef can be taken in b efore the wind ; second reef can
 SAI LS AND R I GGI N G .

not unl ess first r eef is re peated with a parallel batten

, .

I n case l eg 0 m utton form of sail is used the area is m uch

’

reduced b ut al l but N o 4 batten may be o mitted and the

, .
,

sail m ad e fast t o spar B by rings an d hois ted and lowered ,

as i n ordi nary l eg o mutton sai ls ’

.

The ol d sliding gunter is n o l onger used as it was difficult ,

either to hois t or lo wer the top m ast w ith any pressure of

wind on the sai l Within the past year ( 1 888; the gun te r rig
'

has be e n revived with better results see pa ge 1 92

, , .

O n a canoe the nearer the sails approach a square the

, ,

sh orter boo m and yard they require for any given area and ,

the easier th ey are to handle a nd sto w A l l thi ngs con .

si dered there is n o sail s o easily set reefed or furled as the

, ,

si mple standing l ug Th e h e ad of the sail is l aced to a yard

.

on which a ring 6 is lash ed while the foot is l aced to a boo m

, ,

in the for ward end of wh ich an eye is spliced O n the m ast .

is a brass travel e r a form ed of a ring t o which a hook is

,

brazed A n eye is for med on the upper part of the hook i n

.

whi ch the hal l iard c is spliced while the downha ul e is ,

spliced to the hook itself .

The halliard an d do wnhaul are so meti mes in on e piece the ,

lead bein g fro m eye i n traveler through block at m asthead ,

then ce through double block at foot of mast to cleat on side

deck ; then ce through double block again and to hook o f
t raveler the latter part f or min g a downhaul The tack d is
, .

an e ndless line rove through a single block on deck at the

foot of th e m as t and a scre weye n e ar the well and h aving a ,

toggle Spliced into it To set sail it is taken fro m below the

.
,

eye i n th e end of boo m toggled to the tack hauled o ut an d ,

belayed then the yard is lifted t h e ring h ooked on to t he

, ,

traveler an d the halliard hauled taut and belayed The

, .

d o wnhaul is led outside of the s ail the latte r al ways bei ng on ,

the sa me side of the mast .

Where a large area is to be carried as in racing the best , ,

sail i s b eyond all question the balan ce l ug a m od ification of

, , ,

the sails long in use in China whi ch was introd uced to ,

canoeis ts so me fiftee n years ago I n this sai l a portion pro

.
A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G
.
 SAI LS A ND RI G GI N G .

j eeta for ward o f the m ast greatly lessening the outboard ,

weight when runni ng free as well as the len gth o f the bo o m , .

The sail is spread o n a yard and boom as the standing l ug , ,

but is so hung that a portion h an gs forward o f the m ast ,

about one seventh to one eighth of the boom being forward ;

- -

thus a sail of 7ft on the foot will have n o longer boo m

, .

when runni ng free than an ordinary sail o f 6ft on the .

foot .

To h andle a large sail quickly and certainly a n u mber o f

lines are needed som e o f which m ay be dispensed with at the
,

wil l of the skipper but we will give all in the description

, .

O ne peculiarity o f these sails a feature als o derived from ,

the Chi nese is th at they h ave a light batten se wn i n a hem

,

o n the sail at every reef keeping the sail very flat and per
, ,

mitting the use of reefing gear instead o f the ord i nary reef
points .

The sail al ways rem ains on t h e sa m e side of the m ast on ,

either tack being per manen tly b ung th ere O n the yard
, .

just for ward of the m ast is a short piece of l ine ( g) havi ng ,

an eye in o ne end and a wooden toggle in the other and abaf t

, ,

the m ast is a thi mble k The end of the halli ard has an .

eye spliced in it then I n setting sai l —supposing as is usually

, ,

the c ase that the sail is o n the port side —the halliard is
,

passed th ough the eye k aroun d the starboard side of the

r
,

mast and toggled to the eye in the line 9

, .

The boom is rigged i n a si milar m anner with thi mbl e (k) ,

and tack the latter about 5 ft l ong being splic ed to the boom
, , .
,

at l and leading around starboar d side o f m ast through It

,

and block m o n deck to cleat ; o r the tack m ay be fast at I

, ,

lead through a thi mble lashed at starboard side o f m ast then ,

through eye k and to cleat on boo m I n thes e sails the luff .

must be set up very taut to keep the m fiat so the tack and ,

halliard gear must be strong .

O n each b atten a short line called a parrel is mad e fast ,

just forward o f the m ast fastening w ith a toggle t o a n eye,

( p) o n the batten abaft the m ast allo wing such play as is ,

n ecessary i n lowering sail or reefing These parrels confin e .

the sail to the mast keepin g i t flatter and distributing its

, ,
AMA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G .

BALAN CE LU G SAI L .
w eight m ore uniform ly over the entire length o f the m ast ,

thus e asing the strai n on the m asthead .

A topping lift is usually fitted being i n two parts o ne o n , ,

”
each side of the sail The l o wer ends are crowsfeet as .
,

shown the m ain lin es leading through a block at the m ast

,

head an d uniting i n o ne part whi ch l eads through a block

, ,

at the deck and to a cleat .

An other line t called a j aek stay is m ad e fast to the m ast

, , ,

head leads down outsid e of th e sail and is m ade fast to the

, ,

mast j ust above the boo m or it may be l ed through a thi m ,

ble o n the boo m to a cleat I ts purpcse is to hold up the .

fore end of the bo o m in reefing and lo weri ng sail A down .

haul is also rigged to gather i n the sail quickly especial ly i n ,

case of an upset I t is m ade fast to the yard near the eye I),
.
,

and leads through a scre weye o r block on deck The m ain .

sheet is m ade fas t to a span or for a l arge sail a single block ,

travels o n the span and the sheet is rove thr ough it o ne en d

, ,

o f the latter having an eye i n it When running free the .

,

entire length o f sheet is used the eye brin ging up in the ,

block and preventing it unr ee ving b u t when closehaul ed the .

eye is hooked over a el eat on the afterdeck and the sheet i s ,

us ed double giving a greater purchase and tak i ng in th e slack

, .

For racing with very large sails bac kstays are so me ,

ti mes nec essary leading from the m asth ead to the deck
,

on each side o ne being slacked o ff and the oth e r set u p i n

, , ,

jibing When n ot i n use the slack is taken up by a rubber

.
,

band I n rigging the mizzen the j ackstay an d backstay are

.

omitted an d the topping lift 1 3 a stan ding on e made fas t to

, ,

m a thead an d bo o m the sheet be i ng sin gle

s
, .

The fol lo wing method of handling a balance lugsail w rit ,

ten by Mr E B Tred wen and p u blished in the London FJeld

. . .
,

so me ti me since refers both to the large racing sails and to a

, ,

“
cruising rig also The di ffi c ulty which is experienced by
m any can oeists appe ar s to ari se fro m the needless labor of
,

taki ng off the s ail every ti m e the canoe is housed I have .

al ways found it best to keep a m ast for each sail a cr u ising ,

mast and a racing mast an d the respective sai ls are never ,

taken off their masts except for washing or repairing Si mi .

*
A l at e r and i mpr o v e d f o rm o f b al an c e l ug i s d es c ri be d o n
pag e
lug o f a triple pulley o n the mast for the reefing gear to lead
through .

Th e only occasion on which the tack need be started is i n

racing when the wind is very li ght and the canoe is sailing
,

bet ween high banks The tack may then be ea se d up unt i l

.

the yard is hoisted ch ock ablock so as t o get the sai l as high

,

as poss ible ; at all other ti mes a standing tack will do with

”
out any part on deck .

C EN T ERB O ARD S .

In all decked can oes o f classes A and B which incl ude ,

probably two th irds of the canoes us ed in A merica sail

-
,

ing qual ities h ave o f late been consi dered as o f even more
i mportan ce than paddli ng and the sailing powers of these
,

boats h ave been d evel oped to an extent never thought of by

the first can oeists A l m ost the first quality i n a sailing boat
.

is its lateral resistan ce b y reas on of which i t can be sail ed

,

to windwar d an d to secure enough in a canoe one o f two

,

thin gs is necessary a fixed keel or a centerboard ; the lee

, ,

board being too clumsy a d evice to be of use i n a canoe ,

though at one ti m e occasionally used A n exception m ay .

be m ade here to the double leeboard used on the Can adian

canoes which may be handled on an open canoe
, ,

but will n ot ans wer for a decked o ne There are a nu mber .

of consideration s o n both sides of the question o f keel vs .

centerboard and as no general rule is possible we will notice

, ,

the leading points on either side leaving the c an oeist to de

,

cide for him self after weighing them .

First —effi ciency ; the two are about equal as to lateral

resistance an d handling if th e keel be rockered other wise the ,

centerboard boat will turn more easi l y and the doubl e board ,

is decide dly better than the keel when running free Second .

—strength and weight ; the ke e l boat will be stronger and

lighter than any centerboard boat can be b u t th e latter can ,

be buil t stro ng enough without being too hea vy Third .

durability ; the keel is not liable to accident and dera nge ment as
 A MA TE UR CA N O E B UI LDI N G .

all boards arc and there is less d anger of l eak age whil e th e boat
, ,

will stand m ore rough us age Fourth — expense ; the keel will .

cost us u ally fro m $1 5 to $25 less than a board of proper con

struction Fifth —convenien ce ; the keel boat gives m ore
.

room i nside b u t W I 1 not stan d upright on shore as the flat

,
1

botto med centerboard will which is a great d isadvantage i n ,

landing sleeping o n shore and i n packin g stores aboard

, ,

and so meti mes d angerous in running aground O n the other .

hand a flat keel as now built for centerboard allo ws the

, , ,

canoe to rest i n an upright position when o n land a very ,

great conveni ence .

Whatever style of board may be adopted to secure the ,

best results it must be placed as nearly as possi ble in the

proper po sition ; b u t again the question o f acco mm od ation
co mes in The best position for a board is i n most boats
. , ,

with the center of its i mmersed portion a littl e for ward o f the
center of l ater al resistan ce of th e hull and the center of eff ort
of the sails ; b ut in a canoe in order to obtain roo m for sit ,

ting and sleeping the board m ust be considerably for ward

,

of this if a trunk is required for it and it m ay be m ov e d for ,

ward without much harm provided the aftersai l is reduced ,

i n conse quen ce The only detri ment to this plan would be

.

that while the boat would balance properly on a wind with

the board down she would need a l arger mi z zen when i n
,

shoal water with hoard u p To avoid this disadvantage two .

pl ans are adopted either to place the board well forward and
,

add a secon d board aft or to use a folding board that will

,

not require a large trunk and may be placed in any part of

,

the boat O f the latter class o f boards there are several vari
.

etica al l of the m patented

,
.

The q uestion o f weight i n a centerboard is also an i mport

ant one Most sailing canoes require so me ballast and in
.
,

this for m i t can be carried lo wer than i n any other way as ,

a d rop o f l 8in belo w the keel is allo we d by the rules The

. .

weight being so l ow do wn will m ake the boat much stiffe r

than inside ballast can and i ts value will be found when,

running as it will steady the boat greatly The extra

, .

weight is of little account in handling as the boards may be ,

 CEN TEBB 0ARD S .

lifted out o n landi n g so that the canoe and trunks will weigh
no m ore than a canoe with fixed bo ard Several instances .

have occurred of can oes w ith h eavy boards ca psizin g under

racing sail until water poured into the well but co ming up ,

safely and continuing .

The d ouble board plan presents m any advantages for a

canoe the center of the boat is entir ely clear o f trunk lever
, ,

or gear l eav ii: g plenty of roo m for sleeping ; with two

boards i f properly worked the boat m ay be handled to per
,

fectio n i n tacking the canoe falling o ff quickly w hen the

,

for ward board is raised and l ufli ng when it is l owered and,

th e after one r aised whi le i n runn ing free the after board
,

stead ies the boat greatly The ob j ection on the score of .

weight is but sm all as both boards may be lifted out easily

, ,

wh en the weight o f the two trunks is no more than th at of

m ost folding boards while the boards the msel ves are ball as t
,

in its best shape The s maller or after boa rd will w eigh

.

fr o m 7 to 1 2l bs the for ward one from 1 5 to 601b s as de

.
,

sired or for light winds it may even be m ade of wood These

, .

boards are also m ade so that a portion o f the weight m ay be

removed as will be described further on
, .

The first point of i mportance i n building a centerboa rd

boat is the trunk for the board I n a boat of any size a .
, .

sl eep or catbo at of 1 6ft or up ward th e trunk would b

e
.
, ,

com posed of two pieces of o ak called bed pieces as l ong a s

the trunk an d for a s mal l sailboat 2x4 in pl aced o n edge
, , .

and bolted to the k eel o n each side of the slot strip s of can ,

to n flannel pai nted with thick white lead being laid b e t ween
, ,

“
them and the k eel At each end of the slot are headl edges
.

also of oak 2 or 3 in wide in a fore and aft di rection and

, .
, ,

as thick as the width of the slot which should b e l arge ,

enough to all o w fo r the board s well ing when wet The slot .

being cut i n the keel the headl edges are d riven into it at each
end an d a rivet put through e ach and the keel then th e b ed ,

p ieces are put in place with the flannel bet ween and bolted
do wn to th e keel ri vets being also d riven through their
,

ends an d the headledges The sides o f the trunk are m ade .

of dry pi ne fro m 1 to l i ins thick for a sailboat riveted at .

,
 AMA TE UR CA NOE B UI LD I N G . 91

the ends to the headl edges the se a ms bet ween the sides and ,

the bedpieces being caulked .

Such a constr u ctio n is too heavy and besides un neces , , ,

sary in a li ght boat ; the headl edges (a a) are retained but no ,

b edpieces are put in The headl edges will be fro m g to gin

. .

thic k according to the thickness of the board and i tin

, , .

wide of spr u ce
,
They are set into the keel ( b) as shown
.

in Fig 1 1 and also in plate on n ext page

.
,
The s i des .

o f the tr u nk are of well seasoned and clear wood usually -

,

white pine although mahogany is m ore durable

, A ton gue .

is planed on the l ower edge { i n wide and deep (see , .

Fig . and a corres ponding groove is ploughed on

each side of the slot The sides are gin thick on lower . .

edge for a large board b ut m ay be tapered do wn to film at

, , .

the top as sho wn to save unnecessary weight So me care

, , .

and neatn ess is r quired to make tight work ; the sides are
e

tongued on their lo wer edges then fastened together side by , ,

side with a few s mall brads and cut to the sa me shape ;

, ,

then the insides are painted a st rip o f brass being firs t ,

screwed to the i nside of each to prevent wear then they are ,

carefully adj usted with the headledges i n place bet wee n

,

the m an d a few scr e ws put in te mporarily to hold the m

,

while riveting They are then fastened together by copper

.

n ails through sides an d h eadledges abo u t 1 3m apart the ,

1 .
,

n ails being also riveted over burrs Two or three pieces of .

wood as thick as th e headledges are n o w laid i n the trunk

, ,

to prevent it o r the keel fro m co ming together i n planking ,

and are not re moved unti l the boat is finished or the trunk ,

may c l ose slightly N o w the grooves in the keel are painted

.

with thic k wh i te lead the trun k is d riven do wn into place

,

and clam ped fast rivets are put thro u gh the keel an d each
,

headledge then the holes are bored for th e scre ws These

, .

latter are of brass to gin dia meter and 3 5h long The

, . a . .

hole s are bored full depth with a s mall bit then a larger one ,

is run i n for a distan ce equal to the shank of the s cre w the ,

l att e r i s scre wed fir mly in an d filed s mooth I n fastening .

s u ch work all j oints that are p ainted must be thoroughly

fastened wh i le the paint is fresh o r they will lea k The , .
 A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LDI N G . 93

after trunk will co me o n the dead woods and it may be ,

necessary to set i n a solid b edpieec on which the trunk is ,

set as above the sides ho wever being thinner

, , , . .

Trunks are so meti mes made o f galvanized iron but are ,

l i able to rust and are not as good as wood I f the sides of .

the trunk are thick enough holes are so meti mes b ored through
the m fro m top to botto m and bolts driven do wn through the
keel preventing the m fro m splitting I n c anoes the trunks
, .

are usually Open on top so that the boards may be lifted o ut

, .

The aft e r board may be of zinc galvanized iron or co p ,

per fiih thick about 1 5 to 1 8in long I t is hung by two

.
, . .

strips of brass fix tin” or even thinner one on eac h side of ,

the board to which they are fastened by a ri vet throu gh

,

both and the corner of the board At the to p they are both .

riveted to a s mall handle by which they may be lifted out

,

A braided cord is used to raise and lo wer the board being ,

spli ced into a brass eye i n the after upper corner This cord .

runs over a b rass pulley fitted on deck whi ch is also movable , .

The heavy boards ar e usually o f plate iron galvanized ,

and are fro m g to tin thick the l atter weighing 60 pounds

.
, .

A square board as is usual i n sailboats would bring too

, ,

m uc h weigh t at the top to avoid which that portion of the

,

board within the case is cut a way until only an arm suffi ,

cient to steady the board in the case is left The board is , .

first cut to shape out of boiler plate of th e required thick

ness then it is filed s mooth at all corners and angles and re
,

duced to a thickness of 1 3, i n at the upper after cor ner -

.

where the lifting gear is fastened and at the lo wer for ward ,

corner wher e the pin hole is Nex t the board is galvanized .

and then it is ready for t he fittings So meti mes cast — iron is .

use d but it is li able to break The Pearl canoe has two

. .

boards o f M untz metal one of 68 poun ds for racing

, .

An other form of board i n which the fra me work is o f

,

wrought iron with sides o f s heet iron l eaving a sp ace inside

, ,
.

in which a plate of lead can b e inserted i s shown i n th ,

Appendix By this device a light or heavy board can be

.

had while the weight is di vided for c arrying I f the boar d

. .

be fixed in the canoe a brass bolt is put through it and the

,
 CEN TERBGARD S .

trun k on which i t turn s but the usual plan is to fit the board

, ,

to lift o ut .The board is hung fro m a brass rod or betw een ,

two brass strips (f f ) as des cribed for the s mall board the
, ,

top havin g a handle ( g) and a l so a catch to preven t the ,

lifting rod fro m pull ing for ward A s mal l brass chock (h) .

is scre wed to the inside o f the trunk to prevent the l ifting rod .

slippin g aft A rivet is als o put through the keel to retai n

.

the lo wer en d o f the rod If the board does not weigh over
.

thirty pound s it is rai sed and l o wered by a single pennant of

braided cord Two brass pl ates are rivetted o ne o n each
.
,

side of the board at its upper after corner and a brass

, ,

thi mble in whi ch t he li fting l ine is spli ced plays on a ri vet ,

A pulley is placed on deck fro m

'

through th eir upper ends .

,

which the cord leads to a cleat .

Fo r a heavier board a purchase m ust be used a chai n made ,

o f flat li nks side by side is fastened to the centerboard by ,

two large l i nks a rubber ball is then slipped o n to the ch ain

,

to act as a bu ffer and a single brass block is l ashed to the

,

end of the chain The deck p ulley ( k) over which the chain
.

runs has a s heave with a squ are groove to take the chain ,

and is al so fitted so as to s l ide into place o n d eck or be ,

r eadi l y re m oved without tak ing i t off the chai n

,
A brass .

block is al so lashed to the lifting rod at deck and the line is ,

rove by making one end fast to the tai l o f this block leading ,

through the other block on the chain and back through the , ,

first b lock then ce to a cleat By taking h old of the chain

, .

n ear the pulley with o ne h and and o f the li l ting handle ,

w ith th e other the p ulley may be disengaged and the board

,

readil y li fted out .

RUDDERS .

It is m ost essential to the safety o f a can oe that there sha ll

be so me m eans of steering besides the paddle The boat .

is so long t hat it cannot be turned q uickly by the l at ter the ,

leverage be ing comparatively short and on all but the ,

s malles t Ro b Roys a rudder is a pri me necessity T he fi rst .

can oes were built with stem and stern nearly alike both with ,
 R UDD ERS .

a centerboard allowing it to drop to a distan ce or to rise on

,

striki ng any obstacle while it may be raised by a line fro m

,

the well Thi s rudder acts to a certain exten t as an after

.
, ,

centerboard allo wing the centerboa rd proper to b e placed

,

further forward than would otherwise be possible Besides .

th is it has a further advantage that on m ost can oes it m ay , .

be so proportioned as to fold up leavi ng n othing belo w the ,

water lin e th us obviating to a great extent the necessity for

-
,

re movi ng the rudder at all as the boat m ay be l aunched w ith ,

the rudder attached but folded up so as no t to strik e bot

,

tom . I f the rudder an d yok e are both stro ngly m ade they ,

offer excellent handles by which to lift the after end of the

can oe The stock of the rudder is m ade of one piece of
.

sheet brass d oubl ed the rod on which the rudder ha ngs run
,

n ing d ow n inside the sea m as sho wn The top of each side .

is turn ed do wn horizontally and to the two the rudder yoke ,

-

is rivetted The drop portion of the rud der fits bet ween the
.

two sides a bolt or rivet passin g th rough t e three

. h *
.

The usual way of hanging the co m mon rudder by pintles

and br aces is sho wn also A better plan is to have two
, .

braces on the rudder as well as two on the sternpost with , ,

a rod of i in bras s running down through the m al lo wing the

.
,

ruddt r to rise up but n ot to unship A n old but very good

, .

plan is shown at m O n the ru dder are two braces each . ,

with a h ole throu gh it A si milar brace is pl ac ed bel o w o n .

the ster npost and a brass rod is scre wed o r riveted

per manently i nto it The up per end of the rod is held .

by a flat strip of bras s m brazed to i t whil e in the lower , ,

brace n on rudder is a slot all o wing i t to slide past m on

, , , .

the rod .

The rudder yoke should be strong and well propo rtioned ,

as i t som eti mes receives heavy bl o ws The ar ms need n ot .

be over 4} to 5i n long each as the sh orter length wi ll give

.
,

power enough So meti mes instead o f a yoke a grooved

. .

wheel is fitted to the rudder head the lines running in the ,

groove This gives control of the rudder i n any position

. ,

See pag e 198 .

 AMA TE UE CAN OE B UI LDI N G .

even when backing and has another advantage i n that the .

mizzen sheet cannot foul and the yo k e cannot catch in lines

*
or b ushes .

TABERN AC LES .

is now consi dered necessary in order to spar a canoe to

It
the best ad vantage to pl ace the masts so n ear the ends that
,
.

it is very difficult o r even i mpossible to unshi p the m when

,

afloat especially in rough water The require ments both of

, . ,

convenience and safety however dictate that thev m ust b e , ,

capa ble of being l owered both for bridges trees war ps an d , , ,

when in very rough water The arran ge ments by which .

this end is a ttained are called tabern acles several styles of

which are sho wn I n one for m the deck 13 not cut but th e
.
,

h eel of the mast is pivoted bet ween two pieces of oak ( p) each ,

2}x } in above dec k fastened secur e ly to the keel and pro

1 -
.
,

j ecting 4 5 to Sin above deck These pieces are covered

. .

above deck with sheet brass ih thick and the heel o f the -
.
,

mast is bo u nd w ith the sa me to prevent splitting A pi n or .

bolt o f film brass goes through the th ree the m ast turning on
.
,

it The after side o f th e tabern acle is also of gin oak pro

. .
,

j ecti ng l ain above deck o r enough to catch the heel o f the

.
,

mast and prevent the l ater fro m going for ward Th e mast .

is raised and s u pported by a forestay an d tackle fro m the

ste mhead to per m it w hich the sail if a balance lug m u t
, , , ,
s

have a great peak .

A nother si m ple for m w as fitted to a canoe i n 1 880 b y the

writer A triangular box was set i n th e for ward part o f the
.

canoe fastened at the botto m to the keel and at the top to

, ,

the deck in which a slot was cut as wid e as the mast and
, ,

about i tt long the box of course being of the sa me width

.
, , ,

inside I n practice the canoeist seated in the well could

.
, , ,

place the m ast i n t he box leavi ng it for paddling lying at , , ,

an angle of 45 degrees but when desired to raise it by going , ,

on the knees the m ast could be thro wn easily into an up

right position and held by a wooden chock ( o) slipped into th e

,

slot behi nd it This chock with its si des pro j ecting over
.
,

See pag e 190 .

TA B ERNA CLES .
 TENT S AND C AMP BED S .

A tent so m e kind is an essential part of the outfit of

of

every canoeist as he n ever knows when it m ay be needed

, ,

even o n a short trip A head wind foul ti de or sudden

.
,

storm m ay m ake i t i mpo ssible to reach the propo sed sto pping
place and force the canoeist to seek refuge for a night or
from the rain as quickly as possible .

Tents for can oes are of three kinds: Fi rst a s mall shel ter , ,

merely for sleeping under ; second a square tent high

’

, ,

enough to sit under and to cook or read i n ; third sho re ,

tents l arge enough for two o r three The si m plest of all is .

i mprovised from a rubber blanket hung over a boo m o r

paddle o ne end o f which is lashed to the mizzen m ast the
,

other resting on the deck The sides wil l need to b e ti ed.

down o r kept i n place by stones A better device is the .

shel ter used on the Wind ward : sho wn i n the d ra wing Thi s .

tent h as a ridge rope o ne end of which is h ooked to a n eye

,

or cleat at fore end o f well the other en d being m ade fast

,

to the mizzen mast about 3 ft above deck The cover is a

. .

piece o f sheeting or drilling h e mm ed around the edge s wit h ,

a h em also do wn the center i n which the ridge rope is run .

A triangular piece i s fitted to the after end running acro ss ,

the foot and tapes are sewn at intervals along tho ed ges to
,

tie down with This tent sho wn with the flap open m ak es
. , ,

a good shelter and sheds rain well but is hardly roo my ,

enough where m uch sleeping aboard is done I t has how .

,

ever three advanta g es in being easily set and sto wed taking
, ,

up little room in the canoe and off ering little surface when
,

riding head to wind .

A better tent o n the sa me pla n is m ade with the top trian

gular the after end about 20i n wide h aving a h em in
, , .
,

which a stick is inserted a cord fro m each end o f the sti ck

,

running to the m ast The after end is square instead of tri

.

angular and the sides are triangular all co ming to a poin t

, ,
A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LDI N G
’

.
 TEN TS A ND CA MP B ED S .

at the fore end This tent is roo mier t han the for mer but
.
,

is easily set and sto wed .

O f the second cl ass the favorite one is that co mmonly

known as the Mohican but first used b y M r C L N o rton , . . .

o n the Kitti wake This ten t in its presen t for m is also

.

shown The top piece is of canvas 22m wide and 6 to

.
, .

7 ft long
. A t each end a h em is t urned in to take a roun d
.
,

stic k gin in dia meter and mm long The sides and e nds
,
.
. .

o f the tent are m ade of stri ped a wning stuff which co mes ,

29in wide so that three breadths may be used

, The tent is .

3 0i n wide at botto m and about I ft longer o n botto m than

.
, .

o n top Th e sides and ends are se wed together at the cor

.

n ers but the m iddle breadth on each side is sewed only to

,

the to p m aking a curtain which may be rolled up as shown

, , .

These curtains l ap over th e ad j oining sides a little an d are ,

provid ed with tapes to tie the m fast The botto m o f the .

tent is fitted with gro mmets whic h b ook over s m al l scre w

heads under the b eading of the deck The tent is support ed .

by two ropes fastened to the m asts I t is so meti mes desir .

abl e to have s mall windows i n the tent which may be made ,

of circular pieces of glass ai m dia meter each h aving two .

,

holes dril led near the edge by which i t is se wn fast .

Fo r use o n shore a ground cloth % x 7i t may be used under .

the t e nt The si des should be abo u t 5in high to kee p out

. . ,

rain and wind under the sides The floor clo th should be .

waterproofed .

I n an oth e r for m of tent two ba mboo uprights o ne at each ,

en d o f the well are used the ten t be i n g sq u are with a

, , ,

rounded to p some what like a wagon A ridgepole j ointed

,
.
,

in the middle for stowage is s u pported o n the uprights the , ,

tent spread over these and the top extended by fo ur strips ,

o f bent o ak let into h e m s across the to p

,
The Pearl canoe .

is fitted with a tent o f this desc ription the uprights being ,

m ade i n two pieces o ne sliding i n the other so that by ex

, ,

tending the m the tent is raised for cooking o r reading but , ,

at night they are let do wn making the ten t l o wer and l ess ,

ex posed to the W ind .

A n A tent is so meti mes fitted to a can oe using an uprigh t ,

 TEN TS A ND CA MP B ED S .

pole is made to extend about 1 8in beyond the front o f the .

tent th us keeping the upright o ut of th e way of the door

,
.

I t is as well to have the rear upright inside as i t is useful to ,

hang clothes o n a few hooks being scre wed in it I t will

,
.

also be convenien t to h ave a few canvas pockets hung to the

walls for brush and co mb etc , , .

Can oeists i n A merica have used for the past few years a
”
very good tent o f the for m kno wn as
,
“
Marquee The .

ground space may be 7x 7ft the height to peak being about .

,

the sa me But one pole is needed w hich is i n the center of

.
,

the tent The roof portion m ay be 2& ft o n each side and is

. .
,

extended by four s mall stick s running fro m the central pol e

to each corner Th e four lower corners are first staked
.

do wn the pole is slipped into the center o f theroof rai sing

, ,

the l atter then the four sticks are pushed into place and all
, ,

is ready These tents are usually m ad e without a botto m

. ,

but a ground cloth shoul d be used i n any case .

Fo r s mall tents heavy unbl eached sheetin g may be used

, ,

and for the l arger on es a light d rill or d uck To render .

them waterproof they m ay be coated with boile d l inseed oil

and tercb in one gill o f the l atter to two quarts o f o il two
, ,

coats being sufficient The Mohi can tent has a top of heav y
.

canvas an d si des of awning stuflt n either b e ing waterproofed

'

, ,

and the marquees are generally m ad e of the latter material .

I f a stay is mad e i n any place for so me ti me the shanty ,

ten t d escribed by N essmuk in Wood craft is probably

,
” “ ”
,

the best kno wn but i n canoeing the halts are usual ly but for
,

a d ay or two and often for a night so the tent must be

, ,

quickly set and stowed

N ext to the question o f shelter co m
.

es the bed a point of ,

special interest to m ost canoeists who for fifty weeks o f th e ,

year sleep i n a co m fortable bed at ho me .

M any can oes are n ow furnished with a m attress of cork

shavings which m akes an excellent bed and also ans wers as
, ,

a life preserver This mattress the invention o f Mr C H

‘

. . . .
,

Farnh a m is 50m long 1 8i n wide and 4 m thi ck made of

, .
, . .
,

so me light material such as burlaps o r Japanese canvas

, .

I t is divided by two partitions each made o f m uslin se wn ,

 A MA TE UE CAN OE B UI LDI N G .

to top, botto m and ends into th ree parts each 50x 6x 4in
, ,

and in each o f these about 1 1 pounds o f cork shavings is

placed The partitions are intend e d to k eep the cork dis

.

tributed evenly Hooks and rings at the ends with straps

.
,

for the shoulders make it easily ad j usta b le as a life pre

,

server as i t is long enough to encircle the body

, .

I n conn ection with this m attress Mr Fa rnha m of , .

,

whose canceing has been done i n cold cl i mates has devised ,

a sleeping bag o r quilt and cover The quilt when extended .

, .

is nearly heart shap ed being 7 ft long and 7 ft at the widest

-
, . .

part The s mall end does n o t co me quite to a point but an

.
,

oval end piece is se wn in The quilt i s mad e o f sil k or sil esia

. ,

stuffed with 2} pounds of do wn evenly quilted in the edges , ,

being strengthened wi th a binding o f tape A round the .

edges are buttons and button h oles by which the qui lt may
’

be converted into a closed bag in which a man m ay sleep ,

warmly i n the coldest weather A cover of the sa me sh ape .

is m ade o f fine m uslin coated with boiled o il and being

, ,

provided with buttonholes may be buttoned closely keep , ,

ing o ff entirely the da mpness of the groun d o r even rain .

The en tire weight of the quil t is 43 po u nds and o f oiled ,

cover 2 pounds 6 oun ces and bot h m ay be rolled into a very

,

s mall bundle for sto wage The a mount o f covering may be

.

regul ated t o suit th e weather the canoeist sleeping with ,

either oiled c o ver quilt o r b oth over him or i f very cold

, , , ,

ro lh ng up in both and lying o n the cork mattress The cork .

m attre ss is used in several ways as a c us hion d uring the day .

Canoeists usually carry in su mmer a good pair o f blan k ets ,

and someti mes a sleeping bag made o f a qu ilt or blanket ,

doubled and sewn together at the edges and across o ne end ,

the other being kept Open for ingress .

I f weight and space are o f i mportance o n short su mm er

cruises a single good blanket may be taken with a lining o f
, ,

sheeting o r drill sewed to one edge and buttoning along the

bo ttom and other edge I n very war m weath er the can oeist
.

sleeps un d er the drilling only or if cooler under the bl anket ;, ,

but in still colder weat her the lined blanket will b e al most as
warm as a dou ble one and m uch ligh ter A rub ber wa ter
, .
 S TO VES A r D LA MPS
’
.

bed is so meti m es carried and is very comfortable to sleep on ,

but they are quite expensive .

O ne or two rub b er blankets are usually found in a canoe

ist s outfit an d are very useful as a ten t m ay be i mprovised
’

, ,

from o ne ; i t is n eces ary on dam p ground or i n a wet canoe

s
,

and during the d ay the bedd i ng may b e roll ed in it What .

ever l : dding is carrie d i t i s highly n eces a ry th at it sh ould

,
s

be kept dry whic h is best acco mplished by w rapping in a

,

waterproof cover o r b ag strapping it very tightly an d c arry

, ,

in g it well un der th e deck o r in a co mpart m ent I n many .

localities a few yards of m osqui to n etting are indispensable ,

as it may be used i n connection wi th any o f th e ten ts de

scribed . Several varieties o i ca mp cot are s old in the
sporting goods stores but though good i n a pe rmanent
, ,

ca mp they are too h eavy and bulky for a can oe

, .

ST O VE S AN D LA M
PS .

O n a can oe cruise any length cooking a pparatus of

of

som e kin d is o f course a nece s ity but on short trips it is s

,

usually di spensed with a supply o f cold provisions being

,

carried So me m ean s of making tea coff ee or hot so up is

. ,

al ways n ecess ary h o wever and shoul d be at han d even i f

, ,

the trip i n prospect is to last b ut a few hours D elays are .

al ways possible on the water and the prudent can oeist will ,

prepare for the m For light cook ing an alcohol stove is the
.

cleanest and most compact the best being that kno wn as the ,

”
fiamme forc é which gi ves a hot fla me in a li ttle while
“
, ,

and may be used afloat With this stove a littl e co ffee or

.
,

tea some pilot bread and a can of prepared soup a good meal
, ,

may be qui ckly prepared The only obj ection is the cost o f
.

the fuel Wood spirits may b e used instead o f alcohol and

.
,

is much cheaper ; but the od or is very d is agreeable K ero .

sene stoves have no place on a can oe as they are so di rty , ,

besides being q ui te heavy an d the o il is d iffi cult to carry ,

wi thout spilli ng over the boat A l cohol for the spiri t sto ve .
 S TO VES A ND LAMPS .

riveted in The legs are of i in roun d iron 6l n long the

. . , .
,

upper ends being flattened down and turned over to fit on

wire staples These staples pass through holes in the end
.

pieces of the gridi ron and are riveted fast When i n use , .

the fire is m ade and allowed to burn down to a mass of h ot

ashes then the l egs of the gridiron are opened and stuck i n
,

the ground over it m aking a level fram ework on which , ,

coff ee pot pails and pans will rest without danger of upset
,

ting Wh e n n ot in use the legs are folded do wn and the

.
,

gridiron sto wed i n a canvas bag .

A very co mpa ct and convenient ca mp stove was used by

Mr Smith of N e wburg at the ca mp l ast spring I t was
.
, , .

m ade of sheet iron the top being about l l Si n or larger if

,
.
,

desired in the sh ape o f a flat pan the edges turning up l in

, ,

all around The two sides were pieces of sheet iron 6in
. .

wide and l 7in long l in at each end being turned at a right

.
, .

angle as shown making th e sides each 1 5in l ong The

, , . .

ends were each 6in wide and mm long a strip 6ia long . .
, .

and 2in wide being riveted across each end as sho wn o n

.
,

the inside To put the stove tog e ther the pro j ecting pieces
.
,

on the sides were p u shed in bet ween the strips o n the ends ,

making a square box and the li d was laid o n top holding all , ,

together I n the front en d a circular hole covered by a

.
, ,

door was made to put i n the wood through and in the other
, ,

end a hole was cut to co mmunicate with the pipe This .

latter is of round or oval section about 245 m acr oss and “

, .
,

1 8i n lon g
. A t the botto m it is ri veted to a flat piece b in
. .

square which slides in the two extra strips riveted o n the

,

af ter end as sho wn i n the dra wing

, .

Th is stove m ay be easily and cheaply m ade ; i t is li ght and

compact for sto wage all folding into a flat package 1 0x 1 5x ,

la in exc ept the pipe and it is quickl y set up and taken ,

ap ar t No bottom is needed the stove being set on the

.
,

ground .

I n an other for m the bo d y of stove is h inged togeth er so ,

that when not in use the stove covers and funnel all go into ,

a canvas bag two feet long one foo t wide and about three
, ,

quarters of an in ch thi ck , which can be sto we d under floor -

 A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LD I N G .

of can oe and is entirely o u t of the way I t is made o f sheet

. .

iron ; the top is 24 x 1 2 with two holes 8in dia meter with , .
,

sheet iron covers and a s mall 2x 3in hole at o ne end to hold

, .

chi mney o r funnel The si des are z 4al o hinged to to p and

. , ,

ends 2x 1 0 hinged to top i n sa me manner ; s m all strips of

,

heavi er iron l i n thick are riveted o n sides and o ne end i n

, .
,

such mann er as to proj ect below botto m o f stove and being ,

pointed can be pushed into the ground in sett ing up stove

,

so as to h old all firm The fron t end does not have these
.

proj ections so it can be propped o ut fro m stove thereby

, ,

acting both as a door for fuel and to create a draft .

Tho funnel is made o f four pi eces hinged together two ,

23x 3 and two 235x 2li the additional half i nch proj ecting ,

b elo w and fitting into the ho le cut o n top of stove .

The top is better i n so me respects wit h out holes as the ,

cooking utensils are then kept cl ean and free fro m s moke , .

Still another stove i s so meti mes used consisting o f a ,

cylinder o f sheet iron 1 0 to 1 2in in di a meter and the same

, .

in length open at both ends A cross one end are stretched

, .

several sti ff wires upon which rest the cooking utensils

,
.

At the other end which is the botto m when used as a

,

stove an opening about 6x 7 from th e botto m edge is

,

cut t o serve as a door and draft A t the sa me end opposite .

,

the door another s mall opening is cut to give a draft to the

,

other side .

When not used as a stove i t is reversed the wires servi ng ,

as a botto m enables it to hold al l the utensils plates etc as , , .

,

a bucket and a wi re handle being fitted to the bottom for

,

that purpose .

I ts ad van tages are that a fire can be made very qui ckly ,

even with poor w ood as the draf t is tre mendous ; i t confines

,

th e heat and saves fuel en ables one to have a good fire of ,

wood too s mall to use in an open fire and rend e rs the hunt ,

ing and cutting of the usual cross piece for hanging the pots
by unnecessary and it is als o very cheap
, .

To carry the provisions i n and keep the m dry a ches t ,

of wood or tin
'

is used generally about 1 0x 1 5x 61n in , .

,

which are packed tin cans with l arge scre w covers such as ,
 S TO VES AN D LA MPS

are used on vasel ine cans for coff ee tea sugar flour oat , , , , ,

meal baking po wder rice and any other articles it is desired

, , ,

to keep dry I f the large box be waterproof as it shoul d

. ,

be such articles are so meti m es carried in bags o f light

dri lling but the cans are usuall y the best This box is usu
,
.

ally stowed j ust forward of the feet un der the deck but , ,

where it can be easily reached the s pirit la mp being al so ,

near by I n cooking on board the box is dra wn out the

.
, ,

lid or som eti mes a hatch is laid across the coa ming for a
’

, ,

tabl e and the spir it stove set up For cooking o n shore a

,
.
,

kettle fo r boiling water say two quar ts a s maller one for , ,

oatm eal etc to pack inside the large o ne a coffee pot and
, .
, , ,

a frying pan are indispensable other articles bei ng add ed if ,

there is roo m A very h andy i mple ment in a camp kitchen

.

i s a pair of light blacks mi th s tongs wit h which plates and

’
,

pans may be lifted when hot .

A light o f so me kind is a m ost i mportant part o f a can oe s

’

equip ment as the canoeist m ay o n any trip he overtaken b y

,

darkness in which case his safety m ay depend largely on

,

his sho wing a li ght A square box l antern o f brass is u sed

.

by many canoeists one s ide havin g a green glass and o ne a

,

red the fron t having a round white l ens The o il used is

, .

lard or kerosene This lamp which is fitted to slides on the

.
,

forward deck m akes an excellent sign al light but is not

, ,

visible fro m astern I n camp white slid es m ay be suhati

.
,

tuted for the colored ones The use of kerosene is a disad .

vantage as it is difficul t to carry The M ohican C C carry

,
. . .

a s mall brass l an tern i n which a candle is used gi ving a ,

whi te ligh t only and serving for use i n the ten t o r i n ca mp

, .

When under way at night it is hung fro m th e miz zen mast .

 CAN VA S CA N O BS .

The first steps of the building are si milar to those previous

ly described for a lapstreak can oe The m oulds are cut o ut in .

the sa m e man ner the ste m an d stern are prepared a rabbet

, ,

fii n deep being cut to take the edge of the canvas

. The .

inner keel f is gin thick 25 to 3 ih wide at m iddle and

, , .
, .
,

tapers to at the en d s I t is planed up without a rabbet.

, ,

and to it the ste m a an d stern b are screwed The outer keel .

is gin wide and as deep as m ay be desired not less than

.
, ,

gin I t i s plan ed up the gr ain pointing aft as des cri bed for
.
, ,

a ced ar canoe an d is fitted to th e scarf of ste m an d scre wed

, ,

te mporarily to ste m keel and stern as it must be removed

, ,

when the canvas is put on .

The fra me is n ow set up on the stocks the moulds sh ored ,

in place and all adj usted then the gun wales h of oak or ash , , ,

i x g are t acked o n and j ogs or notches are cut in the ste m

,

and stem to receive the m leaving their outer surface flush ,

with the surface o f the ste m and stern These n otches should .

n ot be cut across the rabbets Strips of o ak or ash l l .

,

are no w nailed l i ghtly to the moul ds five o r six b e ,

ing used on each side and the j ogs d d m arked and cut i n
,

ste m and stem to receive their ends w hich like the gun , ,

wales are secured with screws or rivets to the dead woods

,
.

The ribs It will be of oak or el m Q x i i n They are plane d , .

up stea med or soaked i n boiling water until qui te pliable

, ,

an d then are ta k en o ne by o ne bent over the knee and while , ,

stil l hot the middle nailed d o wn to the keel and then each ,

ribband in turn fro m keel to gun wal e is nailed te m porarily

, ,

to the rib with o ne n ail only Care is n ecessary to keep the .

ribbands fair without hollo ws o r l umps A f ter all the ribs

,
.

are in they m ust be looked over and faired up the nails b eing ,

dra wn o ut i f necessary af ter which a Co pper n ai l is driven

, ,

through each rib and ribband where they cross and riveted , ,

m aki ng a very strong and elasti c fra me .

An i nwale n l x i in is n o w put inside of each gun wale

, , ,

It being j ogged to fit over the heads o f the ribs all three

, ,

being well riveted together When this is in the deck beams .

,

0 may be fitted They are cut o ut o f oak or hackm atack

.
,

1 x § in and are placed as directed for a wooden ca noe the

.
, ,
 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G .

d eck fra me and coam ings being put in in the s a me m anner .

The fra me is now taken fro m the stocks and al l corners that ,

might cut the canvas arc s moothed an d roun ded off then it ,

is painted all over .

The canvas should be hard and cl osely woven wide ,

enough to reach fro m gunwale to gun wale The fra m e is .

fi rst turned upside do wn the ou ter keel removed and the , ,

m iddle of the canvas fastened along the keel with a few tacks , .

th e n it is turned over and the can vas drawn tightly over

,

the gun wales To d o this eff ectively the two edges of the
.
,

canvas are laced together using a sail nee dl e and stron g ,

t wine with stitches about 6ih apart along each edge Thi s
,
. .

lacing is no w tightened until th e canvas lies flat over the

entire fra me A t the ends it must be cut neatly the e dge
.
,

turned in and tacked tightly i n the rabbet which is first

, ,

well painted with thick paint When the ends are finished .

the lacing is ag ai n tightened up and a ro w o f tacks driven ,

along the gun wale after which the l acing is re moved and
,

the canvas tri mm ed do wn leaving enough to turn i n and ,

tack to the insi de o f the i n wale .

The moulds are now re m oved an d a keelson e is put in , , ,

to strengthen th e bottom being of o ak gin deep and l in , , . .

wide I t is slipped in one or two of the deck bea ms being

. ,

rem oved if necessary and the position of eac h ri b marked

, , ,

then it is re moved and jogs cut to fi t down over the ribs

, ,

after which it is replaced an d scre wed do wn running far ,

enough fo rward o n the stem to l ap well over t he scarfs and

strengthen it The deck fra me and coa ming is next finished
.
,

the mast tubes set ahd al l preparatio ns for d ecking m ade as

,

for a wooden canoe A deck is so meti mes l aid of ti n pine

. .

or cedar over which the can v as is stretched or the canvas

, ,

may be laid directly o n the bea ms The canvas for the deck .

may be a bout 6oz weight an d i s stretched tightly do wn

.
,

and tacked along the gun wales and around the well After .

it is on half round strips m m are scre wed around the edge

, ,

o f the deck and an outside keel piece o f o ak tin thick is

, .
,

fitted to the botto m the screws passing through into keel son
,

e making all very stiff

, .
 CAN VA S CA N OES .

The canvas should no w be w etted and painted with two

,

coats o f boiled o il with a l ittle turpentine and j apan d ryer

,

mixed i n after whi ch a coat o r two of paint of any desired

,

color will finish it o ff The paint must be rene wed o n any

.

spots where i t m ay rub o ff i n use b ut th e can oe should not

,

be painted oftener than n ecessary as i ts weight is m uch i h

,

creased thereby .

A n other m eth od o f building a canvas boat as described

,

by a writer in Fo rest a nd Strea m was to build the bo at of

, ,

whatever m odel desired in the sa m e m an ner as an ordinary

,

carve] built wood en boat but using very thi n planking no

, ,

attempt being m ade to have the sea m s i n the l atter water

tight This fra me is then covered with canv as laid i n thick
.

pai nt causing i t to adhere to th e wood and m ak ing a s m ooth

, , ,

watertight surface Such a boat can be easil y built by those

.

who have n ot the s k ill and training nece ssary to build a

wooden boat an d it wo uld be strong and durable as well as
, ,

cheap .
 B OA T B UI LD I N G .

of ste m do wn about to the waterline near whic h as the , ,

lines b eco me finer the ste m itsel f will be thick enough for
,

dead woods The apron m ay be fro m 1 } to 2in in a fore

. 1 .

an d aft di rection its width d epending on the fullness o f th e

,

bows .

The ste rnpost i n a boat is of th e shape sh o wn at f the ,

after side being cut a way to recei ve the stern or transo m It .

The sternpost is n ailed or scre wed to the keel an d i n the ,

angle bet we en th e two is fitted th e after dead wood g i n ,

which the rabbet is cut I n a la pstreak boat the keel batte n

.
,

( I will run fro m th e chock e or fro m the stem o n top of keel

, ,

and after dead wood to th e stern .

The fram e b eing fastened together and the rabbets cut i t ,

is set upo n the stoc ks the keel is h e ld in pl ace by a few iron

,

nails driven through into the stocks ( to be cut o ff when the

boat is re moved ) and the ste m an d stern post are lined up
plumb and with the prO per fore and aft rak e and secure d by
'

, ,

shores fro m above and belo w ; see page 3 8 Fig 9 The , . .

transom is next c ut out fro m so me hard wood using the ,

m ould b A vertical l ine is first d ra wn do wn the center o f a

.

board of sufficient size and at its lo wer end at 2 the hal f

, , ,

breadth o f the sternpos t i s set o ff o n eac h side A line is

‘

dra wn at right angles to this center line at th e height of the

upper side o f the gun wales allo wing en ough above for the
,

round of the top of the stern and on this lin e is laid off the
,

breadth of the stern givi ng t he points 1 1 The m ould

, , .

i n n o w applied to o ne side and then the other and when ,

both are marked the ste m is cut out allo wing enough bevel , ,

as the fore side will o f course be larger than the after side
, , .

The stern is no w n ailed o r scre wed to the sternpost co m ,

pl eti ng the fram e .

The moulds are n ext put in place and shored from the
ceiling or fro m the floor and a ridge p i ece is stretched from
,

ste m to stern and nailed to each as well as to the m oulds ,

keeping all in position .

The Operatio n o f plan k ing is no w proceeded with precisely

as in a canoe ( see page the st 0p waters being firs t p u t i n .

The plan king sh ould b e o f cedar in single len gth s i f DO SSi,

 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LD I N G .

ble but where ce dar cannot be obtained white pine or

, ,

even spruce m ay be used The u pper streak is usually o f .

hard wood oak walnut or m ahogany an d is a little thic k er

, , ,

than the lo wer planking and is so meti mes rab b eted over i t
, ,

as sho wn i n the sectional vie w A head is so meti mes worked .

near the lower edge and j ust above the head if a gold stripe
, ,

“
is desired a shallow depression
,
03 called a cove is plo we d , , ,

in which the gold is laid to protect it fro m in j u ry .

A fter the plan k ing is co mpleted the ti mbers are planed up ,

and put in as in a canoe or if a neater j ob is desired they , ,

are m ade a little heavier at the heels each one extending ,

only fro m th e ke i l to gun wale and are stea med and ben t ,

first then each is fitt e d to i ts place m arked and cut to fit

, ,

down closely to the planks as sho wn i n the section after , ,

which it is riveted in Bet ween each pair o f ti mbers a

.

”
“
floor is fitted si milar to the ti mber but extending across
, ,

the keel as high as the turn o f the bilge o n e i ther side .

A fter the ti mbers are in and nails riveted th e n ext operation

is to set the gun wales These are pieces of ash or o ak z z run
’ ‘

.
, ,

ning inside o f the upper streak and covering the heads of the ,

ti mbers which are j ogged i nto the m as sho wn in the sec

,

tion of upper streak gun wale and ti mbers The gun wales
, .
,

so meti mes call ed i nwal es may be gi n deep 1} wide a t , .

,

center and taper to Q in at each end They are planed up

. .
,

and if necessary stea med un til they will bend easily ; then
they are put in pl ace resting on the heads of the ti mbers ,

which latter have been cut off l in belo w top of upper streak .
,

and the position o f each ti mber is m ark ed T he gun wales .

are then re moved and the j ogs cut after which they are re ,

pl aced and fastened by a nail throug h the upper stre ak at

each ti mber and o ne or m ore between th e ti mbers .

A fter the gun wales are in a breasthook I worked fro m ,

a k nee is put in the b o w fitt i ng the inner sides of the gun

, ,

wales and the after side of the apron A rivet of f in . .

iron is put through ste m apron and throat o f breasthook , .

At the after corners transo m knees k k are put i n being

, , ,

riveted to the transo m an d also to the gun wale and upper

streak A n oak bead h al f round i n section is usually run
.
, ,
 B OA T B UI LD I N G .

r
ound the up per ed ge o f the upper streak to co mplete i t ,

being nailed through into the g u n wale .

The interior arrange ments of the boat depend on the taste

o f the b uilder but th at sho wn is the usu al o ne i n rowboats
, .

I n the bo ws is a s mall tria ng u l ar seat n a m id ships are one

, ,

o r m ore th warts o 0 accord ing to the size of the boat

,
and ,

aft are the sternsheets o r ben ch es p .

A l l o f these rest o n two strips m about 2x § in which are ,

called the risings and are fasten ed to the ti mbers at a proper

,

height to support the seats which s hould b e about 7i n b elow

,
.

the top o f g un wale The seats in how and stern are al so

.

supported by ledges and the forward ends of the latter are

,

either long enough to rest on the a fter th wart as sho wn o r ,

are supported by brack ets The th warts should be strength

ened by k nees o f wood j wel l riveted So m
.

,
eti mes a single .

knee is used in the center of a th wart fitted on i t and riveted ,

down ; and so meti mes t wo are used one n ear each edge The ,
.

th wart in which the mast is stepped should be ve ry stron gly

fastened Lockers are so meti mes b uilt under the seats but
. ,

their constru ction is si mple an d req ui res no special direction

, .

The floor is usually co m posed o f several pieces i n the .

“ ”
cen ter the botto m board q o f about 1 2in wide resting on
, ,
.
,

the ribs and held do wn by buttons or staples i n the keelson ;

outside o f this the but ton boards r 15 to 5i a wide at center .

and narro wer at the ends Sev eral s mall strips are n ailed
.

across the under side o f these to keep the m fro m splitting ,

which strips proj ect l in fro m the inner edge so as to enter

. ,

belo w the botto m board and hold down 7 r O utside of these '
.

pieces are two strips s 3 about 3 in wide an d scre wed to

,
.
,

t he ti mbers They are called the footl i nes and on each are
.
,

two buttons whi ch turn over the outer edges of the button
,

boards hol ding them do wn O u ts i de of each footl ine and

, .
,

also scre wed to the ti mbers are the racks t t to hold the , ,

stretchers for the feet wh en rowing Where the floor n ar .

ro ws up in the stern i t is rai sed a little one wide piece u , , ,

bein g fitted resting on two l edges scre wed to the botto m

, .

There are m any patterns of ro wlock in use of brass or gal ,

v aniz ed iron and the ol d wooden thol e pins are little used
,
 B OA T B UI LDI N G .

c onvenient man ner A wooden lid is fitted with a pipe also

.
,

of wood leading to the stea m chest

, This may be m ade of .

four pin e boards being 8 i t long and 8 3 1 0in square inside

, . . .

A light rack of lath i s m ade to slide i nside o n which to lay ,

the pieces to be stea med O ne end is closed per manen tly

.
,

and the other is fitted with a door or a bundle of rags is ,

stuff ed i n to confine the stea m The ti mbers bei ng ready

, .
, ,

they are laid on the rack and slid into the box which must ,

b e ful l of hot stea m and lef t there until they wi l l bend easily
, .

They ar e then re m oved o ne by one an d ben t over the ti mber

block t h e hee l s fi rs t b e ing i nserted under the cross piece
,
-

then the heads slo wly an d carefully ben t down an d fastened ,

with a cord a screw cla mp or a nail

, O f course the ti mbers
-
.

in various parts of the boat will vary i n cu rvature bu t all ,

may be bent o n the one block so m e being pressed do wn ,

closer than others Whe n they are cold they are re mov e d
.

from the block and before recovering their shape are s tay
,

lathed a strip cal led a stay lath being nailed across to pre
,
-

ven t the piece straightening out .

A l l the ti mbers are treated thus and lef t to cool Each , .

pair mu s t b e m arked i n so m e way t o preven t con fusion .

The ti mbers do n ot cross the keel b ut m e et on it and to , ,

j o in the m a floor ti mber is plac e d nex t to each pair The .

floors may be s awed fro m straight st u ff i n so me cases but ,

toward the ends and at the m iddle also if the boat is s har p
, ,

they m ust be cut from gro wn k nees

’
I f the boat h as been .

properly laid down on the mould floor the floor tim bers are ,

taken fro m the l in es on the floo r each b eing sawed to the ,

pro per shape and fastened to the keel by a D 3 1 1 or bolt of

round iron ( not a scre w bolt wit h n ut) A fter the floo rs .

are in pl ace the ti mbers are taken one pair at a ti me

, , ,

and fitted i n their respective posi tions Som e will not coin .

cide exactly with the lines of the ribbons b u t they m ay be ,

mad e to do so by straightening the m o ut a l ittle .

The tendency of ben t ti mbers is to strai hten out so all g

,

are bent to a littl e greater curvature than th e ribban ds re

quire and in fitting are allo wed to straighten a l i ttl e Every
,
.

ti mber must touch all the ribbands or there wi ll be an un ,

 AMA TE UR CA NOE B UI LDI N G .

fair spot that cannot be remedied as t he ti mbers are too ,

light to allow any cutting a way The ti mbers are na i led to .

the keel and the floor ti mbers and also to a few of the rib ,

bands to hold the m in place all being carefully set pl u mb , ,

and square to the keel .

The widths of the planks are next laid off on the ti mbers ,

and ste m and stern no allowance for lap being necess ary of
, ,

course ; and a spiling is taken n ot for the garboard but for , ,

the wale or upper streak T his is got out and n ailed to the .

ti mbers and the streak belo w i t is also put on ; then the boat
,

is taken fro m th e stocks turned over and the garboards put , ,

on. The planking will be thicker than for l apstreak n ot ,

l e ss than gm w h ich is as thin as will stand caulkin g After

, .

the garboards are laid the b ro adstreak s fo llow t hen the , ,

planking is contin ued fro m top and botto m altern ately until ,

an O pening is left o n th e bilge for the l ast plank which is ,

called the shutter .

When this is i n an d fastened the n ails are driven ,

home and riveted the inside work co mpleted the botto m

, ,

roughly planed o ff when the sea m s are ready for caulking

, .

This operation i s perfor med with a wide bl u nt ch isel ,

called a ca u l k ing i ron and a wooden mall et The iron is

, .

driven into the sea m Openin i t slightly then a thread of

,
g
,

raw cotton is driven in using the iron and m allet ,

O n s mal l .

work cotton la mp wick is used instead of raw cotton

,
To .

caulk a boat properly requires care and practice and the ,

a mate u r i n default of practical i nstructions will d o well

, ,

to e mploy a ca u lker A fter the sea ms are ca ulked they

.

should be well painted over the cotton using a very n arro w ,

brush as the p aint will help to keep in the cotton

, .

The hul l is next planed s mooth sandpapered and painted , ,

after which all sea ms and nail holes are puttied al l is well ,

sandpapered again and painted with two coats

, .

I f the boat is to have a deck and water ways as sho wn i n ,

so me of the designs no gu nwale wil l be necessary ; b u t the

,

upper streak will be heavy enough to take the fas tenings at

the edge o f the deck A cla mp or shelf will be worked i n
.

place of a gun wale along the ti mbers i nside and l o w enough ,

 B OA T B UI LDI N G .

f or th e deck beams to rest on it Th ese bea ms will be fast .

ened to upper streak and cl am p with knees on ea ch bea m

about the mast The deck may be o f s or s in pine either
. .
,

p ai nted o r covered with canv as The dim ensions o f the .

boat given in the i llustration are as follo ws : Length over all ,

1 4ft ; bea m extre me 4 ft ; depth a midships l 7in ; sheer fo r

.
,
.
, .

ward 7 }i n ; sheer aft 5 in Waterlines 3 in ap art

,
1 .
, . The , . .

waterlines are d ra wn for convenience parallel to the keel ,

b ut the actual draft o f the boat wi ll be 7 in for ward and .

9} i n aft
f . Keel outside l in ; keel ste m and stern si d ed
.
, .
, ,

l } in ; keel batten a
. r i sin g ti mbers fix ginq spaced l 2i n
, , .
,

with bent floors bet we e n each pair o f ti mb e rs ; planking ,

gin ; upperstreak si n gun wale l in d eep 1} wide a mi d

, .
, .
,

ships fiia at ends

, . .
 1 24 COMPA RI S ON OF CA N O E ELEJ I EN TS .

of afterbody By the aid of these three col umns the water

.

lines m ay be run in readily in the preli minary dra wing All .

m e asurem ents for the conven i en ce of calculation are in feet

, ,

and deci mals

E a r s op Carto n s .

Na tiu lus Cr uising l 880

, . 2 33 6 50 5) 1 3 9 £30 . 39 30
Nauti l us N o 8, Rm i ng ,
.

1 87 9 13 66 2 75 5 41 3 3 8 . 3 l2 34
u t lus
Na i No 9 R acin g
. .

and Cr ui sm g, 13 9 3 75 54 46 1 9 1 . 36 34 25
t lus
.

Nau i No 5 Raci ng
ru s
. .

and C i ing , 12 8 3 75 9
5 54 46 1 8 5 . 35 36 32
Pe r l u
.

a No 3 . Cr i sin g ,
.

1 882 15 2 63 5 7 7 5 50
P e rl
a No 5, Racing
an d Cr uising , 14 2 6 5 4 7 50 50 15 3 29
Pe l
ar No 6, Racin g
an d C ru s
i i ng , 1 882 . z 53 5 50 1 99
l e Wre
C yd n, C i ing ru s .

1 879 5 2 22 6 50 1 2 4
l e
C yd Lal oo , Raci ng
83 2 4 6 6 8 50 190
'

Shad o w, Crui ing , 1 878s 75 2 42 5 7 6 65 52 1 4 0

Ro b Ro y Cruisin g 1 867 . 1 2 0 6 5 6 55 50 9 7
Je se lue
,

r y B No 1
u
.
,

Cr isi ng , 1 878 2 42 5 4 7 55 42 13 2
Je se
r y B lue
No 2
us
.
,

Cr i in g , 1 880 45 2 42 5 52 1 6 3 37 39 40
us
.

Rari ta ni a, Cr i ing ,
1 2 72 2 22 5 72 6 3 3 49 51 12 6 87 29 37 .

1 9
68 9 8 5 50 50 12 0 49 32
 M EA S U RE M EN T R U LES .

A MERI C A N CA N O E A SSO C I A TI O N .

RU LE 1 .
—
A c an oe to co m pe te i n any ra c e o f the A C A . . .

m us t b e s harp at bo th ends w it h n o cou nt e r st e m or tr an

, ,

s om , an d m ust b e c apable o f b e ing efii ci en tl v paddl ed b y

o n e m an . To com pe te i n A C A pad dl in g r a c es , it m ust . . .

co m e withi n the li mi ts o f o n e o f th e n um be red cl ass es ,

I I I I I I I V , a nd to c o m pet e i n s ailing r ac es, it m u st
.
, . , .

co m e w i thin th e li mi ts of ei ther Class A or B .

C LAS S I — Paddl i ng —A n y c an oe
. . .

C LA SS I I — Pa d dli n g —
. Len gt h n o t ov e r 1 5f t bea m n ot
.

un der 20m D ept h n o t u n d er 8in

. .

C LA SS I I I — Paddl i n g —Le ng th n ot o ver 1 6ft bea m

. .

n o t u nder 28m D ept h n ot un d er 9i n

. .

C LASS I V —Pad dl i ng —Lengt h n ot over 16ft be a m

. .

n o t un der 8oin D epth as i n Class I I I

. .

C LA SS A —Sai li n g — Le ngth n ot over 1 6ft beam n o t

. .

over 28in .

C LA SS B — Saili ng —Len gth n o t ov er l 7in w ith a

. . .
,

l i m it o f 285in b ea m for th at l e n gt h Th e b e a m m ay b e
. . .

i ncreased §in fo r e ac h full i n c h o f le n gth d ec reased

-
. .

Th e gr e a t es t d epth o f a c an oe i n Cl asses A a n d B at .
,

fore e n d o f w e ll fro m u n de r sid e o f deck a m idshi ps to

,

i n n er side o f garboard n e xt to k eel sha ll n o t e x c eed 1 6in , .

I n c en ter b oard c an oes th e ke el outsid e o f t h e garboa rd

sh a ll n o t ex ce ed l i i n in de pth i n cludin g a m e tal ke el
.
,
ba n d over l in d eep Th e tot al w eight o f all cen
o f n ot . .

terb o ar ds s ha l l n o t e x c e e d 60 poun ds ; a n d t hey m ust n o t

d rop m or e th a n 1 8in b elo w th e g arboard ; w he n h aul ed
.

up th ey m ust n o t proj ec t be lo w t h e k ee l e x cep t as foll o ws :

Ca n oe s bu i l t befor e May 1 1 885 m ay b e fit ted w ith ce n
, ,

ter bo ar ds w hi ch w he n h aul e d up m ay pro j ect be lo w th e

, ,

ke el provi d ed s uch proj ec tio n o f b o ard an d c as e is n ot

.

m ore t h an 2l in i n depth b elo w t h e gar b oa rd a n d n ot

s .
,

m or e th an 36i n i n l e ngth . I n order to be adm i tt ed in

.

r aces w ithou t b al las t th e c en terbo ard o r boards in clud

, ,

in g bolt s a n d oth er m o vabl e par ts bu t n o t i n cl udi n g fi x e d,

tr un ks cr c ases m us t n ot e x ce e d 1 5 poun ds in tot al w eight

, .

Ca n oe s w it hou t c e n t er b o ard s ma y c ar r y k e els n ot over ,

3in de ep from g ar boards an d n o t w eigh in g m ore th an

.
,

35 poun ds Leeboar ds m ay b e car ri ed by can oes n o t

.

h avi n g c en t e r bo ar ds .

MEAS UR EME NT —Th e l en g t h s hal l be

. be t w e e n ta ke n
pe rpe n di cul ars a t th e fore sid e o f stem an d a t th e aft sid e
'

o f st e m t h e be am a t th e w idest par t n o t i n cludi n g bead

,

in g w hich sh all n o t i n Cl a ss es A a n d B ex c eed l l i n in

, , ,
i .

depth an y b e adin g ov er th i s d ept h be in g i n cl u d ed in th e

,
“
be a m Th e w ord b e a m shal l m ea n t h e bre adth for m ed
.

by th e fa i r lin es o f the boat a n d th e be a m a t a n d n e ar

,

t h e w at erl i n e i n t h e p addli n g cl as s e s sh al l bea r a reason

abl e proportion to t h e be a m a t t h e gun w al e The Rega tta . .

Co m m itte e sh all h a v e po w er to d isqualify any c an oe

w hi ch in t heir opin ion is buil t w i th an evid en t i n t en tio n
, ,

to ev ad e t h e abov e rul es AS t h e m in i m u m in Cla ss I V

. .

c oin cid es w ith t h e m a xi m u m in Class B a m argin o f l in , .

is t o b e all o w e d i n m eas ur in g f or t h es e cl ass es i n orde r ,

th at a can oe buil t to co m e w ell w ithi n on e c lass may n ot

th ereby b e r uled out of a n ot h er .
 S T EE R I N G G EA R“

N
0 det ai l o f the fittings o f canoes is as i mportant for
safety and co mfort as that b y which the rudder is con
,
~

trolled and no part is so of ten ill contrived an d badly fit ted

,
-

up .

The strong and si mple tiller o f the sailboat can not be used ,

o wing to the distan ce o f the cre w fr om the stern o f the boat ,

and also to the necessity o f usm g the feet for steering th e ,

han ds being fully occupied with the sheets paddle and cen ,

terb oard To be o f any real use the footgear m ust be

.
,

strong as a very heavy strain is often thro wn o n it i nvol un

,

tari ly by the po werful toggle j oints of the knees and the fail
-
,

ure of any part when i n rough water or i n rapids m ight

, ,

bring disaster to the boat and crew .

The action o f the rudder m ust be pro mpt and certai n

without lost mo tion there m ust be a firm hearin g for the
,

heels in paddling and for the ball of the foot i n steering an d

, ,

both m ust be readily ad j ustable to suit the length of t he leg

of th e cre w A s canoeists kno w it is often a great relief
.
, ,

when i n the canoe for a long ti me to slacken o u t the foot

,

gear and lean back casi ly whi le sailing o r paddling slo wly
, ,

but as soon as a h ard paddle is in p ospect the body is set . ,

tl ed upright against the backboard and the footgear short ,

ened up un til the feet are braced fir mly against i t for a l ong ,

s winging stroke The footgear m ust also be s o arrang ed as to

.

b e readily re moved for sleeping sto wing luggage or to carry

, ,

a second person and i f possible i t should b e so fitted that

, , ,

the secon d man can steer while paddling .

p

Fro m the d ays o f the earliest canoeist to the ti me o f

McGregor the paddle only was used for steering either hel a
, ,

in the hands or resting i n a s mall ro wlock on either side ,

 A MATE UR CA N O E B UI LDI N G .

cal led a crutch—Fig l — a plan that ans wered well with the
.

s mall sail then used ; b u t with the greater n u mber and area
o f sail s so m ething more beca me necess ary and rudders were ,

fitted controlled by a continuous line passing along the

,

deck and around the fore end o f the well a pull on either ,

side s teering the boat The increased work thr own o n the
.

h ands by the addition o f ballast centerboard spinnaker , , ,

etc made it necessary to transfer th e steering to the feet ,

which had hitherto been idle so the rudder lines were run ,

through the coa min g i nto the well and loops tied in the ends ,

into whi ch the feet were inserted an arrange ment still ,

further i mpro ved by the addition of metal stirrups This .

gave a ver y po werful and sensitive gear and it was not in ,

the way i n the least but there were some serious defects in
,

it ; there being no brace for the feet in paddling the stirrups ,

were apt to slip o ff at ti mes when it was i mpossi ble to step

and l ean for ward and replace the m while in case o f an up ,

set the lines m igh t not free the mselves and wo u ld entangle
’
the cano ist s feet I n o ne case a canoeist forgetting to
e
.
,

loosen his feet leaped ashore suddenly and was thrown flat
,

i n the water by the rudder lines .

A much better plan was devised by Mr Baden Po well for .

-

h is fir st N autilus canoe A s sho wn in Fig 3 a vertical

. .

spindle o f w ood has its low er end fitted to turn i n a step on

th e keelson the upper end running through the deck the
, ,

proj ecting portion b e ing square Belo w the deck a crossbar .

,

“ ”
called the foot yoke was fitted to the spindle and above
, ,
”
deck a second crosspiece the deck yo k e was fitted to the, ,

square head the rudder l ines r un ning along the deck to it

, .

This gear was used for a l o ng ti me on the N autilus and all

its descendants and is still often met with I t had many
, .

d efects ther e was n o b race i n paddling its position o ncc

, , ,

fixed could not be changed so i t was us ually j us t too long

, ,

or too short for the crew i t was i n the way in sto wing
, ,

sleeping or carryi ng double the lines o n deck added to the

, ,

confusion there an d the parts required careful fitting and

, ,

brass bushings at the j oints or they soon worked l oose , .

Several o f these obj ections were re moved by so me i ngenioufl

 S TEERI N G GEAR .

can oeist who cast aside the dec k yoke lengthen ed the foot
, ,

yoke and ran th e lines inside the well to the extre mities o f ,

the latter .

The gear shown i n Fig 4 was first fitted to the canoe

.

Janette i n 1 877 Two pieces of w ood each l sx l i i n and

, . ,
.

mm l ong were screwed to the bottom o n each s ide of the

.
,

keel running fore and aft each piece havin g four vertical
, ,

n otches to receive the stretcher a piece o f oak si n thick

,
. .

O n th e foreside of the stretcher a piece of oak l i n square .

was scre wed the upper end round ed for the foot yoke to
,

pivot o n The stretcher could be slipped into either o f the

.

four pairs of notches and was then held do wn by a hook

,

and a screweye in the keel This gear gave a firm rest in

.

paddling it was strong i n construction there was n o lost

, ,

m otion and it could be quickly sh ifted ( to m ake roo m for a

,

secon d person ) to a pair of si m i l ar n otches placed for ward .

An i mprove m en t o n this plan is sho wn i n Fig 5 in which .

,

the two fore and aft pieces are grooved on the sides facing
each other and a piece o f o ak gin thick and 6in wide
, . .

i s fitted to slid e freely bet ween the m To this piece the .

stretcher or fo otpiece is fastened and in the angle bet ween ,

them is a brass knee or b race sho wn separately the top , ,

of which for ms a pivot for the fo otyo k e A n eye is cast .

o n the afterside of the brace i n which a short lanyard

,

is spliced This lanyard reeves th rough a screweye in the

.

keel and by it the gear may be held i n any position or by

, ,

casting it off the entire piece may be re m oved A nother

, .

pair of slides can be fitted forward or aft as may be desired ,

for carrying two This gear see ms to f ulfill every req uis ite
.
,

and has thus far ans wered Well wherever tried .

The canoe Raven has a novel arrange men t sho wn i n Fig , .

6 consistin g o f two w ooden pedals hinged at the botto m to

,

a brass rod a rudder line being attached to the outer corner

,

o f each .A stout brass spri n g maintains a constant tension

o n the pedals an d is s o for med as to h old the m flat o n the
,

floor wh en the rudder li nes are cast off By this arrange .

m ent the rudd er is al ways k ept amidship when left to itself .

The brass rod is ht l d in two holes i n the fore and aft cleats ,
 S TE ERI N G GEAR .

keeps it from going adrift if dropped suddenly This gear .

is used i n the left h and and is not well adapted to s teering

,

fro m deck .

A n other device only mehtio ned to warn canoeists against

,

it has a sin gle stirrup o n one side with a powerful spri ng

, ,

o n the other Should the foot he suddenly re m oved fro m

.

the sti rrup the rudder is dra wn quickl y to o ne sid e and held
there Th e proper material for rudder lines has l ong been a
.

subj ect of dispute a mong canoeists and is still undecided , ,

som e advocating copper wire so me chain some a r epe o f , , .

brass or copper wire an d so me a braided o r hard laid cord

,
-

the last being probably the best if well stretched and oiled , .

I t will work easily an d W ithout the disagreeable clang of

wire and will n ot kink as chain wil l d o Whatever m aterial
, .

is used it should lead as directly as possible fro m the foo t

,

ge ar to the rudder with no shar p turns and holes and

, ,

screweyes through wh i ch i t passes should be perfectly

s mooth Th e rudder li nes are in so me c ases run through
.

brass tubes belo w deck but this is seldo m neces sary and
, ,

they are best led i n aroun d the after side of the we ll coa m
ing So me m eans o f taking up the slack in the l ine is n eces
.

”
sary the usual way bei n g to use a s mal l fiddle si m il ar to
,
“

those used for tent rOpes as in Fig 4 I f obtai nable s mall

, . .
,

snap hooks should be used to att ach the hues to the yokes
-
.

When in use the steering gear should be exa mined often

, ,

the parts o iled new lines put in if required and all parts
, ,

kept i n perfect order Before a race of course it wil l

. , .

receive special attention any parts that appear weak being ,

strengthened for the occasion Such care is n ever thrown .

a way and it is fro m the l ack of j ust such attention that pro
,
«

v ok i ng m is haps occur .
 T HE FA RN HA M A P RO N .

M R FARN H AM o ff ers
. th e following addition al instru o
tions concerning the apron described o n page 63 .

1 Carline wires are ben t so as to form a hook outside the

.

headi ng of the coa ming but they do not h ook under this
,

heading for they would then prevent the apron fro m com
,

ing free in case o f a capsize .

2 I f the fo rward tube were fastened directly to the coa m

.

ing as sh o wn the apron could no t be p ushed far enough

, ,

for ward to un cover all the cock pit .

3 The apron is not kept do wn by the ends of the carlines

.

hooking under the heading but by the el astic in the hem , .

4 The latch or catch to keep the apron stretch ed m ust

.

be j ust for ward of the last carl in s f and n ot at z The

’

.
,

apron will not readily co me free if fastened at z

'

5 The apron is better out 4 } to 5 inch es larger each way

. 1

than the coa ming The hem is th e n wide enough to give

.

two thickn esses of cloth along the top o f the coa m ing ,

where the wear is greatest .

T HE W I N D W A RD CANO E T EN T .

than the o ne described o n page 1 00 is n ow

BE l TER tent
A
' ‘

used on the Wind ward The top is a triangle the .

,

width at the after end being 2tt The sides are also triangu .

lar a bout 2} ft wide at after ends The fore ends of top and
,
1 . .

sides meet in a point which is fas tened to the ho w o f the

,

canoe .

The after part o f the ten t is squ are 2x 25“ and the ,

upper edge is se wn to the after end of the top m ak i ng a ,

h em i n which is a s mall stick

,
The tent is hung by a line .

fro m the mizzen mast to this stick The seams fro m the .
,

e nds o f the stick to the b o w where the sides j oin the roof , ,

should be se wn to a light rope or the sides will be dra wn ,

out of shape .
 C O M P O S I T E C E N T E R BO A R D S .

HE follo wi ng plan for the construction o f a centerboard

T is i ll ustrated in Plate X VI I I
The sailing canoes o f the R oyal C anoe Club of England , ,

frequently carried centerboards o f thick iron plate weighin g ,

“ ”
fifty o r sixty pounds Several canoes chiefly Pearls .
, .

have recently been built to carry si milar heav y center b oards

o n this side of the A tlantic A heavy i ron center board .

forms m ost excellent balla st when low ered but it has so me ,

disadvantag e s I t is unhandy to lift in and out o f th e canoe

. .
,

especial ly i f the latter i s bobbing about on broken water by

a wharf Whe n fully housed i n the cen ter b oard bo x i t
.
,

makes a good de al o f top h eavy weig ht and h elps the ca n oe -

,

to roll. A cting on a h i nt given to m e by Mr W P . . .

Stephens at Lake George l ast A ugust I have d esigned and

, . ,

have h ad cons tructed a centerboard loaded with lead in ,

which the greater pi rt o f the weigh t i s concentrated in the

lowe r part o f the board A skeleto n fra me o f bar iron is .

first m ade and o n each side o f this is riveted a sheet of

,

iron 3 16 m thick This makes a hollo w centerbo ard o f a

. .

total thickness o f gin and weighing 23 pounds Two l ight

,
.

iron fra mes i a wide with long h an dles are m ad e to fit

,
-
.
, ,

into the lo wer part of the inside o f th e centerboard These .

fram es are l oaded with l ead and each then weighs 1 3 pounds , ,

thus making the total weight of th e cente rboard 4 9pounds

when fully lo aded This new board will I think be found
.
, ,

to possess the foll o wing ad vantages :

The weight being concentrated i n the botto m of the center
board gives bet ter ball asting po wer with less actual weight .

I hope that my 49poun d board will gi ve as muc h sail

-

( mrryi ng po wer as a 65 po und i ro n plate would -

.
 CO lI P OSI TE CEN TERB OA RDS
l .

tinnes past M and C to L where it takes a jog in ward for ,

half an i nch to the line R R R I t follows the cham fer .

along the bottom o f the b o ard to n ear E and up to P again .

The upper corner L C M is co mposed merely o f the two

thicknesses of sheet i ron and is only an eighth o f an inch ,

thick exc e pt where it widens o ut as it a pproaches the bar

,

LM This while giving plenty of stren gth gives roo m for

.
, ,

the chai n s h ackl e at C without thin ni ng do wn and weaken

ing the fra me and i t also reduces so me what the te p heavy
,
-

weight o f fra m e at the corner These two sh eets o f iron .

,

are riveted to the fra me by Coppe r rivets as

sho wn an d are ch amfered off fro m L to D and D to E to
, ,

correspond with the cha m fer of the fram e Fro m C to L .

the edges o f the sheets are brought together so as to con tin u e

the sharp edge Figure 2 gi ves a f ull sized section at o ne o f

. .
-

the rivets The two fra mes which contain t he lead are
.

made of i x 9 6 m i ron h
«
a m m ered
-
o n the edge
. d o wn to
,
1
3 6 ,

which increases the thickness slig htly They are sho wn at .

S T U V and X Y Z O
, , , ,
T
he lead is held by pieces o f
, , ,
.

stout wire which are riveted in the fra mes before the m elted
l ead is pou red into the m These wires are shown by dotted .

lines The fra mes are fitted with long handles V I and O J
.
,

which ter minate i n eyes I and J A bove the eye J is a but .

ton K working o n a bol t F secured by t wo j a mmed n uts

, ,

belo w Th is m akes it i mpossible for the lead to fall out i f

.

the centerboard i s upside down The eyes I and J proj ec t .

a b ove the de c k .

To take out the lead when the board is housed in its b o x ,

tu rn the butto n K put your finger i n the eye J and li ft out

, ,

the for ward l ead f ra me then by means of the eye I drag , ,

the aft fra me for ward and li ft it o ut

‘

.
,

R O BE R T T Y SO N Toronto Canoe Club ,

.

The s maller sketch is a suggestion of M r King s in

.
’
, co n

nectio n with the sam e design .

D E S CR IP TI O N O F P LA T E S .

PLA TE I .
—C R UI SI N G CAN OE J ER SE Y BL UE .

The first canoe Of this name was desi gned and built by
Mr W P Stephens in the winter O f 1 877 78 being i ntended
. . .
-
,

for a cru ising boat The di mensions were nearly the sam e
.

as the present boat but the model was quite di ff erent with
, ,

greater sheer long b ow and ful l q u arters She was fitted

,
.

wi th deck hatches sliding hatch to well rudder and the

, , ,

footgear sho wn i n Fig 4 Plate XV I I and was rigged as a .

, .
,

schooner two boo m and gaff sails and j ib The rig was
,
.

subsequently chang e d to leg of m utton and later to bal ance ,

i ng
. The m odel sho wn in Pl ate I and I I was designed . .

i n 1 880for the sa m e purpos e as the preceding o ne gene ral ,

cr ui sing and a nu mber Of canoes have been b u ilt from it

, .

Plate I sho ws the lines Of the boat and also m ethod Of

. ,

putting the m on paper as explained in the chapter on desi gn

ing The di mensions and table Of Offsets are given o n pages
.

13 and 22 I n cruising this canoe W 1 11 carry a m ainsail Of

.

45 ft with m izzen O f 1 8 to 20 and i n racing a m ainsail of , ,

65 to 70 sq ft . .

PLATE I L J E R SEY BLUE

CO N STR UCTI O N DR AWI N G , .

This d rawing sho ws the arrange ment Of decks bulkheads , ,

etc and the general construction O f the sa me canoe and is ,

d escribed on pages 52 55 -
.

PLATE I I I .
—RI VE B C AN O E , RAR I TAN I A .

This can oe was designed by M r W P Stephens i n . . .

for work o n s mall rivers and strea ms She is buil t wit h a .

flat keel and can be fitted with a centerboard or a false keel

,

of wood can be scre wed o n The floor is flat the keel pro .
,
 D ES CRI P TI ON OF PLA TES ,

j ects but 1 4a and on each side are o ak bil ge keels fi n

, .

square O n to these and t h e m ai n keel the boat rests

.

squarely and m ay be dragged without in j ury Two sai l s

, .

are used either l eg O f m utton or l ateen the latter bein g the

,
,

better T hei r areas may be 1 5 and 3 0ft for crui sing

. . .

Len g th l 4i t bea m 27 in depth a midships

.
, at .
,

b o w 3 §i n sheer at stern z am cro wn Of deck 3 in

.
, , .

Hal f B e ad h s
r t . Heigh ts .

Ca m

3
3 2 8 ”
” G P S 8 2
D 9
3 0 2
9
.

2 8
“ 8 8
fl "! ”
1
Q
P g
-
tj
g
b j
w E E
'

c
U o o o o

e
K x S

a
a
s x
.
G
m
on e
m
m

-1

sa s s:

X X
OD Q m m c m fl u o

X X R K
’
X X X X X ’
 D ES CRI P TI ON OF PLA TBS .

TA BLE O F O FFS ET S FOR CANO E “

DO T .

Half B ea d th s
r . Diag o n a ls .

D e ck . L W . L. No 2. . No 3 . . A . B . C D . .

The keel ste m and stern are l in thick ; planki ng ( lap

, .

streak 5 plan ks on each side) i in decks and hatches i in

, , , q
'

ribs o f oak i x gin ” spaced 6in apart M any changes h ave

, . .

been m ade i n the boat as experien ce has shown t he m to be

n ecessary ; t he fore bulkhead sho wn by dotted lines has , ,

been re moved the fore hatch perm anently fasten ed d own

, ,

2i n of k et l added fore m ast tube shifted for ward and en

.
,

l arged fro m i s to 2ih the Old steering gear with a yoke on .

deck and o ne belo w replaced by a yoke b e lo w deck on a ,

vertical pivot an d the elli ptical well entirely covered with

,

hatches changed to on e with a point ed flaring coaming , ,

with an apron The pad dle used f o r several seasons past

.

has been 9i t l ong . .

PLA TE V — RA CI N G SA I L O F THE
“
DO T. .

The racing rig O f the D ot con ists Of two b al ance lu es r

70ft and 25ft the larg e r O f which is sho wn i n Plate V

. .
,
.

D I MEN SI ON S O F S A I LS .

Main .

6ft l ol u . .

Leach ,
1 0f t. 9in .

Fo o t . 9f t . Si n .

Head 7f t . 3ia .

T a k to pe ak
c l 3ft .

Cle w to t hr at o l Of t . 7m .

Batte n s e4 m apar t o n leac h an d 22in

. . on luff .
 A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LD I N G .

When the sail is taut the ring on the y ard is dra wn close
in to the mast raising the y ard and throwing the fore end a
,

little further forward than it is sho wn The halliard a a is .

,

h ooked into an eye on the parrel c ( the l atter mad e fast to , ,

the yard j u st forward of the m ast) from which i t leads

through a ring o n the yard th e n ce through a block d at the .
,

mast head and do wn thro ugh a ring lashed to the mast near
, ,

the deck fro m which it l eads to a cleat abr e a t the well

, The s
.

tack b b is seiz e d to the boom j ust forward Of the m ast an d ,

leads through a hook o n the boo m abaft the m ast under a ,

hook in the deck and to its cleats , .

The par rels e e are mad e fast to the battens j ust fo rward
,

and aft o f th e mas t and when in place hold the sail i n to the
, ,

m ast keeping i t flatter and relieving the m asthead Of con

, ,

siderab l e str ain The reefi ng gear is rigged as follows : Three

.

deadeye s f f f are se i zed to the b o o m as sho wn The reef

, , .

line h from the leach is in two parts fro m the batten to the
, ,

deadeye o ne part on each side Of the sail A t the deadeye

, . ,

they uni te into one part leading forward al ong the boo m , .

thr ou gh the middle deadeye thence through the block t on

’

, ,

fore reef line This line 9 also runs do wn each side of the
.

sail through the deadeye and i s then lashed to the single

, ,

block A pull o n th e haulin g part ( the halliard being firs t

slacked a way ) brings boo m and b attt n snugly together t he ,

line is belayed to the cl ea t o n the b oo m and the m iddle reef

points I hooked together or a third l i ne m ay be added i n .

place O f the points A si milar arrange men t may be rigged.

on the batten d ra wing do wn a second reef The points o n

, .

the halliard where it is belayed when a reef is hauled do wn

are marked with colored thread so the halliard can be slacked ,

a way the proper distan ce made fast and the reef hauled i n .
,

and belayed A sling abou t 1 8in l on g has both ends seiz e d

. .

to the b oom O n this a deadeye travels to which the sheet

.
,

is fastened .

PL ATE V I .
—C LY D E C AN O E LA LO O .

The foll owing d esc ription O f the Lal oo with the d raw ,

ings was furnished by M r C G Y K ing Of the Clyde C

, . . . .
, .
 D ES CRI P TI ON OF PLA TES .

C a well kn o wn canoeist as wel l as an a mateur d esign er and

.
,
-
,

builder The desig n differs i n m any respects fro m A merica n

.

models an d h as n ever been tried i n co mpetition with the m

,
.

I t will be noticed that th e l ines whi ch sho w th e inside o f ,

plan king are n arro wed in a m idships to allo w the boat to

,

Spre a d i n building .

Mr K ing says : Talking o ne evening over a quiet pi pe

.

with an ol d canoeing fri end Cha rlie Livingstone of Liver , ,

pool we both agree d that a n ew d esign Of canoe was a cct s

,
-
,

sary ( to our ideas) and i f n ot actually pro m oting canoeing

, ,

it would give us so me new experience i n c anoes SO we set .

to work s k e tching free ha nd designs and i n course of ti me -

hit upon the idea Of a canoe h aving very f u ll l i nes aft car ,

ryi ng the floor well for ward so as to give the basis Of a f ull ,

b o w which at the sa m e ti me would look as if i t were extra

fine O ur aim was to buil d a can oe that woul d for her size
.
, ,

be the stifl est under sail quickest under paddle an d a good , ,

dry seaboat We succeeded The lines Of acco mpan ying

. .

dra wing are the inside o r skin lines .

TO those who do n ot und erstand what that means a few ,

words will ex plain The principal di mensions Of t he c an oe

.

are : Length 1 6ft ; bea m 3 1 § in ; depth fro m insid e Of g i r

, .
, .

boards to top of top strcak a midships 1 1 §1 n ; depth o f keel

-
,
.
,

including m etal band 2i in I n setting up the fra mes i t is a , .

wise thing to cut the m at most l in le ss bea m a midshi p .

th an bea m required when finished as the thickness Of the ,

planks each side has to be allo wed for and the boat is al most ,

dead certain to fall o ut af ter the tie bea ms are re moved pre
vions to scre wi n g do wn the deck .

The dra wings give a sheer pl an a body plan and a deck ,

plan The lines A and B i n all three are b u ttock lines The
. .

waterlines ar e indicated i n the body and deck plans by 1

2 3 4 and cross sections i n body and deck pl ans by 1 2 , ,

3 5 G 7
, ,
The midship section is so me what di fferen t fro m
, .

what is o r what the writer k no ws as the Shado w m odel The .

Shado w h as too mu ch tu mble ho me an d loses stability as she

li es ove r to a bree z e .

The Lal OO has her greatest bea m at the gunwale and has ,
 D ES CRI P TI ON OF PLA TE8 .

is most a mple for a long cruise She is perfectly Open down.

belo w fore an d aft ; h as n o water tight bulkheads bu t has

,
-
,

instead probably india rubber air bags fitted to her sh ape

( before deck is scre wed d own at b o w and stern ) T hese bags .

will be about a co u ple Of feet long an d can be inflated at ,

will and h ave m ore than eno ugh buoyan cy to float the canoe
,

when full O f water and with her cre w o n board

, .

At the aft end O f wel l is a sli ding bulkhead a nd by re ,

m oving i t and folding back the hatch lid H roo m can be -

,

m ade for a crew of two ; o r when cruising alon e with out a

ten t a c omfortable couch can b e Obtained in a few seconds .

PLA TE V I L—SAI L
“
PLAN OF LA LO O .

This sail h as an area Of 60sq ft the first reef has 1 6 sq . . .

ft ; second reef 1 5 s q f t ; leav ing 29sq ft f or a close reef

.
, . . . .

when blo wing hard Figure 1 is a f ul l sail plan sho wing al l

.
,

the rigging necessary with out being co mpl i cated A are m ain .

halliard bl ocks at m asthea d and foo t Of m ast ; D is double

block for topping l ift ; K is singl e s mall block for j ackstay ;
J S j ackst ay ; M H m ain halliard ; T L topping lifts — o ne
, , ,

On each side o f sail ; B reefing battens ; R reef points ; R C

, , ,

for ward reef cord ; R C 2 after re ef cord ; P loop and toggl e

, ,

to secure l o wer en d Of topping lift ; 0 cleat to receive R C ,

2 when reef is hauled d o wn .

S parrel on boo m o n which runs a deadeye or block

, ,

to which is fastened m ai n sheet When lying close ha u led .

the block is at the after en d of S and S helps to distribute

“

strain on boo m ; when running free block is at fore end o f

S and m ain sheet does n ot drag i n the water M m ast W . .

o n boo m an d o n each batten are parrels to kee p sail close up

to mast so that it won t bag with t he wind W 0 j ack

’
.
,

block Figure 2 illustrates o n a large scal e h o w to fasten

.

halliard to yard so as to dispense with the serv ices of a trav

eler T at the throat is a loop fastened to the yard through
.

which passes a toggle o n the end of th e halliard The hal .

liard then passes round th e Opposite side O f the m ast fro m ,

which yard and sail are is reeved through block B o n yard

, ,

then through block A at masthead then d own to block at ,

 AMA TE UR CA NOE B UI LD I N G .

mast foot and thence to el eat The topping lifts are toggled .

to boo m so as to be easily detached when spinnaker is to be

hoisted spinnaker head lying ready to be fastened to either
,

as required the other topping li ft re maining in its place

, .

The j ackstay is rigged on the outside O f the sail so that .

when sail is lowered the tria ngular part at boo m Y Z pre , ,

vents the sail fro m flopping over the deck o n the one sid e ,

wh i le t he mast prevents i t o n the other X is a brass rod at .

the masth ead for a fly There are several plans by which

.

the sai l can be reefe d instantaneously

“
Th e one here .

sho wn the writer has found to work the best Lt t us start .

at the back and follo w the first reef all ro u nd O ne end of .

the cord is secured at the back and is rove through brass ,

rin gs 31 d i a meter sewn on sail where sho wn then th ro u gh

, ,

block at l uff of first batten then t hrough block i n l ine O f ,

mast then do wn to a deadeye at mast foot then to cleat

, ,

wherever handiest for o wner Then the after part has to be .

l ooked to Rig cord in the sa me way starting at the cle w

.
,

and cleat o n C at boom Th is gives a very han dy plan for .

rcefing q u ickly i f caught in a squall w hile racing When .

the squall has passed slack o ut reef cords and hoist yard at
once Fo r a good deliberate reef while cruising it would b e
.
,

w e l l to tie do wn reef points as well as the extra ti me it ,

takes is n ot wasted I t is a capital plan to have all blocks

.

for use about the mast fas tened to the mast and not to the
deck so that when one co mes ashore to dis mantle the m ast
, , ,

sail and rigging can be re moved and returned without the

bother O f al ways re rig ging -
.

The Lal oo was desi gn e d to be sailed wi thout a mizzen .

though an after sail is Of great service in mostly all weath er .

PLA TE VI I I .
—NAU TI LU S RACI N G A N D On u rm e C AN O E .

For the dra wings o f this canoe as well as the two follow ,

ing ones and the canoe ya wls we are indebted to Yacht

,
“
,

and Boat Sailing This canoe was designed by Mr Baden

. .

Po well for Open water cruisi ng an d for racing under the

,

R C C rules
. . . The main O b j se ts i n vie w were sleeping roo m
.
,

g ood sailing lines and light draft Centerboard o f plate iron .

-
,
 D ES CRI PTI ON O F PLA TES .

83 l bs Length 1 4 ff ; bea m 3 3m depth a midshi p b i tin g

.
, .
, ,

sheer at ho w 72m do at stern 5} in d raft 7 i a k eel l in

, . .
, .
, , .

A A—Mas t t ubes BB—Headl ed ges C— Ce n te r bo ard D —For e

b lk head with do or E —Drai n pipes to co mpartmen t F—Fo o ty o k e
.
. .

H Han dle f en te r b ard I —Hauling up g ea f

.

G— Deek y o k e
, .

-
O c o r O
e n—t e b a d J Ra k f leats K —Fo e h at h L Afte r—h at ch
. .

c r o r -
c or c r c -

N—A ft e r b ul k h ead wit h d oo r

.

M Se a t f padd li g O Fl
. . .

or n oo r
board s P— Ba k b ard f padd li ng S—Sh eer f o rud d e r tri cingl in e
. .

. c o or . r .

Half B e d t hs r a .

n 6

a %
1
e t s s 9 0
r
a 6
t t
1

a i i 9 2

The sails are two balance l ugs of 95 and 25sq ft . .

 D ES CRI PTI ON OF PLA TES .

PLA TE X C AN O E N O 6
.
-
PE AR L . .

This canoe was designed to co mpete n ot only with canoes ,

but i n the races o f the Tha mes gi gs boats much larger than ,

canoes and she has been remarkably successf ul both with

,

th em and h er o wn cla s She is fitted with two centerb oards

s .

o f M untz met al the forward on e O f 68 pounds being gi n

, ,
.

thick. The sail carried is 1 05ft in m ain sail and a b out 40tt . , .

in mi n n the latter being fitted to reef by roll ing on the

t

, ,

bo om Len th l 4i t b eam 33 l n depth a midships 1 4in

.
o .
,
.
, , .
,

sh eer at how 7 in at stern 4m .

Half Br e ad th s Heig h ts. .

K X K SA K K
‘

©
s
53
a s
3
s
3 ; a
K ]
as s e s s s l
 A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LD I N G .

PLA TE XI .
—A ME RI CA N CE UI e G C ANO E .

Th is c an oe w as d esign ed i n 1 883 by Mr W P St eph en s . . .

,

Of the New Y ork C C fo r ge n era l c ruisin g a n d raci n g

. .
, .

D EP TH S . HA LF B R EA D T H
-

D e ck . Ra bbe t . D e ck .

To m ak e th e sam e li n e s an swe r f o a 1 5x 30 can oe th m ul ds r , e o ,

si x in n u m be r may be s pac e d 25 m apar t i n s t e a d f 24i n as

,
7
. o ..

sh o wn . A n ex tra m o ul d at e ach end No s 1 and 13 wil l b e u s e ful , . ,

in b uil d i n g .

Th e m ov abl e bulkh ead i s placed 8ft 3i n from the . .

b o w a nd sh apes af t givin g a n e asier position to the

, ,

body than w h e n v ertic al Th e after bulkh ea d is pl ace d .

9f t 9in fro m the b o w and is fitte d so as to be w ater

. .
,

ti ght up to the to p O f th e c oa m i n g w hi ch ru ns aft 15in , .

fu rthe r th e bul khead proj e c tin g

, or the t hickn ess

o f th e h atch es a b ov e th e coa m i n g
, O n the top Of this .

bulk he ad is scr e wed a strip Of fl at brass d ff i n t hick ,

a .

( see Pl ate XV II I ) a n d w id e e n ough to proj ec t gin on

.
.

each side o f th e l at ter ; thus i f th e bul kh e ad is ti n thick , .

,

the brass should be l i in The cuddy hatc h b is .

th ick fl at w ith n o cro wn an d e x t ends fro m t he fore sid e

. , ,

Of t he bul kh ea d to th e s hi ft ing bul khe ad an d m ay pro ,

j ce t a l ittle o ver the l a tte r I n w idth i t exte n ds 8111 ov er .

.
 D E S CR I P I 1 01 V Ufi P L A 1 E S
'
'
.

th e coaming on each side allo win g side pieces i in thi ck to , .

be n ailed to i t the latter extendin g do wn to the deck

, Th e .

grai n sho u ld run ath wartship and the hatch m ay b e ,

strengthened by a batten screwed to the under side running ,

fore an d aft The after hatch a is made i n a si milar m an

.

ner but extends aft O f the wel l 3in with a piece across the
,
«
.
,
‘

end as well as o n the sides The side pieces of both hatches .

meet at the j oint sho w n .

*
Both hatches turn o n flat brass hinges with brass pi ns ,

which are riveted to the brass strip an i t he h atches may be ,

fastened with b oo ks and screweyes o n deck or w ith hasps ,

and padl ocks The cuddy hatch i s Opened by turning i t aft

.
,

while th e after o ne turns forward each when Open lying flat ,

on top O f th e other The side pieces reaching to the d eck

. , ,

k eep o ut any s pray or waves and the brass strip if not per , ,

fectl y water tight m ay be m ade sO by a strip o f rub b er

-
,

cloth 3 i h wide tacked to both hatche covering the str i p

.
s
,

and i ts j oints O f course n either O f these ha ch cs wi ll keep

.
'

o ut all water w hen capsized but they w ill be m uc h d ryer ,

th an the ordinary d eck hatches they cannot be lost o r left ,

behind the cuddy h atch is qu ickly turned over o ut O f the

,

way they are ea sily Opened and shut and cannot drop OE
,

and al l o w the contents to fal l out i f c ap sized while being ,

flat they can be mad e very strong and will not warp as all
,

curved hatches do .

N ow to m ake the after on e water t i ht Th e coa ming - g

.

inside will be probabl y 25m d e ep or a l ittle m ore and

“

1 .
,

around its lo wer edge as well as across the b u lkhead

, a ,

beading made Of four strips g g each tin square is scre wed , , .

,

strongly and o n this b eading is l aid a s m all t ube or band of

,

soft rubber The i nner hatch c is a board gin thic k with

. .
,

two b attens o n th e under side to prev ent warping an d is ,

large enough to fit n eatly inside the coa ming resting on the ,

rubber tube or washer TO hold this h atch down a cros .

,
s

bea m 6 is used of oak 1 in square at the middle where a

, .
,

brass tl rumb sc rew f passes through and l i n wide b y § in , .

~
.

thick at the ends I t i s l in l onger than the distan ce bet ween

. .

th e coa ming to the b u lkhead Th is bea m slips into two .

I n fi tt i n g t hi s arran g e m e nt th e h i n g es a n d r ubbe r h a v e been

d i s ca r d e d a s u nn e cess a r y .
 D ES CRI P TI ON OF PLA TES .

racing it sh oul d be so placed Both tubes are shown of the .

same size 2ih at deck and l a

, , at botto m so that the m i zz en
.
,

m ay be used forward i n high W i nds The rudder m ay be .

o f th e new d rop for m or of gin m ahogany and w ill , .

,

curve qui ckly aft fro m the waterl ine so that i t will not re ,

tain weeds o r lines which may d rift under i t .

The for ward bulkhead is n ot sho wn as canoeists no w ,

diffe r so m u ch in thei r id eas as to its prOper p lace I t may .

be so placed as to leave 7 ft b et ween it and the after bulk .

head bein g made as tight as possibl e o r i t may b e o mitted

, ,

entirely air tanks being used instead

, .

The rig for cruising will be about 50 an d 20ft an d for .

,

racing 70ft i n the mainsail and about 25 i n mizzen

, . .

The fo l lo wing construction i s reco mmended as being the

best and i f properly fastened wil l be strong and light Ste m and
, .

stern hack matack knees with proper grain l in thick ( sided ) ;

, .

keel o f whi te oak gin thi ck (i in outside i in for ra bbet . .

, .
,

and i i n i nside) ; width at center 2in outside and 3 ih inside

. . . .

N o keel batten will be n e e ded the entire ra b bet being ,

worked i n the keel The planking will be of clear whi te.

cedar i i n thick laid with gi n lap the l ands outside being

.
, . ,

rounded d o wn at the en ds The upper streak sho wn in .

,

th e plans will be o f mah ogany gin thick and should be o f

, , .
,

strong tough wood This streak will be rab b eted o n i ts

,
.

lo wer edge lapping gin over the streak belo w The ribs
, . .

wi l l be o f white oak stave ti mber 1 x§ in spaced 5ih a part .

,
.
,

each running ac ross from gun wale to gun wale except at the ,

extre me ends and abr ast the centerboard trunk They are e
.

fastened wi th copper nai l s cut off and riveted over burrs ,

n o t copper tacks except at the extre m e ends ,

The weakest .

point o f a canoe especially those with flat keels is the mid

, ,

dle of the botto m which in this boat is stiffen ed by the floor

,

ledges z 2 Plate I I These which are placed on eac h al tern ate

, .
,

rib are o f oak o r better hack matack gin thick and deep
, , , .
,

enough to raise the floor 2 or 25 h Th e y will o f course b e .

straight o n top where the floor li e s and wil l fit th e rib o n

, ,

the l o wer side They are fastened with l ong sli m copper
. ,

n ails through the laps and ribs ri veted on the upper side
, ,
 AMA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G .

of the l edge This construction is bo th stronger and lighter

.

than the use of a thicker keel The decks will be of .

mahogany i in thick and will be scre wed to the upper edge

.
,

o f the gun wale which takes the place of the i nner w ale and
,

headi ng making a strong l ight to p

,
The general arrange , .

ment o f deck fra me and coa ming h as been fully described o n

pa ges 52 53 -
.

I n finishing the canoe the i nside belo w deck s is painted

in side of well and entire outside is varnished an d a gold
, ,

stripe gin wide is laid along the m ahogany upper streak l in

. .

fro m the l o wer edge This gol d stripe should be slightly belo w
.

“ ”
the surface o f the streak to protect i t a cove or groove , ,

being ploughed to recei ve it Plate X VI ) .

PLA TE K I L—T AN DE M C AN O E .

Perhaps no sev e rely the skill o f the de

heat taxes m ore
signer t han a modern canoe as there are so man y conflicting ,

quali ti es to co mbine in o ne har mon ious whole within very ,

n arro w li mits o f size weight and d raft b u t difli cul t as the

, ,

task is with a si ngle canoe i t is stil l h ard er with a double ,

boat and the best that can be expected is a co mpro mise

, ,

sacri fic i ng many desirable points to others still more i mpor

tant Such a can oe sho uld have first snfli cicnt displace
.
, ,

ment to float easily two men o f average weight wi th their

stores ; secondly roo m for both men to sit i n co mfort al low
, ,

i ng roo m to m ove around and stretch the legs ; th ird roo m ,

for their stores and clothi ng ; fourth a foot steer i ng gear by ,

-

which either can steer Such a boat is us ually intended also

.

to be paddl ed by o ne man i f required to acco mplish which , ,

n o g reater length is ad missible tha n 1 6ft both o n accoun t .

o f handiness an d increased weight .

I f the bo at is in tended for a long cruise where much l ug ,

gage must be carri ed a length o f 1 7ft with a b ea m of 3 2in

, . .

would be better but the sa me plans may be used laying

, ,

down the sections 25in apart in the working drawing .

,

an d placing the mo ulds at the same di stance To in crease .

the bea m the boat m ay be made l i n d eeper a midships . ,

the heights at ste m and ste m being the same ; then when
 D ES URI P TI 01V OF PLA TES .

planked an d ti mbered but b efore putting i n bul k heads or ,

d eck bea ms the sides m ay be s prung apart two i nches with

,
'

o ut afi ecti ng the fairness o f the lines .

a .Mainm as t tube h Fl oo rbo ard s . . .

b .Fo r e bul k h ead i Middle h atch . . .

c .Sli d es for s teerin g g ea r k A f t e r h atch . . .

d .Fo r e ha tch 1 Doo r in bulk h ead

. .

e e B ack bo ard s
. m Af t e r bulk h e ad
. . .

f .Sli d ing hatch at Mizzen m ast tub es

. . .

9 .Foo tg ear fo r afte r m an 0 Ru dd e r lin es . . .

TABLE OF O FFSE TS .

Hal f Bread th s .

NO 1 . . No 3
ec k W l
. .

D . L , , LW L. . . W . L . Diag . . Di ag 2 . .

oo oooooo

e fr o m f re s id e f s t e m
Dist an c o o

To mai nm as t 2ft 9i n , . . To Mizzen bulk h ea d ,

1 3f t .

Fo r e bul k h ead aft , . 6in .

Fo e en d f well bf t
r o , . bulkh ead
A f te r ,
l 2i t .

Sl idin g bu lk h e ad 8ft , . A fte bul k h eadr , 1 2ft .

Se ctions centers waterl ines Sin apart heights

271} i n .
, .

measured fro m rabbet line at midshi ps planking i l n lap of

spaced 6i n keel ste mand stem
, .

planks gin t i mbers .

, ,

sided l in keelson o r keel batten 756 x 2in deck i in

.
,
.
, .

A yo k e is provided o n the afterside of the sliding bulkhead ,

so t hat the after man may steer while anoth er style of foot ,

gear shown i n the body plan is fitted to the sli des forward
, , ,

which can be used either by the forward man or by a man

who is sailing alone I n the lat ter cas e the hatch z is
‘

rem oved an d stowed belo w th e bul k head sh ifted aft to the ,

fore edge o f b atch k an d the ope ning at after end o f the well
,

closed with a canvas cover This cover is m ade of duck .

,

pain ted an d fits down over the co sming and the edge o f the
,
 D ES CRI P TI ON OF PLA TES .

at the m asthead leads do wn the port side outside of the sail

, ,

and is lashed to the m ast j us t above the boo m I n low ering .

or setting the sail it lies i n the to ppi ngl i ft and j ackstay

, ,

which prevent its fal ling overboard .

The mizzen tack leads direct to a cleat on the deck near

th e mast an d the halliard lead s th rough a single block
,

lashed to the m ast an d is belayed to a cleat n ear the after

,

end of the wel l o n the starboard side The mi zzen sheet .

leads to a cleat on the coa ming on the port side of the well .

The mizzen toppi ngl ift is doubled ( on both sides o f the sail) ,

and a lso terminates i n crowfeet on the low er ends Th e .

mizzen m ay be l o wered and allo wed to hang in it .

PLA TE X l V .
—C AN VA S C AN O E
. .

D etails of canvas canoe building are given o n pages 1 1 1 1 14 -

.

PLATE XV .
—ROW B OA T .

This bo at is of the ordinary type of pleasure boat for ro w

ing and fishing on lakes an d rivers Full details are given .

on pages 1 1 5 1 22 -
.

PLA TE XVI .
—Ro wrN G AND SAI LI N G BO AT .

This boat was designed for saili ng in a s m all bay where ,

it frequen tly happens that after sailing som e d istan ce the

wind fall s and i t is necessary to row hom e and it was desired ,

to keep h er i n a boathouse i n order that she m ight be al ways

d ry and ready for use when required .

Her len gth over all is l 3 i t beam 4ft dr aft aft when .
, .
,

l oaded 1 0i n freeboard i tt at ho w 1ft 8in at stern l i t 4i n

.
, .
, . .
, . .

O wing to her depth the cent erboard which is rather long

, , ,

is en tirely under the two th warts and as much o ut of the ,

way as i t can well be I t is of oak bolted th rough wit h a

. gin .

iron and is fitted with a lifting rod o f gin brass with a

, .
,

h andle at the top This rod is s o hinged as to turn down on

.

to p of the tr u n k when the board is up being held by a b ut ,

ton The mast is stepped in a tabernacle so as to b e easily

.

re moved for ro wing This tabern acle is made o f two pieces

.

o f oak 3 x2§ in at deck above whi ch they project l a

.
, in At .
 AMA TE UR CAN OE B UI LDI N G .

the botto m they are secured to an oak m as t step in which ,

is a mortise for the heel o f the m ast and at deck they are ,

let into a piece o f board 5in wide running ath wartship and .
, ,

scre wed firmly to each gun wale Fro m the mast to the ho w .

a dec k of i in mahogany is laid which with its framing

.
, ,

holds the tabernacle fir mly and prevents any str aining o f ,

the boat The forw ard side of the tabernacle is closed fro m
.

the step up to with in 8m o f the deck s o that the mast wil l .

,

not slip for ward when being stepped The heel is slipped .

into the t abernacle the mast raised up fal l ing into the step
, ,
.
,

and a brass catch pivoted at one end is thrown across the

.
,

a fter side at deck an d fastened wi th a turn o f the thu mb nut

shown The sail is a balan ce l ug fitted with one batten
. ,

Foot 1 3 ft ; he ad 9ft 6ih ; luff 6ft ; leach l 4tt 6in tac k

, . , . .
, .
, . .

to peak 1 5ft ; cle w to throat 1 3 ft 3 in ; batten above boom

, .
, . .

2ft 91h o n lu ff 3 ft o n leach ; mas t at deck 3 i h ; at head

. .
, .
, .
,

i ti s ; mast heel to truck 1 3 ft Sin

, , . .

The mast is sq u are in th e tabernacle above whi ch i t is ,

round Th e head of the sail is cut with a roun d o f 9ih the

. .
,

vard being bent to fit i t The sail is hoisted by a halliard .

running through a strap o n the yard j ust aft the mast and ,

hooking into a si milar str ap for ward of the mast Belo w it .

is l ed through a brass snatch block on the heel of the m ast ,

and aft to a cleat on the trunk within reac h o f the hel ms man , .

The tack is spliced to the boo m j u st for ward o f m ast leads ,

through a bullseye lashed to boo m abaft the mast and do wn ,

to a cleat o n the after side of the mast The sail m ay be .

easily taken fro m the mast and sto wed for ro wing whi ch , ,

cannot be done with a boom an d gaff sail The ste m ste m .

,

and keel are o f white oak the for mer two sided 3 i n the , .
,

latter sided 4in outside and moulded l in The planking is

. .

of white cedar lapstreak i n thick the upper streak being

, ,
-
.
,

o f fil m mahogany
. The ribs are gx l in” s paced 91n being
, .
,

j ogged do wn to th e plank and copper riveted the th warts ,

are of gin mahogany ; rudder 1 5in wide o f l in m ahogany

. .
, .
,

fitted with tiller and yoke The gun wales of oak are .
, ,

1 x 1 § in at midships and 1 x § in at ends

. The sides o f the . .

trunk which is covered on top are o f dry whi te pine l ain

, , ,
.
at bottom and gin at top Th ey are set flat o n the k eel a
. . ,

str ip of canton flan nel well pain ted being laid bet ween and ,

fastened with gin brass scre ws fro m outside o f keel The

.
.

ballast is of gravel i n 30 pound canvas bags

,
-
.

Half Bread th s . e
D pt h s .

4 a
K ; K
a

m E
w
m X

m w
a r
5
g i
m n
X
a g
$
0
a
8 x

5
a m
m
E
3
m X
 D ES CRI PTI ON OF PLA TE5 .

j is dra wn aft and its line b elayed putting a tensi on on the ,

halliard and do wnh aul The sail is now r eady to hoist I t

'

. .

wi ll be seen that th e halliard with block 172 al ways re mai ns , ,

o n the mast ; in sto wi ng the l atter the b l o ck j is cast off ,

leaving the halliard free To take i n a re ef th at part o f the .

,

halli ard to which 6 an d f are attach ed i s haul ed aft thus ,

slacking a way the other part an d at the sam e ti m e taking in ,

the reef neatly with n o ends to coil a way or belay I t is

, .

foun d i n practice that the halliard will sl ip a li ttle letting ,

the sail down To preven t this a little brass cam clutch k

.
, ,

is screwed to the deck the ha l li ar d d being slipped i nto it ,

.

The roller wi ll j am th e cord as it pulls fo rward but a pull .

aft will instantly release i t .

o o o o o o o o o o o o

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

R ee f ed .

For desc ri ption of steering gears see pages 1 28 432 , .

PLATE N I L—C AN O E HA rcnrz s '

AN D Fi n an c e .

See page 1 4 9 .
 T HE P RO G RES S OF C A N O El N G .

“
N th e thr ee years th a t h av e passed sin c e C a no e an d
I ”
Boat Build in g w as first publ ished th e gro wt h o f ,

c an oei n g as w ell as other for m s of bo at s ai lin g has b e e n

, ,

very rapid an d th e chan ges i n the c raft h av e be e n m an y

, ,

so m e m ar ke d i m prove m e n ts bein g m ad e The pri n cipl es .

o f buil d in g tre at ed in th e firs t pa rt o f t his book ar e un

, ,

alt ered an d i n prepari ng th e prese n t e d itio n th e i m prov e

,

m e nts in m od el rig a nd fit tin gs h av e be en d escri b e d i n

,

d e tail i n c onn ec tion w ith t h e b est e x a m ples of t h e n ew

c a n oes such as Lassie Pecow sic Not us and th e two n ew
, , ,

desig ns .

The y ear 1886 was a m ost i m port an t o n e in c an oe raci n g ,

“
w
b e in g m arked by t h e firs t m eetin g b et e e n th e h ea vy
”
bal l as t En gli sh c a n oes sa i l ed w i t h cr e w b e lo w an d the
. ,

v a ri ous A m eric a n m odels w it h cre w s s eat ed o n d eck .

Ca no e ra c i n g w as reduc ed to a sc ien c e i n Engla n d so m e

ye ars before it be ca m e at al l popul ar in A m eri c a th e r e ,

s ul t being th at th e Bri tish c an oes w er e far supe ri or in

fi ttin g up a n d m e ch anic al d e tail s to t h e A m e ric a n craft .

A s i n th e c as e o f yachti n g th e various det a ils of t h e ,

Eng li sh c a n oes ha v e been u se d a n d th orough ly tes ted i n

this coun t ry w i th th e res ul t o f t h e i m prov e m en t o f so m e
,

fe atur es a n d th e t ot al rej ec tion o f others th e le ad i ng ,

c an oe s of t he A C A n o w co n sti tuti n g a d ist in ctl y

. . .

m ark ed n ation al t ype Th e resul t o f the races sa ile d in

.

New Y ork a n d o n the St La w re n c e i n 1 886 h as bee n to

.

“ ”
sh o w th at both t he n o ballast c an oe an d th e craf t wi th
a m ode rat e a m ou n t o f ball as t s ay un de r 1 001b s is m uc h ,
.
,

fas ter t h an t he Roya l C C type w ith up ward o f 3001b s

. . .

On e r easo n for th e poor perform a n c e o f t h e l at ter in

 PR O GRESS OF CAN GEI N G .

A m erican w a ters appe ars t o be th at th e type was d e vel

ope d o u a n arro w rive r a n d a s m al l po n d w h ere t he win d ,

is v e ry puffy a n d u nst e ady ; an d fu rth er th e cour s es are ,

v ery sh ort T o m e e t t hes e requir e m e n ts th e c a n oes h av e

. ,

rel ie d o n a l arge a m ou n t o f ball as t t o c a rry a lofty s ail ,

n ec es sary to u ti l iz e t h e w i n d be t w e e n t h e ba n k s an d to
m ak e th e c a n oe s afe in t h e fiaw y bre e zes w hil e o wi n g to ,

t h e m an y turn s r equir e d w h e n a n u m ber o f rou n ds o f a

sh ort cours e h a v e to b e m ad e th e m an euv eri ng po w ers
,

o f th e boats w ere de v eloped to th e fullest e x t e n t i n fact , ,

so far as to seriously i m pair t he ru n n in g an d reachi n g .

No b etter e x a m pl e o f this c an be fou n d th a n th e w o n der

ful w ork i n g of th e N a util us i n Mr Bade n Po w ell s h a nds ;
.
-
’

w ith h er w eigh t a n d r o ckere d bot to m sh e t ur n e d w ithi n

h er o wn l e n gt h a n d was as com ple tely un der the c o n trol
,

o f h er o w n er as a bicycle w oul d be I n m ark ed co nt ras t

.

to this w ere so m e o f t h e A m eric a n ca n o es w hi ch though , ,

far fast er o ff t h e w in d or e v e n w h e n on a long l eg to

,

wi n d w ard were slo w an d u n c ert ai n i n t a c ki n g a n d m a

,

n euv er in g ge n er ally .

U n til t hey w er e d efe a ted at t he A C A m ee t of 1886 t h e

. . .
,

Engl is h c a n oe ists h el d t en aciously to t h e in sid e positio n ,

lyin g do w n i n t h e b : at a n d th us were co m pe ll e d to r ely

.

o n l e ad for t h e n ec ess ary st abi li ty b ut w hi l e in A m eric a

,

bo th N au tilus a n d Pear l w ere sai l ed fro m t h e d e ck wi th

th e reduc tio n o f about 1 501b s o f b al l as t a n d i n bo th
.
,

cas es t h e im prov e m e n t i n spe ed was m os t n oticeabl e : i n

fac t if th e two h a d be e n w ell s ai l e d fro m t he fir st i n th e
d ec k position wi th l i ttl e ball as t b esid es th e board t hey
, ,

w oul d h av e m a de a very m uc h be tter sh o wi n g i n th e

I n t e rn ation al r ac es . So fa r as c a n oe s are co n c er n ed it is ,

c ert ai n th at th e d ay o f he av y ball as t a n d disp l a c e m e n t is

p ast an d i t is equ all y c ertain tha t if th e v alu e o f th e d eck
,

p ositi on h ad b ee n u nd erst ood a f ew y e ars sin c e i n En g

l an d an d t h e rac es b ee n s ail ed ov er m ore ope n cours es
“ ”
th a n t h e Th a m es an d H en don Lak e t he h e avy b al l ast
,

c an oe o f the Roy al C C w oul d n ev er h av e com e i n to

. .

exi s te n c e
. Si n c e th e ir r et urn b ot h Mr Bad e n Po w e l l o f
.
-
,
 PR OGRESS OF CA N OEI N G .

form totally di ff ere n t fro m t h e P ear ls an d the ol d Nau

,

tili Th e n e w es t d es ign a 1 6 x 29 r aci n g c a noe Pla t e

.
, ,

XXX is i n t e nde d to fl oat a total dis pl ac e m e n t of l ess

.
,

t h an 27 5lbs but th e s a m e l in es m ay be utili ze d i n b uil d

.
,

in g a 1 6 x 3 0 c an o e w it h l i n m or e d epth a n add ition to

.
,

the pr es en t sh ee r th us m aki ng a v ery fas t a nd ab l e can oe

,

fo r both racin g an d cruisi n g .

I n s ails th e fas hi on h as ch a n ged to th e e x te n t o f dis

,

c ardin g ol d rigs w ith ou t supplyin g an yth i n g speci all y

good t o t ak e t heir pl ac e t h e en dea vor bein g to get a s ail
,

en tirel v ab aft t h e m ast bu t at th e s a m e ti m e e asily r e efe d

,

o r lo wered Th e m os t succ essfu l e ff ort in this direc tion

.

is th e rig sh o w n i n Pl at e XX I X d evis ed by Mr C J . . .

Steve n s New Y ork 0 C

, Th e s ails used cn Peco wsic
. .
,

t h e in ve n tion o f Mr Bar n ey h av e be e n us ed by hi m wi th
.
,

gre a t succ ess i n raci ng ; bu t th e gen era l de m a n d is for a

rig th a t wil l re e f a n d lo wer I n th e Wes t t he sprit s ail ,

h as been t rie d o n c an oe s w i th so m e s uc c ess th e sprit ,

bei n g c arrie d do w n an d s teppi n g o n th e boo m abou t 4ih .

fro m t h e m ast th us h ol di ng t he bo om do wn The l a tee n ,

, .

M ohi c an a n d b a l a nc e lug ar e j us t n o w i n disfavor ca noe ,

i sts bein g e n gaged i n v arious e x peri m en ts a n d it is i m ,

p ossibl e t o say w h at th e outcom e w ill b e A v ery good .

s a i l is s ho w n o n Pla te XXV I t h at o f t h e Notus a lo w er

.
, ,

i n g l eg o f m u tton Th ese ri gs with m an y det a il s o f

.
,

fi tting ar e full y desc ri bed i n con n ec tion with t h e pl ates

, .
 AM A TE UR CA N OE B UI LD I N G .

PLA I E S
'
X IX and XX—CLA ss
. A CA N O E “
Las e .

The Lassie was design ed as an atte mpt to get good speed

clo se wind ward work a fairly light and s mall cano e to carry
,

a m od erate a m ount o f ballast—al ways a heavy load to h an .

ole- and to be a good cruising canoe for all but very narro w
and rapid waters She has proved herself fast under sail and
.

paddle easy to handle o n the water and ashore a mply large

, ,

enough for a man o f m ediu m height and weight and n eeds ,

but 7 5l o f ballast at the most ; with all this she is very

.

steady before th e wind She is a Class A canoe but allo wed

.
,

in Class B races and j ust co mes within the li mits of Class

.

I I I paddling .

The di men sions —1 5 h x 28in and the points arrived at

. .
-

were given to Mr Everson who worked out the problem in

. ,

h is o wn way an d to who m all credit for the result is d ue

, .

Two fiat brass plates were used for the boards placed as ,

sho wn i n the dra wing as being the best for wind ward resul ts
,

it was thought not overloo k ing convenience at the s a me

,

ti me . For cruising the after bo ard can be di spensed with and

the sl ot in the k eel pl ugged The for ward plate can b e re
.
 PR O GR ESS OF CA N OEI N G .

m oved and a wooden board substitut ed thus saving about

,

2Ol b s i n dead weight

. The b allast all go e s belo w the floor
.
,

and is held i n by the floor b o rrds b uttoned do wn I t is th en

.

in the vt ry best place The can oe is steady before the wind

.

sin ce she d ra ws m ore water than the Su nbea m—unless

heavil y ball asted—being n arro wer The m otio n fro m side
.

to side is a ve ry easy o ne qui te unlike the quick roll o f a

,

fiat flo ored can oe

-
.The m anipul ation o f th e t wo b oards
takes ti me to acquire so that the m axi m u m result can be
.

obtained They largely decrea se the work that has to be

.

done by the rudder i n single board canoes .

The sails made for the Sea Bee— a Sunbea m can oe — were
used on the Lassie w ith the best resul ts Mr Tred wen the
. .
,

master mi nd i n England on canoe sail i n h as war mly co m

g
,

m ended the short boo m and double head gear o f this mai n
sail The dra wing ill ustrates it clearl y M ast boo m yard
. .
, ,

and the t wo battens are all of exactly the sa m e len gt h thus ,

m aking i t an easy rig to sto w for th e spre ad obtained 75 5g ,

ft Very little o f the s ail is i n fron t o f the m ast an d t he

. ,

yard peaks up wel l both good points for wind ward sailing
, .

The double p urchase at the throat single at p :ak with one

, ,
 PR O GRESS O F CA N O EI N G .

a, stem ha kmatack
, c . m, co a ming oak , .

b, s te rn h a k matack
. c . n. h atc h m ahogany
, .

c, k eel o ak
, . 0, aft er h atch .

d, k eel b a ten ak
‘
. o .
p, d eck h a tc h .

e, ri bs , ak o .
q, c e n t e r s tri p o f d e ck m ah og , .

f, bulk h ead pi ne yéi , ,

n . r, b ack r ests o ak . .

g, h ead l ed g es, o ak . 3 , h eel b rac e o ak . .

h, sides o f t un k pin e %m r , . t, s te eri ng ped als o ak , .

i, d e ck be a m s pi n e , . u, d eck til ler .

k, k n ees o ak ha k mat k c e n t e r b o ar d h in g es b rass

’

, or c . v, , .

l, m aststeps , o ak . z ,
fl o or le dg es c ed ar , .

The keel batten i in thick is a separa te piece ; but it

, . ,

would be bet ter if worked i n one with the keel The center .

board trun ks are both belo w deck clos ed o n top and opening ,

only o n the bottom The boards of sheet brass are hinged .

, ,

by means o f two L shaped pieces sho wn at a one o n each -

, ,

side o f the board These pieces are each fastened to the

.

keel by a scre w fro m the outside To re move the board the .

canoe is turned over the two scre ws taken o ut an d the boat , ,

tur ned back wh en the board will drop o ut The fore board
, .

is o f 3i gm brass weighing 1 51b s The after board is o f tin

.
, . .

brass weighing 51bs and i s quadran t shaped

, Each is .
,
-
.

filed to a sharp edge They are hoisted by cords the for .

,

ward pendan t belaying on a cleat on after end o f the trunk ;

the after pendant coming throu h the deck to a cleat on g

starboard side d eck abreast the canoeis t Th e three mas t , .

tubes are of unifor m size 2i h inside so the masts m ay be , .

,

interchanged The rudder is of Q in o ak thinned do wn at

. .
,

the edges the yoke being a se mi circula r piece with a score

,
-

in it for the rudder lines of brass chain The foot gear con , .

sists of two o ak pedals t t fitted to the floor boards wi th , ,

brass spring hinges When two are paddling the after man .
,

u ses the braces 3 s i n the floor the back board for the for
, , ,
-

ward man being at r The hatch o is made with an outside .

, ,

ri m fitting over the coa m ing and close to the deck

,
There .

i s no fore b ulkhead as us uall y fitte d an d the sliding bulk

.
,

head is also o mitted a piece r tak i ng i ts place in s u pport

, , ,

i ng the hatch an d carryi ng the b ack b oard The broken .

lines in the sectional vie w sho w the inner ed ges o f the plank
 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G .

ing the widths of the sa me at midships being given in the

,

cross section pag e 1 65, .

PLA TE XXL — C u res B CAN O E SU N B EAM .

This canoe was built early i n 1 885 by Ja mes Everson

for Mr J F N e wman for a cruis i ng canoe
. . . The m od el .

h as since beco me very popul ar and a n u mber o f thes e boats

were present at the meet o f 1 885 The b oat is i ntended for .

general use i n wide waters where ball a st i s desirable and ,

up ward o f 1 001b s of shot i n bags is carri e d For use in

. .

narro wer wa ters a flatter fioor would b e n eede d no ballast ,

being carried Though int e nded for a c ruiser the canoe has
. ,

proved very f ast and several o f the sa me model have taken

a place among the racers of their class The interior arrange .

men ts are o f the usual form A t d a and f are b ulkhead s .

, ,

that at f being m ovable The well i s covered with b atches .

,

i n the usual style a a and c c are ai rtanks of phosphor bronze

,
.
.

The di mensions are

Le ngth .

e
D pth am i d hi p s s
ee
Sh r a t b o w 7 in .
, at s tern
C ro wn of d e ck
Distanc e f o m f resid e o f s te m to
r o

Main mas ;

Fo re nd o f well
e

A fte r nd f well e o

Slid ing bulk h ead

Mizzen mas t
A fte b ul k head
r

The di mensions of fra me planking et c are the sa me as , ,

in the Lassie T he rig of the Sunbea m is two balance lugs

.

of 70 and 3 5 tt for racing o r 50 and 1 5 tt for cruising

’

. . .
,

I n the fall of 1 886 the afterb oard and trunk were re moved ,

a brass drop rudder was added and the de ad wood at ste m ,

and stern cut a way as far as possible the canoe being too ,

slo w i n stays .
 PR OG RESS OF CA N GEING .

PLA TES XX I I . A ND XXI I I —

Pnoows1 0
. .

P erh aps th e gre at es t pl e as ur e t h at c o m es to m ost own

ers o f bo ats is n o t so m uc h i n ac tu all y poss ess i ng the
fast est cr aft o f all as i n th e c on ti n u a l effort to g ain th at
,

desired en d by surp assi n g t he si m il ar e ff orts o f oth ers : a

c om petition th at is oft e n m or e e xci tin g a n d e n grossi ng
t h a n th e fi n a l test by w hich i n a few h ours t he res ults o f
t his l abor ar e prov ed to be s at is fac tory o r th e r e v erse I t .

oft e n h appen s t h a t th e de v elop m en t o f the hi gh est c apa

b i li ties o f a yach t is t he w ork o f s e v eral s e as ons o f c are
ful a n d p ai ns t akin g eff o rt an d o f m an y c han ges a n d e x
,

peri men ts ; w ork t h at c alls in to pl ay al l t h e i n ven tiv e

fac ul ti es an d re ason in g pow e rs bu t t h at ul ti m ately brin gs
.

a far higher r e ward w he n su cc ess is at ta i n ed t h an d o t h e

brie fer an d l ess i n te ll ec tu al struggl es o f th e re gatt a
cou rse I t is fro m t his poi nt o f vi e w t h at t h e c a n oe
.
,

look ed o n c on te m pt uously by m an y as a m er e t oy a n d ,

u n w orthy o f s erious n otic e c om m en ds its elf to a l arg e

,

n u m ber o f i n t elli g e n t m en as a fi ttin g s ub j ec t for t he ir

study Wh ere th e firs t c ost o f a y ac ht m ay r a ng e fro m
.

ten to thirty t hous an d dollars a n d t h e cost o f an y ch a nges

.

are in pro por ti o n th er e ar e c o mparativ ely f ew w ho are

,

abl e to follo w the spor t to i ts full es t e xt en t ; but i n t h e

c an oe w hile th e c o st o f boat out fit a n d a s eason s racin g
, , ,
’

w ill n ot e x ce e d two o r t hre e h u n dre d do l lars t h e i n te rest ,

i s n o l ess in te n s e th e co m petition is as ke en a n d th e r e
, ,

w a rd s are gre a t in proportion I n n o ot h er s ail boat pe r

.
,

h aps i s t here so m uc h room for i nge n uity a n d in ve n tion

,
.

Th e s m all siz e o f t he boat a n d t h e a m ou n t o f w ork h e r

cre w o f o n e m us t d o m ak e i t n ec ess ary t h at e veryth in g
s hould b e arra nged to th e b est ad va n tage w hil e th e ,

stro ng c o m peti tion be twe e n th e v arious craft bot h i n ,

h o m e a n d d is tan t r ac es is a con s ta n t sti m ul us to ward

,

i m prove m en t in m od el r ig an d fi tti ng s Every o n e f a

, .

m ili ar w ith th e l e adi ng c anoes w ill re c ogniz e t h e fac t

t h at e ach t esti fies n ot on ly to h er o w n er s skill as a sailor ’

bu t a l s o as a d esign er rigger a n d i n v en tor a n d t h at e ac h

, ,
 PR OGR ESS OF CA NOEI N G .

s ectio n s ho ws fa r l ess d e a dris e tha n a n i n sp ec ti o n of t h e

boat i ts elf w oul d i n dicat e th e cu ttin g a w ay o f th e en ds
,

gi vi n g a n id e a o f a sh arp V section qui t e d iffe re n t fr om .

w h a t th e dr a wi ng sho ws Th e bulk o f t he hull is s m al l

. ,

a n d its in t ern al c apa city l im it ed though i t is cl aim e d ,

th at th ere is a m pl e ro am fo r c r uisin g outfit a n d th at th e ,

boat is w el l adapt e d for gen er al w ork Th er e is bu t on e .

bulkh e ad j ust abaft t h e w el l cl os ed w ith on e o f J oyn er s ,

’

cir cu lar h atc h es The for e en d o f th e boat is e n tir ely

.

ope n to per m it o f t h e s to w ag e o f sp ars a n d sail s Th e

, .

boar d is a she et o f thi n bra ss o n ly $011 1 lon g bu t ris ing .

hi gh abov e t h e to p o f th e l o w tru n k s ho w n by th e dotted ,

l i n es i n th e sh e er pl a n ; befor e t h e M e e t o f 1886 th e bo ard

w as s h ifte d l oin for w ard o f th e posi tion sho w n
. Th e .

w e l l i s s hort a n d far aft w h ile th e tr un k i n te rfer es wit h

,

t h e roo m a nd sle epin g i s di ffi c ul t if n ot abso lut ely i m

,

possibl e A s n o ba l l ast is c arried a nd th er e is li ttl e

.

w eight o f m et al t h e d an ger o f s i n kin g if fil l e d is re

,

m oved espe cially as o n e air t a n k is c arri e d i n th e aft er

,

en d . Th e w eigh t o f th e hul l abou t 1 001b s is n ear ly all , . ,

m ad e up of w ood Th e di m e nsion s are as fol lo w s :

.

Le n g th . 1 5f t l o4 i n . . . .

1 5tt . 6 in .

B e am ex tre m e
,
28 ° in .

w1 l . . . 274 i n .

D e pth , am i d s hi p 94 i n .

Sh ee r , b o w 8 in .

s t e rn 54 i n .

62 m .

24 i n .

1 7 in .

5ft 0o4 i n
. .

esi d e of st em to f or e m as t
For 7 in .

m ain m as t 6ft 6 i n . . .
4
.

m i zze n m ast 1 3f t 4 in . .

well f or e en d 6f t 10 m
, .
4 .

well a ft e r 1 2ft , . .

bul k h e ad 12f t .

cen t b d tr un k f o r e en d 6ft 7 i n
er
’
, . .

cen te b d tr un k af t e r en d 9 ft 1 in ’
r , . .

Th e fi rst station i s 2f t f ro m s t e m th e o t h e rs ar e e ac h
.
,
l 8i n .

apart Th e wat e rli n e s ar e 254 i n apart

. . .
 AM A TE U R C A N OE B UI LD I NG .

Th e m os t pec uli ar featur e o f the boat is her rig diff er ,

ing as it does fro m anyth i n g else in c an oein g Th e ad .

v an t ages o f t he si m pl e leg 0 m utton sail w ere too appar ’

e n t n o t to b e qui ckly s ei z ed upo n b y c a n oeists bu t a di ffi ,

culty w as e x perie nc ed in obta i nin g sufficie n t a re a ; b e

sides w hi ch th e sail is har d to hoist i n suc h s m al l siz es ,

th e m as t ri n gs h av in g n o w eight a n d b ein g li able to j am

v ery frequen tly A ft er b ein g used for s o m e ye ars th e
.

s a i l w as aba n don ed ; bu t after tryin g th e oth e rs i n turn ,

Mr Bar n ey w as att racte d by the si m pli city an d e ffi cie n cy

.

o f the l eg 0 m utton s ail espec ia ll y f o r a n u nbal lasted

.

boat o f n arro w b ea m a n d bega n to e x peri m e n t w ith i t

, ,

m aking h is o wn s ails To overc om e th e firs t obj ection

. .

h e ad ded a t h ir d sail th us m aki ng up t he ar e a ; w hi l e it

,

w as w ell di stributed over th e le ngth o f th e bo at a n d at ,

th e s a m e ti m e the c e nter of eff or t is kept l o w a n i m port ,

an t poin t in such a cr af t The secon d di ffi cul ty tha t of

.
,

h an dli ng w as disposed o f b y l ac in g e a c h s ail to i ts m ast

,

an d n o t atte m ptin g t o hoist o r lo wer it th e m as t an d al l ,

bein g r e m oved an d a s m aller substitu ted i f r eefin g was

requir ed To do this succ essfully fiv e s ai ls are c arried
.
, ,

the m as ts an d tu be s b ein g all o f o n e si z e T hre e o f th e .

sails m us t be s et at o nc e th e oth er tw o be in g sto w ed .

belo w I t w oul d s ee m t h a t n ot on ly is this s h iftin g a

.

m a tte r o f difficulty i n m a n y c as es but t h at t he sa ils ,

be low w oul d b e a s erious in cum bran c e i n so s m all a boat ,

but those w ho ha ve used her s t ate t o the con trar y .

Th e sail s a n d sp ars are a s foll o w s

M ast . Bo om . en s
Bat t , No . o f. Ar ea .

No . 1 , Bi t . 5t o . mm . 1 22 sq f t . .

No . 2, N R . 5ft . mm . 2 28 sq f t . .

No . 3 , 1 0ft . 5f t . mm . 2 33 sq f t . .

No . 4, l Oft . 5ft . mm . 2 38 sq ft . .

No . 5, ll i t . 8i n . 5ft . 1 0m . 3 4 sq f t
2
. .

Th e sail s sho wn in Plat e XX I II ar e No s 5 4 an d 2 . .

, ,

No 1 bein g i n dic ate d by th e dotted lin es w hil e No 3 is

.
, .

si m il ar to No 4 but s m all er The gr ea test possi b l e ar ea

.
, .

is 1 1 3 ft th e l ea st 22ft The boom s are l i m ited i n l eng th

.
 PR OGRESS OF CA N OE I N G .

by the di sta n c e bet w ee n m ai n a n d fore m as ts a n d the ,

first bat te n in e ac h sail e x c ep t No 3 is to gain m ore , .

,

are a Th e ot h er batte ns w er e a dded to m ak e th e s ai l s

.

si t prop erly as th ey bagged i n pl ac es

,
Mr B arn ey h as . .

use d v ery li ght sp ar s th e m asts bein g sl en d er s ti cks W i t h

,

a qui ck t aper a n d so h avi ng li ttl e w eight aloft The

, .

boom s are fi tted w i th br ass j a w s ( Pl at e XXI X a) allo w .

,

in g th e m to to p u p e asily Th e s ail s a r e fas te n e d to the

.

spars by s m all w ir e st apl es su c h a s ar e us ed for blin d ,

sla ts No lin es o f a n y ki n d ar e us ed e x c ept the she et s

.
,

an d t he e xtre m e li m it of l ight n ess a n d si m plicity i s

re ach ed .

Sin ce Peco wsic s succ es s i n 1 886 a n um ber o f si m il ar

’
,

cr af t h av e appe ar e d i n the rac es ; so m e o f th e m m u c h

fair e r i n m od el th a n th e lin es h er e sh o wn tho ug h all b y ,

the sa m e b uil der N on e h ow e v e r h av e e quall e d t h e

.
, ,

record o f Mr B ar n ey s boat w h ich is good e vi de n c e t h a t

’

.
,

th e re aso n for Peco w si c s spe ed w hich h as puz zle d so ’

,

m an y c an oeis ts is to be fou n d n ot so m u ch in h er m odel

, ,

as i n th e ski l l an d c ar e w it h w h ich sh e i s rigg ed fitt e d ,

up an d h a n dl ed I n 1 887 Peco wsi c w as s ail e d by Mr

. .

Geo M B ar n ey s on of h er o wn e r th e l at ter usi ng a n ew

. . , ,

c an oe of si m il a r m od el but rocker e d up m u c h m or e af t
, ,

n a m ed Laco wsi c She was 1 5ft . buil t at .

Sprin gfield un der Mr Barn ey s supervision w ith a dou bl e

’
.
,

ski n The sa i l s w er e id e n tical wi t h Peco wsi c s Both

.
’
.

o f th es e c a noes m ade an e xcellen t s ho wi n g i n th e s easo n

of 1 887 .

PLA TE S XX I I I XXI V XXXa No B ALLA ST CA NO E

"
.

VE SPER .

Th e u tili ty o f so m e ba llast a n d o f bo ats built to c arry it

is gen er ally ad m itted w he n ope n w at er sai l in g i s i n qu es -

tion b ut t h e re ar e so m e loc ations w h er e a totally diff eren t

,

typ e o f boa t h as c o m e in to use a n d h as fo un d g re a t fa vor ,

a t t h e expen s e of th e h ea vier b a ll ast ed craf t This has -

.

b e e n th e c as e p ar ticul arly at A l b an y w h ere ca n oei n g is ,

 PR OGRESS OF CAN OEI N G .

Fr eeb oard , ho w . 14 in .

am i d shi ps 54 m .

ste rn 1 1 4i n .

Sh ee r , b ow 8 4 in .

ster n 6 in .

R ak e s t rn po s t
, e 2 in .

C r own f d ec k o . 2 in .

e r e
ifigt a
1 54 1 1 . n d
Di am e t e r f m ast t ubes g
66
o .

Th e ri g sh o wn i n Pl a te XX I I I h as th e ordin ary Moh i

c an sails rigge d as sh o w n in d et ail in Pl a t e XV I I
,
.

PLA TE S XXV . AN D XXVI — No rus —RA CI NG

.
'
A ND C RU I S
i Ne CA NO E .

A f te r a s eason s use o f Vesp er Mr Gibson sold h er an d

’
, .

m ad e a n ew des ign e m bodyin g so m e i m prov e m e n ts a n d ,

in 1 887 N otus w as buil t She is a 1 6 x 30 c an oe m uch .

,

l ik e Vesper h er 6in w ate rlin e be in g t h e sa m e ; but sh e

, .

i s c ut a way m or e u n der w a ter for w ard giv ing a s l ightly ,

h ol l o w e n tran c e to i m prov e he r p erfor m an ce in rough

,

w a te r. Th e s a m e lon g fin e b o w an d ful l st e rn al r e ad y
,

te sted by Mr G ibson h av e be e n re ta i n ed but t he e x

.
,

tr em el y broad an d l on g fl oor is m o di fied N otus ha vin g .

about 1 0m fl at a n d a n elliptica l for m o f m ids hip se ction

.
,

le adi n g in t o t h e t ur n o f th e bil ge w hi c h gi v es re m ar k ,

abl e stren gth Th e st ability is n o t p erc eptibly di m i n

.

i ehe d by t his s light rou n d in g an d it probably assists ,

t ur n ing w hic h N otus does w i th t h e gre at est c as e Th e

, .

c an oe w as buil t by Ch arles Pi epe nbrin k of A lban y un de r , ,

M r Gi b son s p erson al s up erv isi on a n d i s a r e m ark a b ly

’
.
,

fin e piec e o f w ork She i s a sm oo thsk i n w i th on ly thr e e

.
,

plan ks to a side t he r ibs spac ed (Sin a n d fast en e d wi th

, .

br ass scre w s from th e inside A f ew s cre ws w er e r e .

qui red fro m t h e outside but t h ey ar e 1211 1 ap ar t l ea vin g , .

,

t he b otto m a bs olut ely s m oot h Th e p l an ki n g a n d d ecks .

ar e o f w hi te pi n e a n d th e t ri m m i n gs o f m apl e a n d m a
,

h ogan y t wo n arro w be ads alon g ea ch side

, Th e bo ard .

is o f sh eet bra ss 30x 1 3 x d roppin g t hrough a l ow

,
 AMA TE UR CAN OE B UI LD I N G .

tr u nk Th ere ar e four bul kh ea ds with

. , a l ow h a tc h in
the fore d ec k .

The tabl e of offse ts is as fo l lo ws

H EI GHTS . HALF BREA D I HS

- ’
.

D e ck . m
2 . K ee l .

Th e di men sions of N otus are

For e si d e o f s tem to bulk h ead s .

srt 6in
. .
, 5ft l Of t. Bin l Btt . Bin .
 PR O GR ESS OF C A N OEI N G .

Fo r e s id e o f s t em to mi zenm as t l l f s l Oin
. .

b oar d f o r e , 5ft . 8in .

af t e r en d . . 8ft . 2i n .

co am i n g , fo re en d 4f t . Bi n .

aft e r en d l l ft . 6i n .

Th e s ails w er e d evised by Mr Gibs on a n d ar e m ad e of .

,

ble ach ed m usli n i n o n e w idth t h e edges bein g bou n d ,

w ith w id e t ape Th e batt e n s fi t i n poc kets i n t h e usual

.

m an n er .Th e spars ar e v e ry l ight th e m asts 2in squ ar e , .

at dec k t aperi n g to am d ia m e ter at h e ad th e m a i n boo m

, .
,

l i i n di am et er b atte ns s i n t hick
v .
, Th e d im e n si on s of
. .

sail s a n d spars ar e :
M ai n M i zen . .

M ast d e ck to h e ad
, 13 tt .Bin l l f t 4i n . . . .

S a il o n f o o t
, 6f t gi n . .

al o n g fi r s t b a tt e n (i f t Gi n . .

al o n g se co n d b a tt e n . .

lu ff . I Oft . Gi n .

lee ch , Lif t 7 in . . 11 ft . 8i n .

lee ch ab ov e b att e n
, 10ft 3i . h . 9ft . 6i n .

s paci ng o f b att e n s f re end 1 t I l i n

. o , . . 1ft l l in
. .

af te r e n d 2f t 1 l§ i n . .

ar e a squ a re
, 69f t . 39ft .

Th e firs t re ef l e av es 5z ft i n m ai n a n d 26f t i n m i zen

. .
,

th e sec on d reef l e av es 35ft in m ain Th e m iz e n can b e . .

stepped for w ar d a n d a storm m i z e n added Th e luff o f .

th e m ains ai l is roach e d 4i n i n 1 3ft a n d t he luff of th e . .

m iz en i n th e s a m e proport ion Th e u su al re ef ge ar is .

ad ded Th e s ail s are h oiste d by h all i ards a n d lo w er ed

.

wi t h do wn h au s th e a ttac h m e n t to th e m ast be in g by a
’

l acin g as sho w n
. T his la ci n g (P late XXI X a) is si m i
. .

lar to t h e or d i n ary h a m m oc k o r n et tin g sti tch th e loop ,

o r m es h l oo sen i n g as soo n as th e h alli ard is cas t o ff b ut ,

as t h e l atter is h aul ed t au t th e m esh es l e n gth e n an d

dr a w t h e l u ff c los ely to th e m ast I t h as be e n sugg ested .

tha t a few s m a l l be ads o n th e l ac in g n e ar e ac h k n ot w oul d

m ake th e s ail ru n ea sier in h oist i n g an d lo w erin g In .

th e fal l o f 1 887 N otus was sold to Mr R W Ba il ey Pi t ts . . .

,

burgh C C . .
 1 80 PR O GR E SS O F CA N OEI N G .

e x tre m e b ea m wi t h pl an ki ng I f t h e m oul ds are c ar e

, .

ful ly m ad e to t hi s size th e bo at w h e n pla nk ed m ay b e

all o w ed to spre ad a l ittle bri ngin g h e r t o 3 l i n l e avi n g , .
,

l in i ns id e th e A C A l i m i t before t h e d ec k is put o n
. . . . .

This is be tter t ha n buil di n g to t h e e x ac t wi dth as t he ,

boa t w ill al w ays spre ad a l i ttl e A t th e s a m e ti me it .

w oul d b e possibl e to bu il d a 30in boat fro m t he s am e .

m oul ds usin g a l i tt l e c ar e in dr a w in g th e s ide s togeth er

,

befor e ti m berin g an d f as ten in g t he m w ell u n til the d ec k

,

fram e is in bu t i t is al w ays b est to buil d a l igh t boat n ar

,

ro w er r ath er tha n w id er t ha n sh e is t o be an d the n all o w ,

h er to spre ad a li ttl e I f a s m all er boat is desir ed t he

.

design m ay b e cut do w n in d epth t ak i n g 2ln o ff th e , .

sh eer all arou n d w it hou t i m p airi ng i ts in t egrity Suc h a .

boa t w o ul d o f c our s e n e ed n o ba ll ast a n d w oul d be a ,

v ery fa i r m atch for Notus Vesper an d ot he rs o f t h at ,

cl ass Th e l in e s ho wn for cro w n o f deck is si m pl ydrawn

.

in w ith a b atte n t o m ak e a fair s we ep w i th a cro w n o f ,

2m a t m i ds hips
. This w i l l n ot a l lo w o n e be a m m oul d to
.

be us ed through ou t as th e roun d o f the deck be a m s v ar ,

i es a t e ach s tation but i t w ill m ake a h a ndsom e dec k

, .

Th e d i m e n sion s are
Le ng th ex tr e m e ,

Be am ex tr e m e ,

D e pt h am i d s hi ps ,

Sh ee r b o w , .

st e r n .

D raf t i n clu di n g k eel

,

D i s pl ac e m e nt to ab ov e d raf t , .

P e r in ch im m e rs i on
A re a m i dshi p se c t i o n
, 965 sq f t
. . . .

l oad l in e pl an e sq f t
. . . .

l at e ral pl an e sq f t
. . . .

C L R f ro m f o resi d o of s t e m
. . . 7f t 9 i n .
4
.

W a t e rl i n es 2m a par t ; s ta ti o ns l f t apar t
, .
, . .

Th e ques tio n o f c o n s t ruc tion is s til l as m uch i n dispu te

as e ver an d w ith littl e probabili ty o f a fin al se ttl e m en t
, ,

as e ach o f th e l e adi n g m eth o ds h as its stron g po i n ts to ,

ge ther with so m e m arked di sadv an tages The l arge a n d in . .

c r e as in g de man d for c a n oes o f all siz es h as stim ul a ted

’
 TA BLE o r O FFSET S .

H EI G HTS . H ALF B R EA DT HS .

Beck l N o 1 0
. . No 8. . No 6 . . No 4. . No 2 .

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 02

1 25

the i n ve n ti ve po wers of builders b ot h a m ateur and pro fes ,

si o n al with t he resul t tha t ma n y n ew m ethod s h av e of la te

,

bee n tri ed wi th m ore o r l e ss su ccess Th e firs t Am eric an .

can oe s were all l apstr e ak an d w hen in 1 881 th e a uthor

, , ,

fi rst i n tr od uce d th e ribban d c arv el m e thod o f buil di ng a

-

s m oot h s kin boat the n used i n Engl an d i t m et w i th n o

-
, ,

favor fro m A m eric an can oe is ts there b e i n g a s tro ng pre ,

j udi ce in favor o f the l apstre ak Fash ion s c h a nge i n .

can oe s as in dr ess an d for th e p as t two ye ars s m ooth ski n

,
-

bo ats h av e be e n the rage perha ps for n o bett er re as ons

,

th a n those on ce urged ag ai nst t he m There are to d ay .

-
 PR O GRESS OF CA N OEI N G .

half a d oze n exc e l le n t m ethods of con s truc tion fro m w hich

th e c a n oe is t c a n c hoos e wi t h a fair c ert ain ty o f h aving a
fir st c lass c a n oe a n d i t w oul d b e a v ery d i ffic ult m at te r
-
,

for a n u n prej udi c ed j udge to s ay w h ich i f a n y is abeo , ,

l a tely th e best A f ter so m e e x perie n c e i n bu ildin g a n d

.

usin g c an oes a n d so m e fa m iliar i ty w ith th e diff ere n t

,

m ethods o f con s tr uc ti on w e fe el s afe i n r eco m m e n di ng

,

th e l apstr e ak if properly buil t as th e b est for c ruisin g

, , .

Wh eth er sh e w ill prov e t h e faste st alon gsid e o f so m e o f

th e s m ooth hulled r ac ers is st ill a n ope n qu esti on a nd
-
,
”
m ost c an oeists w ould s ay No to it but so m e bad ly bui l t
“
,

l apstre aks h av e d on e s o w ell i n t h e ra ces at ti m es t ha t

there is e very re ason to t hin k t hat an absolut ely s m ooth
ski n coun ts for l i ttl e again s t fin e a n d w ell l ai d l aps .

O f lapstre ak w ork there are all kin ds fro m the clu m sily ,

bu i l t pra m o f t h e N or w egia n s wi th w oo den plugs i n pl a ce

,

o f n ai ls t o t h e c arefully pl a n ked c an o e wi th a lan d so m e

,

t hi ng lik e t h at s ho w n at 3 Th e edges o f bot h p la n k m ust

.

be v e ry ac cur ately bev el ed the ou ter edg e to a thic kn ess

,

of
-
i h o r a li ttl e m or e bein g ro und ed off as s ho w n in
.
,

sa n dpap eri ng Th e c o m m on l ap is sh o w n i n 2 a str on g

.
,

j oi n t bu t givin g a poor su rfac e Th e s tre ng th o f the l ap

, .

s tre ak h as r epea tedl y be e n proved beyon d qu estion it w ill ,

stan d bot h w ea r a n d h ard kn ocks w hil e i t is v ery light , .

W ith t h e r eq uisite c ar e a n d s k i ll th e b otto m o f t he boa t

m ay b e m ad e t o co m pare v ery favorably w it h a ny of th e
s m oo th ski n m ethods a n d after a se ason o f rough cruisin g
-
,

the l apstr e ak c a n oe W ll probabl y b e i n be tter con dition

i

th a n the oth ers O n e m eth od o f secur in g a s m oot h skin

.

is sho w n in 1 th e pl a n k be in g cu t w ith a spec ial pl an e

, ,

t aking half o ut o f ea ch Th e ribba n d c ar vel c a noes bu il t

.

by t he auth o r i n 1 881 a n d 2 h ad a strip in si de t h e s ea m ,

as i n 4 both pl a nks bein g n ail e d to t he str ip th e ri bs w er e

, ,

pu t i n after w ard bein g j ogged over th e ribban d Th e

, .

A l b an y c an oes a re buil t n o w o n a si m il ar pla n but by a ,

m e thod h ardly s ui t abl e f o r a m at eur w ork A s trong .

m ou ld or l as t i s fi rst c on struct ed o f th e sh ape of the in

side o f t h e c a n oe The d ea d w ood a n d al l t he rib b an ds are
.
 PR OGRESS OF CAN OEI NG .

by the l edges w h ic h c arry th e floorboards The ke el .

m ay be regarde d si m ply as a wid e bo tto m p l an k a n d ,

so n eed be but li ttl e t hi cker th a n t he oth er pl an ks It .

is h ere sho wn gi n t hi ck or i i nsid e o f boat for m i ng t h e

.
, ,

rabbet 12 fo r t hi ck n ess o f garboard an d

, ,
pro j ec tin g ,

outside o f gar b o ards Re ally al l t h at is n e e de d is i for

.

r abbet ins ide a n d 2 ; for garboard l e av ing n o proj ec tion ,

outside I f at th e s a m e ti m e t h e k e el b e 5m w id e it
. .

m ak es a w i de flat surfa ce o n w hich th e c an oe w il l res t

,

w h e n ashore or on w h ich sh e m ay b e e asily dragged ov er

r oc ks o r l ogs I t o fte n h appe n s t hat whil e a c an oe c an
.

be d ragge d e asil y en ough t h er e is gre at diffi culty i n ,

h oldin g h er upright on h er k e el a n d at t h e s am e ti m e
draggin g her but w it h a w ide ke el s h e w il l al w ays ke ep
,

U p righ t wi th l i ttl e a id I n a c a n oe W i th m u ch d e a dr is e
.

t h e ke el if v ery w id e m ay be slightly rou n d ed an d i n

, , ,

an y c as e i t s houl d b e prote ct e d by gi n s trips o f fl a t .

brass f ain thick sc r e w e d to t he e nt ire l e n gt h a n d

.
,

sol d ered o r brazed to t h e st e m b a n d Wi th su ch pro .

te c tion an d a s i m il ar strip 4 f t lo ng on e ac h bi lge th e .

,

boat wi ll s ta n d s afely a gre at a m oun t o f hard w ork , an d

as for r ac in g th e l ess e n e d d a m age to th e pl anki ng wil l
,

m or e th a n co m pe n sat e fo r a n y sl igh t friction of th e

br ass The keel s hould b e w ork ed fro m a n i n ch board
.
,

l e avi ng t h e full th i c k n ess at th e e nd s to ai d i n for m in g !

the d e ad w ood b u t pl an in g do w n t o tin or a littl e m ore

, .

at t he m iddle h alf o f t h e bo at s ay f o r a l e n gt h o f 8ft , .

The scarfs o f st e m a n d ste r npos t as w el l as th e f as te n

in gs are s ho w n I t is n o w th e fashion to pl ac e th e
.

m ainm ast as far for ward as possibl e t o do w hich th e ,

s tep m ust co m e i n a par t w h er e t h e li n es ar e v ery fin e ,

w hic h n ec essit ates a v ery t hic k st ep Th e o n e s ho w n is .

o f cl ear w hi te pi n e to s av e w eigh t a n d is fas te n e d in

, ,

W h e n t h e fra m e is pu t toget h er I t m us t b e v ery .

sec ur el y bo l te d a n d m ust b e tri m m e d c arefu ll y to sh ape

j ust a s the de ad woods are s o t h a t t h e pl a n ks w i l l fit ao
,

cur atel y agai nst its sides Th e step for t h e miz e n may
.

be pu t in aft er w ard i n th e usu al way , .

 A M A TE UR CAN OE B UI LD I N G .

A sim pl e r m ethod of buil din g th e tr un k th an th at on

page 91 is to put t he sid es o f th e c as e to geth er w it h th e
h eadl edges b e t wee n rive ting t he m up t h e n to ge t o ut a
, ,

piec e o f pin e as wide a s t he to p o f th e ke el a nd l in th ick . .

w hi c h piec e is scre w ed fast wi th lon g scre ws t o th e bot

to m o f th trun k ,The l o w er sid e o f this b edpi ece is
.

th e n ac cu rat ely fitt ed to the top o f k ee l an d scr e w ed fast

by short scre ws passi n g t h rough i t i n to th e ke el The .

labor of rabbe tin g is avoided a n d the j oin ts if laid w ith ,

w h it e l ead an d C an to n fl an n el w il l b e pe rfectly tight , .

The sides o f t he c ase w ill be o f cl ear w hi t e pi n e tin o n , .

lo w er edge a n d fiin a t top Th e h eadl edges w ill be l in

. . .

wid e an d th ick e n ough to all o w a m pl e roo m for th e

board Th e pl an k i n g w ill be l in o f W hi te c edar Th e
. .
, .

upper s trake o f th e W idth sho w n i n th e d ra w i ng w ill b e

, ,

ful l gin thi ck bein g rabbe te d on t h e lo w er edge so as t o

. .

lap over t he s trak e b e lo w sh o w in g kin outsid e There, . .

wil l be n o g u n w al e t he dec k be i ng scr e wed to this uppt r

,

s tr ake Th e ribs m ay be a l ittl e le ss t han fix gin ” spaced

.

6in w ith two ri v e ts bet w ee n

.
,
The bulkh e ads w il l be .

fiin of c lear w h i te pi n e The de c k w ill be o f { in ma

.
,
.

b og an y Th e l edges for the floor w ill b e o f spruc e or

.

h ack m ata ck a s deep as the d is tan c e from floo r to g ar

,

b o ard a n d gin t hick

,
Th ey shoul d be v ery se cur ely
. .

fas ten ed w it h lon g riv e ts thr ough e ach l ap a n d th e keel ,

at l eas t two t h rough th e la tt er I f lon g n ails c a n n ot be .

had copper w ire c an be us ed w ith l arge bur rs o n each

, ,

e nd Th ese l edges sho ul d be placed a lon gside th e trunk

.
,

o f cour se bei ng i n two pi ec es e ac h an d a stou t o n e should ,

b e plac e d aga in st the a ftersi d e of th e t ru n k an d scre w ed

to th e he adl edge I f w e l l fas ten ed th ey will m a k e the
.

b o tto m perfec tly rigi d n o m atter ho w t h in th e ke el m ay

,

b e w hi l e boats ar e ofte n fo un d w ith a k eel l i in thick

, .

tha t w ill con sta n tly w ork und er th e strain of th e board

o r w he n ashore The c en terbo ard trun k its el f plays a
.

very i m po rt a n t par t in stre ngthe n i ng th e h ull if properl y ,

buil t i n to the bo at a n d co m ing up to the d eck .

The s hifti n g bul k h e ad is pl ac ed w it h a s l igh t sla n t to ,

 PR O GRESS OF CA N OEI N G .

a cco mm od ate th e back better tha n if v ertic al I n pl a n .

ni ng th e arran ge m en ts ev ery effort h as be e n m ad e to

,

giv e plen ty o f roo m fo r cr uisin g n o t a m ere hole w h ere ,

a m an m ay s to w h i m se l f for h a lf a n hour bu t roo m to ,

c arry stores a n d b eddi ng to c oo k t o ch an ge on e s , ,

’

cloth es a n d to sl eep i n co m for t A t t he s a m e t i m e th e .

s ailin g qu al ities c ou ld n ot b e n egl e cted an d t h e board ,

h as be e n pl ac ed a s far aft as possibl e w i th a provision ,

f o r s hifti ng i t sti ll furt h e r af t i n s a i li n g as will be ,

d escrib ed l ater Th e dista n c e bet we en bulk he ads is 7 ft

. .

5in an d as t h e boat is bot h wid e a n d de ep this sp ac e

.
, ,

should giv e pl en ty o f roo m for all s tores ; bu t t h e aft er

com par t m en t m igh t b e fitted w ith a h atch if m ore roo m
w er e d esir ed A s n o w arra n ged t he m ess ch es t c oul d
.
,

fit o n o n e side o f the t r un k a n d th e cloth es bag o n the ,

oth er ; w h i l e t h e te n t a nd th e b eddi ng t he l att er tightly ,

strapped in a w a erproof bag w oul d be i n th e l oc ker

t

u n d er th e m ovabl e h atc h I n sl e epin g t h ere w ould b e a

.
,

cle ar le ngt h o f 5ft 551m fro m bul kh e ad t o after e n d of

. .

t ru n k an d th e fee t c o uld e x t e n d for a few i n c hes i n to

,

th e spac e besid e t h e tru n k l at ely oc cupied by th e cloth es

bag n o w doin g duty as a pill o w Th e t en t o f cou rse
, .
, ,

w oul d be s et th e beddi n g spre ad an d th e h a tc h an d

, ,

bul khe ad r e m ov ed fo r t h e n igh t The space u n d er th e .

side d ecks affords pl e n ty of roo m for oilers spare gear , ,

apron etc Th e w el l is l arg e as i n su m m er crui sin g a

, .
,

m an r equires ple n ty o f roo m an d if th e fe e t an d l egs ar e ,

k ept c on tin ua lly b elo w d eck th ey w i ll b e v ery w arm .

Sl e ep n g c ooki ng an d th e position s o n e n atu rally t akes

i
, ,

to obt ain a rest w he n afloa t al l d ay d e m an d m or e r oo m ,

tha n so m e racin g m en se e m to t h i n k n e cessary To close .

th e l arge w e ll in s tor m y w e a th er t he b est pl an is a n ,

apron o f he avy d rill fi t tin g ov er th e poin t ed c oa m in g

,

an d t ightly l aced al on g th e sides to scre w h ead s ou tside

th e c oa m i n gs Th e apron m ay e xte n d as far aft as the
.

cl e a ts s ho w n The m ast tubes are 2i in a t de ck taper

. .
,

in g Both ar e of t he s am e d epth so th at th e m as ts may

.
,

b e in terch angab l e I t will be n oticed th at t he c oa m in g

.
 PR OG R ESS OF CA NGE I NG .

c as ti n g o ff th e li n e G th e s trip A w ith bo ard sus pe n ded

,

fro m i t w ill run a ft un ti l th e l if tin g pe n d an t re ac h es th e

,

af t er e n d o f cas e w h e n th e bo ar d w il l b e i n th e positi on
,

sho wn by t h e do t te d li n e Thi s w il l c a rry th e c e n ter of

.

the bo ar d aft a bo u t a foot a t l e ast a n d wi l l m ake a m a

,

terial di ffer e n c e i n t h e bal an c e o f the hul l a n d sail s Th e .

li n e E is us ed t o dr a w th e bo a rd aft if n ec essar y or a ,

rubb er sprin g m ay be at ta ch e d to i t so as to ac t aut o ,

m ati call y . I n h oistin g th e bo ard m us t first b e dr a w n

,

for w ar d by th e l i n e G aft er w hi c h i t m ay b e ra i sed by F

,
.

The re is this obj ec ti on — th e board c a nn ot be r ai s ed if

agrou n d un t il i t is h aul e d for w a rd bu t as t h e d e v i c e is
,

for sai li n g us ua l ly in d e ep w at er t hi s is o f littl e c an se

, ,

quen ce . I f th e d e vic e i s to be pl ac ed i n a n e w bo at t h e ,

c as e m ay e x te n d a s s ho wn abou t a foot fur th er aft to the ,

h eigh t o f t h e boa rds in w hi c h e ve n t the bo ar d m ay be

,

r ais ed so m e di stan c e w hil e i n th e after positi on o r m ay ,

b e e as i ly cle ar ed i n c ase o f gr ou nd in g The m ai n us e o f

.

t h e s hift i n g bo ard is t o i m p rov e th e b al a n c e o f sa il ,

all o w in g full o r r eefed s ail to b e c arri e d a t w il l a n d gi v ,

i ng j ust a s m u ch w eat h er hel m a s m ay b e at a n y t im e

d es i rabl e By its use t h e c en t erboard tru n k c a n b e pl aced
.

w ell for w ard a n d yet i n r acin g t h e board itse l f m ay b e

.

re adily a dj usted to on e of s ev er al posi tio n a n d m ay be s

,

thr o wn at le ast a foot fur th er af t Two poi n ts a re n eces

.

sa ry ; th e c as e m us t b e wid e e n ough to al lo w t he bo ar d to

m ov e fre ely an d t h e af ter p e n d an t m ust b e m ad e fas t so

,

far aft t ha t t h e b oard w ill n o t r is e at the for e e nd through

th e after e n d be in g t h e h e a vi er .

Th e c h ee k bl oc ks m ay b e cut o ut of m ah oga ny w ith ,

brass sh e av es or th ey m ay be c ut or s a wn o u t o f ,%in
, .

she et brass filed up n e a tl y a n d be n t i n a v is e to th e

,

proper sh ape t o fit th e sh e av e Shea v es o f t h is ki n d are

.

r eadily m ad e b y s a w in g w ith a h ac k saw pi eces fro m

th e e n ds o f brass rod s o f v arious siz es holes are drilled ,

in th e c e n ters the pi ec es are h eld in a vi se a n d th e s co re

,

or gr oov e cut w i th a s m all rou n d fil e Wi th a v ery few .

to ols fo r w orkin g br ass bo th bloc ks a n d s h ea v es with

 AM A TE UR CA N OE B UI LD I N G .

many oth er s m all fi tt i n gs m ay be easil y m ad e by the

am a teur Th e h oistin g pul l ey B is sho wn o n a l arge sc al e
.

to illust ra te the cons truction . Th e m a in par t o f the sh e l l

is m ad e fro m a pi ec e o f sh e et bras s doubl ed ov er i n th e
for m sho wn th e upper part being a hal f circl e To e ac h
, .

m
s umss BUDDEB FASTENI N G
’
.
 PR OGRESS OF C A N OEI N G .

side a strip o f brass be n t at right a n gl es i s riv et ed a ,

m ortise i s cu t in t he strip A th e brass case is set in un til

,

t he side pi ec es r est on th e strip a n d th e n fast e n ed b y ,

scre ws t hrough th ese sides Th e pul l ey is pu t in p l ac e

.

a n d th e pi n o n w h ich i t turn s is run t hr ough hol es

drill ed in t he sides of t h e c ase the e n ds t he n bei n g ,

riv et ed up .

Th e ru dder sho wn is of m ahogan y a cru isin g ru dder , .

Th e lo w er side bel ow th e k e el is sh ar p e n ed to a fin e
, ,

edge . Th e ru dder h a n gi n g is sho w n in th e s m al l dra w

in g page 189
, Th e par t attach e d to th e bo at or c an oe
.

c onsists o f an upper an d l o w er bra c e o f th e usua l

for m A an d C w i th a rod E { in run n ing thr ough
, , , .
,

t he m an d scre wed i n to C O n t he r udd er is a co mm on

.

b rac e B at t h e top
, , A t th e botto m is a Split brac e D
.
, ,

m ad e o f two c as t in gs a a n d b both e x a ctly alike but

, , ,

fas ten ed o n opposit e sides of t h e ru dd er The upper sid es .

o f t he pair are sho w n a t 1 th e fore e n ds at 2 an d th e

, ,

l o wer sid es a t 3 I t w ill b e s e e n t h at by layi ng th e

.

r udder horizont al ly w i th the p ort sid e D upp er m ost t he , .

Ope n in g b et we e n a a n d b Fig 2 w ill ad m i t th e rod E

, .
, .

N o w if th e r udde r be r ais ed t o a v e rtic al posi tion, th e

t wo hooks e m brac e t he rod E th e upper brac e B is , , ,

d ropped ove r t h e top o f E a n d t h e r udder is fast onl y

, ,

to be r el e ased by r aisin g B o ff th e r o d an d droppi n g th e

r ud der horiz on tal ly I n pra ctice t h e sp l i t brac e c a n b e
.

p ut o n o r o ff th e r o d by i n cli n in g t he rudder t o a n a ngl e

o f 45 d egre es w ith ou t l ayi n g i t h ori z on t al
,
W i t h t his .

ge ar t h er e are n o d etac h ed p arts t h e work m ay al l b e ,

d o n e at the upp er p ar t o f t h e r o d j ust belo w A a n d i t is , ,

n ot n ec essa ry to grope u nd er w ater to ship t h e lo wer

p in tle The r udde r c an on ly b e d e tach ed by r ai si n g B
.

fro m the t op o f th e r o d an d the r ud der lin es w h e n

.
,

att ache d prev e n t i t risin g 8 ) far o f i ts e l f

,
.

Th e dec k tiller a n d ge ar s ho w n h av e be en t ri ed i n pr a e
ti ce a nd fo un d to w ork pe rf ectl y th e w h ol e ar ra nge me n t ,

bein g v e ry s trong w h il e t h ere is n ot t h e l eas t c h a n c e for

,

li n e s to foul t he r udder yoke o r d eck yoke Th e f or m er .

 PR OG RESS OF CAN OEI N G .

th rough t he d eck as s ho wn A bra ss ri ng is s ec ur ely

, .

l ash e d to e a ch l i n e n e ar w her e i t l ea ves th e w h eel a n d a ,

s trong h ook on th e en d o f e a ch o f th e sh or t lin es from t h e

de ck w h e el w il l h ook in to the ri n g The short l i n es ar e .

e ach prov id ed w it h turn buckles as sho w n by w hic h they , ,

m ay b e tighten ed Wh e n t h e d eck ti ll er is n o t n eede d

.

t h e turnb uc kl es ar e slacke d up th e s hort l in es u n hooked

, ,

an d th e d e ck w h e el m ay be re m ov ed l e avi n g only t he ,

lo wer pl at e s e t in th e d ec k Th e rudder w h e el sh oul d b e

.

s et as l ow as poss ibl e a n d yet all o w th e l in es to cl e ar th e

d eck ; t h ere i s n o n e ed to h ave i t as is ofte n s e en far up , ,

i n th e air I f the two w h eels are an y wh er e n e ar t he

.

s am e h eight t h e re wi l l b e n o possibl e ch an c e for th e l in es

t o r u n ou t o f th e groov es ; in fac t if thr o wn o u t i n an y ,

w ay t hey a t on ce spr in g back O f c ours e th ere is n othin g

.

to c atch t h e m iz en she e t as th e lin es w ill k e ep i t fr o m

,

getti n g u n d r t h e w h e el With a Gin w h e el there is

e
. .

p o w e r en ough t o turn a m uc h l arge r rudd er th a n is

n eede d o n a ca n oe ; i n fact t h e w he el m igh t b e e v e n
,

s m aller if desira bl e fo r a n y r e aso n O n e gr e a t ad van .

t age o f a w h e el o ver th e ordi n ary ar m s is th at th e pul l is

al w ays th e s a m e n o m a tt er ho w far ov er the rudd er m ay
,

be .

Th e a dva n tages o f th e ol d fas hion e d l eg o m u t to n s ail

- -
’
-

in t h e i m porta n t poi nts o f ligh t w eigh t aloft an d si m pli ci ty

o f rig w ere so app aren t th at i t is n o t s urprisi n g to fi n d
,

th at w hil e m odels a n d rigs w ere a t firs t i m port ed fro m

En gl a n d t h e lug a n d gun t er s ails w ere soon disc arde d in
,

A m eric a for t h e l e ss co m plic ate d l eg o m utton w hich

’
- -
, ,

ab ou t t en y e ars sin c e w as th e s ail in ge n eral use h ere by

.

c a n oeis ts Bot h th e lug an d gu n t er required s om e c ar e

.

i n riggi ng a n d m ore blocks an d gea r but the pl ai n tri ,

a n gul ar s ai l o f th e sh arpi e was e asily m ad e aft er a ,

fashi on a n d rigged to m atc h by a n y tyro U p to 1 878

, , .

th i s s ail was us e d on al m ost all c a noes in t he U n ited

St at es bu t as raci n g b ec a m e m or e popul ar the lug was
,

i n tr oduc e d an d s oon d rov e i t out Th e faul ts o f the l eg .

0 m utto n s a i l w ere th at th e m as t m us t b e ve r y lo n g in
’
-
 A MA TE UR C A N OE B UI L DI N G .

order to obt ai n th e are a an d th e s ai l was diffic ul t to hois t

,

an d lo w e r o w in g to th e n u m ber o f m ast ri n gs required ,

m a k in g i t a slo w a n d un c ertai n m atter to reef or sh ak e

o ut . A m ast o f 1 4 to 1 5ft such as was n ec essary for a .
,

65ft sail w as a ve ry troubl eso m e stick i n a n arrow boat

.
, ,

eve n if o f ba m boo N a turally th e ide a of cu tti n g t hi s

.

stick i n hal f suggeste d its elf l eadin g to the slidi n g gun ,

te r rig b ut a m ec ha n ica l difficulty was m et th at c aus ed

,

the gun ter sa il to be a b an don ed b y all I t was foun d to .

be i m possibl e to rig a ge ar o f an y so rt th at w ould sli de

o n the lo w er m ast an d c arry t he top m ast without ei ther

bin di ng an d j a mm i ng fast o r o n t he ot h er h an d bei n g so

, .

loose w hen hoisted as to allo w th e topm ast to wo b b l e to

a n u n be arabl e d egr e e Brass slides o f v arious for m s w e re
.

tri ed as w e l l as oth er d evices bu t b esides th e w eight

, ,

aloft they n e ver cou ld be reli ed o n to hoist a n d lowe r

,

qui ckly w h il e they permi tt e d a gre at a m ou n t of pl ay in

,

the to p m ast .

Th e s ai l here sho wn was design ed l ast ye ar by Mr C . .

J Ste ve n s New Y ork C C for th e c a noe Tra m p a n d is

.
, . .
, ,

also fitted to th e c a n oe sho wn o n Pl ate XXX Th e sail .

plan o n Pl ate XX I X sho ws the rig ad apted to th e 1 5ft x

. .

30i n can oe o n Pl a te XXV I I

. Curiously en ough this n ew .

sail a c o m bi n ation o f th e l eg o m uttton a n d slidin g gun

,
-
’
-

ter was evol ved dire c tly fr bm the bal an ce lug The first
. .

step w as to s l in g th e ordin a ry rou n d he ad ed bal an c e l ug -

s ail ab aft the m ast o f cours e ret ai n in g th e pe ak th e yard

, ,

be i n g v ery m uch rou nd ed as sho w n i n t h e sail pl a n o f ,

th e F o rest an d Str ea m cruiser Thi s m ade a very good .

sail bu t i t w as evide n t that the peak fal l i ng m ore o r l ess

, ,

to le e w ard a n d o ut o f t he pl a n e o f th e m asts was a ,

decided disadv an t age i n so n arr o w a boat on th e scor e of

st a b ili ty wh atev er ad v an t age it m igh t possess to wi n d
,

ward ov er a j ib h ead ed s ail The n ex t st ep the n w as to .

cu t a w ay e n t i rely the an gl e be t w e en l uff a n d h ead the ,

throat o f th e s ai l substituting a mod era te curve t o t h e

,

uppe r part .

Th e m os t serious d iffi c ulty was th e hois t i ng an d hold

 PR OGRESS OE CA N OEI N G .

i ng in plac e o f t h e ya rd n o w trans form e d in t o a sort of ,

topm ast ; but after a n u m ber o f tri als a m ethod was de

vi sed t h a t is a t o n ce effec t iv e an d in ge n io us The o bj ec t .

sough t w as to bi n d both m as t an d y ard so fir m ly toge th e r

t ha t they bec a m e for t h e ti m e a s in gl e sti ck avoidi n g t h e ,

pl ay o f th e g un t er as w el l as th e w eak c on str uct ion due

,
-

to th e s hor t gu n te r brass wi th its dire c t strain o n t h e

m sthead Th e de tails of th e pres e n t pla n are sh o wn in
.

th e s m aller d ra w in g O n th e m as t t wo c he ek bl ocks are

.

s ecur ely l ash ed l e adin g for e an d aft O n th e yar d are

, .

two si m il ar bl oc ks a lso l e adi n g fore a n d aft

, Th e hal l iar d .

is doubl e ; a k n ot is first ti e d in the c e n t er t he n t he two ,

e nds are rov e o n e through e ach o f the blocks o n y ar d

,

an d th e n t hrough c orrespondi ng bl oc k o n m ast th e bight ,

o f th e lin e wi th th e kn ot 0 b ei n g aroun d t he fore sid e o f , ,

m as t . I t is e vide n t th at a pull on th e two p ar ts of th e

h all ia rd will j am the spar fir ml y ag ain st th e m ast prac ,

tically m aking o n e spar o f th e two as e ach brac es th e ,

oth er . Th e si z e o f e ac h is so proport io n ed th a t t he
stre ngth o f th e 2i n m as t i s ret ai n ed al l th e w ay to th e
.

m asth e ad th e yard gro wi ng l arger as t h e m as t gro w s

,

sm all er . Th e halliard w as first use d w i thout th e kn ot 0 , ,

bu t i t was foun d t h a t i n hoi tin g t h e bigh t was held clos e s

to th e m ast t hu s j am m in g a t t im es
, Th e k n ot w as t he n .

ti ed i n so t h at th e h a l l i ard could n o t u nr e ev e t hroug h

either block ; a n d n o w in hois t i n g th e str ai n is on ly o n o n e

h a l li ard u ntil th e yard is fair ly in plac e the n both h al li ards ,

ar e se t t au t an d bel ay e d Th e c an oeist tak es both h al li ards

.

i n h an d l e av i n g o n e w i th abou t 6in slack th en h oi sts

, .
,

a w ay t he yard r isin g e asily, as th e bight is e n tire ly l oose

,

aroun d t he m ast Wh e n w ell up a pul l o n b oth h a l li ar ds

.
, ,

a a sets al l s n ug
, The resul t is th e sa m e w h e n s et at t he
.

m asth e ad fo r ful l s ail o r l o w e r fo r a r e ef Th e b oo m a n d

, .

batten s a re fit ted w ith j a ws of t h e siz e a n d s h ape sho wn

i n the s m a ller out w hic h r eprese n ts th e ful l siz e o f th e
,

pa ttern t h e c astin g bein g a littl e s m all er w he n fi n is h ed

,
.

Th e b atten s are ro und i n se c tio n an d e ac h is ferrul ed ,

wi th brass th e j aw th e n be in g d riv e n in To hold th e

, .
 PR OGRESS OF CA N OEI N G .

sho w n in the dotte d l i n es wi th o n e batte n th er e be i ng

, ,

rin gs on leec h a n d h e ad A brai l is rov e thr ough th ese

.

ri ngs i n two p arts o n e an d fast to bo om a n d up t h e

,

l eec h the n c e th rough a bulls ey e o n m ast ; th e ot her e n d

,

fas t to top o f batten th rough rin gs o n he ad a n d t h rough

. ,

s a m e bu ll sey e Th e s ai l m ay be r e e fe d by h aul in g th e
.

l a tter p art u ntil th e batt e n li es clos e to m ast o r b y a ,

p ull on bot h p ar ts th e s ail i s brail ed up sn ugly ag ai n st

t he m ast Th e sp ars m ay b e shor t e n ough to all o w t he
.

rig to be sto w ed in s ide th e w ell .

Th e spin ak er for m s a m os t i m port a n t fe at ur e o f t h is

rig as t h e m iz e n is sto w e d w h e n do wn wi n d an d th e
,

spin ak er set th e c an oe r un n i ng m uch steadi er t ha n

'

u n der af tersail Th e shape is sho wn i n th e d ra w i ng b y

.

t h e broke n l in es th e foot bein g gr ea tly roac he d i n th e

,

c urv e s ho w n Th e h e ad a n d out er a n gl e o f s ail are

.

fi t te d wi th s m al l s w i v els i n c as e o f a turn i n h oisti n g ;

,

th e h alliard l e ads through a block a t m asthe ad on e e n d ,

l e adin g thr ough a block at d ec k th e oth e r h ookin g in t o

,

th e s lin g o f she et block w h e n n o t i n use I f o n th e .

w ron g side it m ay be s wu n g aroun d i n fron t of th e

,

m ast befor e sn appin g to h ea d o f sa il Th e sh ee t o r .

a fter guy is f as t to th e en d a n d a sn ap hook o n t he l at ter

,

hooks i n to a n eye o n th e e n d o f boo m The tac k l ea ds .

t hrough a scre w eye o n de ck j ust for ward o f th e m ast ,

th e e nds le adi ng aft on ea c h sid e o f m as t so th a t eith er ,

m ay b e ben t to the sai l Th e bo o m of ba m boo is fitt ed

.
, ,

w ith an eye at th e o ute r en d an d a s mal l j aw o n the

i n n er t he latter Shippin g i n a brass s tud i n t h e d eck j us t
,

abaft t h e m ast Th e s ai l is sn apped on to th e h all iard

.

a n d hois t ed , th e t ack bei n g fi rst h ook ed o n ; t h e outer

a ngl e is then hooked to th e b oo m th e l atter shi pped ,

ag a i n st t he stu d o n deck an d s wu ng for ward t h e sh eet ,

th en bein g m ade fast a n d t h e t ac k trim m ed Th e sai l .

s houl d be o f stron g light li n e n t hat w i l l dry qui ckly .

To co m pl et e th e ordin ary out fit for cru is i ng an d ra cin g

a n i nterm edi a te m ai n s ail o f about two thi rds th e si ze of -

l argest s ail is use d a n d so m e t im es a s mal l spi n ak er

. .
 A M A TE UR CAN OE B UI LD I N G .

Th e rig a l arge c a n oe wil l i n clud e a ra cin g m ain sai l

fo r
of 9 0ft a cruising m a in sail of about 5oft a ra cin g m ize n
.
,
.
,

o f 25ft a cruisin g m izen o f 1 5ft a n d two spin ak ers o f

.
,
.

60 an d 45ft The d i m e n sion s of sp ars an d s ails for suc h

.

a rig ar e giv e n i n t he follo win g table th e spars be i ng ,

m u ch li ghter th a n a n y n o w in use o n c anoes but t hey ,

ar e al l a li ttle lar ge r t h a n t hose c arri ed on th e Tra m p a ,

'

h e avy Pearl 1 4 x 33 fo r the p as t ye ar ; an d i t o f good

, ,

spruc e an d properly rigged will b e a m ply stron g The , .

o ld Guenn carried a bala n c e l ug m a in sa i l o f l 05ft an d a .

m i ze n o f 3 5ft m ast 1 5ft abo ve deck ; but th e prese n t .

c an oe if built lightl y a n d s ail ed w ith a m oder a te a m oun t

,

o f bal last should prove still f as ter u n de r the rig sho w n

, .

Th e w eight alof t will b e abou t o n e h alf th at o f t he o ld -

rig consequen tly t he boa t c a n be h eld up wi t h m uc h l ess

.

ball as t an d the cre w w ill h av e far m ore con trol o f h er .

The m ove m en t n o w is i n t h e directio n o f s m al l er s ails ,

an d e x perien c e goes to sho w th a t a b o at will b e faster

un der a properly proportion ed rig of m oderat e di m en sion s
th an un der a h e avy outfit o f spars a n d c an vas th a t m us t
be upheld by he avy ba llast a n d a t ti m es wi th great
di ffi cul ty
D I M ENSI O N S O F SP A R S A ND SA I LS —CA N OE GU EN N .

M ain . M i ze n .

R ac i n ? O n l s r g
st em i bé
'

Ma st fro m
, . 12 a) z
d e ck to tr u ck 9 06 5 02
Bo om 5 07 5 00
Yard 1 0 06
B at ten s 0 10, 6 6, 6 06
Spi nak er bo o m 8 06
fo ot . 10 00
lu
ff ” 6 10
h ad e . 1 0 Ol
chlee 1 7 06
T a ck to p ak e . 16 1 1
C le w to thr at o 10 11
A re a squ ar e f ee t
, .

Spinak e ar e a sq f t
r , . 61 00
fo c t . . 00
l uff 10 03
lee ch 13 04
u
ro n d of 1 06
B a t te ns a part 2 03 . 2 044
 PR OGRESS OF CA N OEI N G .

Th e 9ott s ai l h as t h r ee b att e n s 55ft s ail h as tw Batt ens are

.
, . o .

spa e d l l é in f u rth e r apart n lee h th an o n l ufl

c . o c
’
.

R a i n g m a s t 2m a t d
c k a n d up t se o n d b att e n the n c e t ape r
. oc o c ,

i n g t l i n at h e a d
o . M ze n m a s t 1 % n a t d e ck tape ri n g t Mi n a t
. i 1 . , o .

h ead .

M ai n b m 1}§ i n d i am e t e r f o m i d dl e th i rd f le n gt h th e n ce
oo . r o ,

t ape ri n g t 9 4111 a t e n d s
o . .

Yar d l i n d iam e t e r f o ab o u t m i d d le thi r d th e n e tape r in g to

. r , c

Bé i n at e nd s Batt e n s r o u n d }§ i n at f r e an d %i at a f te r e n d s
. .
, . o h . ,

uppe r b att en s %i n t hrou g h u t M i enb o om %i at mi d dle

. o . z h .
,

tape ring t }§ in f r ward an d %in aft b att en %l n Spin ak e

o . o . . r

b o o m b am b oo ab o u t %i n at f o r e an d %i n at af t e r e n d
, , . Th .
s
. e

spa rs f c r u i si n g i g wi ll be a l i ttle sm al le r th r ug h u t Th e
or r o o .

m i ze n m as t wi ll fi t for wa d t ube bu t wi ll be r e d u ce d i n si ze f rom

r
,

d e ck up .

A m et hod l e ad in g th e r eefiin es d e v ise d by Mr O F

of , . . .

Coe , of Je rs ey City is sh o wn in t h e followi ng sketch

,
.

Vertical pockets ar e s e wn to th e s ail thr ough w hic h th e

lin es are r un thus l e ss e n in g th e da nger o f fouli n g Mr
, . .

W B ad e n Po w ell h a s us ed t h e sa m e i de a for so m e tim e

.
-
,

but with s e veral s m a l l br ass ri n gs s e w n i n th e poc ke ts to

k eep t he m e x ten de d a n d s o al lo w t h e l in es to mm freely .

Th e dr op r udder is n o w i n g en e ra l us e for c ru is i n g as
w el l as r acin g a n d is m ad e a fter se v era l pa tt ern s by th e
di ff er e n t build e rs O n e o f th e bes t is t ha t sho w n in
.
 PR O GR ESS OF C A N O EI N G .

is l e an i n g out to wi n d w ard The ord in a ry til l er m ay a l so

.

b e added as sho w n by the dotted l in es

,
Two v ari eti es o f .

l iftin g h a n dl es a re also sh ow n t h e o n e d evised by Mr

,
.

Ba rn ey for his 1 887 can oe Lac o wsi c b ein g o f brass se t

, , ,

i n to th e st e m a n d ster n o f th e c an oe w hi ch ar e cu t a w ay
,

t o r eceive th e m The oth er h a n dl e a piec e o f stou t wir e

.
,

w i th a short l en gth o f rubber tub e for th e h a n d to grasp ,

i s us ed o n m ost o f the M oh ic a n c a n oes be in g perm an e n tly,

at ta c h e d o n e to ear/fin e nd
. The m as t a n d j aw sho w n are
those o f Pecow si c a n d Laco wsi c th e t ube is bu t 5in d eep
,
.

a nd th e l o wer e n d o f m ast is fi tt ed w it h a l on g t ape r fer

rul e to fi t i t v er y n e at ly Th e j aw i s o f brass w ith a
. ,

s oc ket f or the b oo m e n d an d is hun g by a pi n thr ough

,

th e m ast all o wi ng t h e boom to be folde d close aga in st

,

th e l atter The m ast tur ns i n the socke t th e boo m bei n g

.
,

i m m ova bly fi x ed to i t . Th e m ast l ac i n g sho w n is d e

sc ri bed wi th th e sai l pla n o f N otus Pl ate XXVI
,
.

PLA TE XXX — 1 6 x 29 RA CI N G C A N O E . DE SI GNE D BY W .

P STE PHE NS
. .

Thi s c an oe w as d esi gn e d e arly in 1 888 by th e au th or as

a raci n g craft to b e s ail ed w i thout ball ast ; th e d i sp l ac e
,

m en t be in g li m ited to n o t o ver 2751b s Th e ai m h as bee n

.

t o pres er v e a good are a o f l oad w at er pla n e a n d bre ad th ,

w ithou t too m u ch d isplace m en t o n t h e o n e h a n d o r th e

“
f m
s harp V s ection s o so e n o b allast ca n oes on the ot her ,

a n d t o m ake a c an oe tha t should be at th e s a m e ti m e fast

a n d ye t fair ly c o m fortabl e to s ail Th e d esign coul d
.

e asily be ad apt e d to a l arger c a n oe say 1 6 x 3 0 to c arry

, ,

m od erat e ballast by w id en in g af te r pl an kin g an d buil d

, ,

in g up th e she er lin e a n i n c h or a littl e over m aki n g at ,

t h e sa m e t i m e th e d ispl ac e m en t gre ater by 1 001b s an d .

th e d raft n e arly a n i n ch m or e The c an oe h as bee n co m

.

pl eted a n d will be rac ed d ur i ng the se ason o f 1 88 8 Sh e .

w ill c arry th e s ail s sho w n i n Pl at e X XI X w ith a v ery ,

li ght pl at e board an d brass drop r udd e r A s s h e is de .

sig n ed solely for sa il i n g the w ell w il l n o t be as sho wn ,

 AAI A TE UR CAN O E B UI LD I NG .

b ut si mply a c irc le o f 1 8in dia m e te r cl os ed b y a w a ter

.
,

tigh t c an vas bag m ad e fast arou n d the c oam i n g so t h a t ,

in the e ven t o f a co m plete c a p si z e n o w ater c a n get be lo w .

T he d ea d wood at th e e nds has b ee n c u t a wa y far m or e

th an is co m m on but t he displac e m e n t is so m e w h at re
,

d uced thereby m ore bein g allo wed in t he m iddl e o f th e

,

boa t ; th e i mm ersed su rfac e is m u ch r ed uc ed ; a n d e as y

turni n g po wer i nsu red th e full len gth o n w ater l in e bein g
,

at th e sam e ti m e r etai n ed .

TA BLE o r '
c r rs s r s, 16 x 29 m e mo CA N O E .

H EI G HT S . H ALF BR EAD ’I BS .

D ec k Ra b t K eel
’
. D e ck 10 m . Bi n . l Gi n . 4in . 2i h . Ra bbet

1 04

1 2°

1 06

11 3

l 11
 PR OGRE SS OF C AN OEI N G .

The d i m en si on s are
Le n g th .

B e a m extr e m e ,

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

s l e e
Di p ac m n t
e s
A r a m i d hip c t i on se
l e e
Di s p ac m nt per i n imm . e r s i on
at 5i n . d r af t a b o u t ,

Area l at e ral pl an e .

ce nt e r bo ar d

T t al o

L W pl an e
. . .

C B f r m s t em
. . o .

C L R f r o m st e m
. . .

i nc . b o ard

PLATE S XH I . A ND XXX I I .
—1 8 x 36 C AN O E “
I ONE .
”

The c an oe I on e was d esi gn ed i n 1 887 by Mr E T Bird . . .

s a l l o f New Y ork an d bu i lt by Bradley o f W ater to wn

, , , ,

Sh e is 18ft long by 3 ft w id e an d is s m ooth buil t o f

. . ,

l in pl a n k ; k e el o f w hi t e o ak l i in t hick ; ste m a nd st ern

. .

post o f ha ck m at ack ; pl an k in g o f c edar ; d ec k m ahoga n y ; ,

coa m in g w al n ut fl ar ed ; Radi x board o f l arg es t si z e

, , ,

w hi c h is r at h er s m a l l for a boat o f this l en gth Sh e .

c arries ab o u t 1 25ft o f sa il a n d 1 00l o f l ead c as t to fit

. .

clos e to t he g arbo ards n o s hi ftin g b al l as t With thi s , .

le ad in a n d sail s et o n e c a n s it outsid e o f th e coa m in g on

,

th e d ec k to l e e w ard an d n o t ge t w et th e s ails an d spars ,

w eigh in g 501b s an d t he usu al c re w ov er 1 501b

.
,
In a s.

be a m w i n d i n s m ooth w ater w ith full s ail a n d two per

son s w eighin g togeth er 3 401b s h a n gi n g out t o w in d w ar d .

sh e h as bea te n c atboats o f equ al w ater li n e l e n gth Wh e n .

driv en in h e av y w e ath er w i th th e abov e load to wi n d

war d an d re ef e d she i s qui te wet as she goes through the .
 PR OG R ESS OF C A NOB I N G .

Dur in g th e se ason o f 1 887 sh e w as s ail ed w ith th e ba l l ast

a n d s ails sh o w n i n Pl at e X XXI I w ith ei the r o n e o r two
as cr e w , bu t a j ib o f 3oft w ill be add ed , cu tti ng th e
.

pr esen t m ai nsail d ow n t h e lin e of th e m ast thus m akin g ,

i t a gaff s ail all abaf t th e m ast th e b o wspri t to b e 4 ft

,
.

ou t b o ar d a n d th e j ib to tri m aft o f th e m ast a nd be c apa

bl e o f bein g s et an d take n i n fro m th e c ockpi t “Th e n .

s ail in g alon e i n ad d iti on fou r 251b pigs of le ad c as t in

, .

th e for m o f a trun c at ed pyra m id an d c over ed w it h c a n

vas a n d roped w il l b e c arri ed to be s hifted t o w in d w ard
, .

I on e h as n o w atertight co m pa rtm e n ts but h er o wn er .

proposes to fit t he m in h e r Th e s ails are o f Polh e m us

.

t will about 4o z
, A 6l b Ch es ter a n chor a n d 25 fa th o m s
. .

o f 1 2 thr ea d m an ill a h as h el d o n i n 1 5 fatho m s o f w at er

-

w ith a goo d j u m p o n a le e goi n g tid e a n d two 1 5 x 30

,
-

c a n oes fas te n e d to m ize n m ast A l l the s aili n g o f th e

.

abov e boat h as b een do n e i n N e w ark a n d N ew Y o rk b a ys

a n d arou n d S an dy Hook a n d Sta t en I sl an d Th e y ards .

ar e egg s haped an d t he boo m s ar e squ are to facili t ate th e

-

r eefing ge ar .

C A N O E YA W LS .

Th e succ ess o f th e e arli e r c an oes c alle d th e at te n tion of

b o atin g m en ge n e ra l ly to th e m a n y good poin ts o f this
type of boat w it h th e resu lt t h at a n u m b er of l arge craft
,

h av e b ee n bu il t m uch on t h e lin es o f the ordin ary s ail in g

c an oe A l l o f t he e arli er bo ats were ya wl rigged s o m e
.
,

li ke a c an oe a n d oth ers wi th a j i b an d h en c e the n a m e ,

“ ”
c a noe ya w l w as g i ve n to distinguish th e m fro m th e
s m a ll c an oe Within t h e p ast t hre e ye ars th e n u m b er o f
.

th ese boats h as gre a tly i ncr e ase d i n En gl a n d w hil e they ,

are also beco m in g better k no w n a n d lik ed i n A m erica a n d ,

so m e o f th e m m ak e v ery fin e c ruisin g c raft bei n g far m ore ,

abl e a n d po w erful th an th e c a n oe Th ey are buil t wi th

.

ce n terbo ard o r k eel g en erally th e l atter an d ar e rigged

, ,
 AM A TEUR CA N OE B UI LDI N G .

wi th th e m a in an d m ize n lik e th e can oe , cu tters , or as ,

sl oops an d ya wls the l a tter b ein g p erh aps th e be st fo r

,

singl e han d cruisin g So m e o f t he m suc h as the Cassy

-
. .
,

th e Wa ter Rat and th e Viper ha ve m ade t h e ir repu ta tions ,

as cruise rs by se v eral se as ons o f c onsta n t w or k i n ope n

w aters They are w ell fitted fo r b ays a n d ar m s o f t he
.

sea w here th e c an oe c an not s afely an d co m fortably be used ;

th eir sh ape tha t o f th e w h al e boat a n d s urf bo at is o n e

, ,

o f the b est fo r a s ea b oat an d the y are l ess c ost ly to buil d ,

than the s m a l l coun ter st ern ed yach t w hile superior to -

,

th e square s te rn ed boa t
- .

”
PLA TE XXXII . A NNI E , C E NTE RBOA RD CA NO E Y AWL .

Thi s boat w as d es ig n ed to h ave a ligh t draft a n d to b e

ligh t en ough to house e asil y so a fi x ed keel an d b allast ,

w e re d is pen sed w ith Her l e adin g d im e nsion s are .

Le n gt h l 8i t b ea m 5ft
, Th e dr a w i ngs sho w a sl ightly
, .

s m al l er b oat b ut a sc al e w as use d i n b ui ldin g w h ich

,

brought the be a m up to 5ft A n n ie w as bu il t a t O s w ego .

,

N Y fo r Mr Geo N Burt by Joseph He n ley wh o m ad e

. .
, . . .
, ,

the m od el fro m t he o wn er s i n s tructions She h as been ’

.

use d o n Lake O ntario wi th g re a t success pro v i ng fas t as ,

w ell as s afe a n d co m fort abl e for pl easru e s ail in g As

°

th e hull is l igh t i t c an re adil y b e h aul ed i n or o ut o f th e

house by o ne m an quit e a co n sideratio n i n so m e loc al i
, .

ti es . A n n ie is pl an ked w ith in c edar a n d w hit e pi n e -

.

in al te rn at e stre aks the ti m b ers bein g fix sin ” spaced ,

4ih . The deck is o f c edar on ch es tn u t c arlin s 1 x Hin ,

spac ed 6in The c oc kpit is 7 f t 2ln lon g an d 3 f t Sin

. . . . .

wide w ith a 3 m coa m in g of but tern u t Th e c e n te rboar d

,
. .

tr un k is 3 ft lon g an d the board is of boil er pl a te 261b s

.
, .

Th e total w eight o f h ull is 3 001b s The b all as t c on sists o f .

si x br ic ks o f l ead 25l e ach sto w ed i n th e spac e abreast

, .
,

th e t ru n k b esid es w hich tw o b ags o f s an d 501b s e ach

, , .
,

are c arri ed i n the w ell The l e ad bricks a re covered wi t h .

ca n v as an d have rope h and l es so they ar e qui ckly c arried ,

 PR OG RESS OF C A N OE I N G .

in or Th e spac es i n e ac h e n d ar e fill ed w ith air

o ut .

ta n ks o n e bein g pl a c ed a lso o n e ac h side o f th e w ell

,

as s ho w n N o oars are used a p addle bei n g c arried for

.
,

c al m w e ather but th e boat is ex pected to s ai l w hen e ver

,

th ere is a n y w i n d She is ri g ged wi t h a boo m an d ga ff

.

m ain s ail a n d a sprit m i ze n Th e m ai n m as t is 1 7ft h ee l . .

,

to h e ad a n d Si n i n di a m eter ; m a in bo o m 12ft gaff 5f t

, . .
,
.

4in . m ize n m as t 1 1 ft a n d 21m i n dia m et er b oo m 5ft

, .
, .
,
.

The hois t o f m a in sai l is 1 2ft 4ih an d of m i z e n 8f t Th e . .

m ai n gaff h as peak a n d t hro at h all i ards the for m er w ith ,

doubl e block o n m ast a n d sin gl e o n gaff Bot h h al li ards .

l e ad throug h fairl eaders on dec k to th e after en d o f tr un k ,

w h er e t hey bel ay Th e ru dder is fitte d w i th l ong s tee r i ng

.

l i n es Ther e are n o fi x ed t h w ar ts bu t m ov abl e se a ts are

. .

us ed A spin ak er is c arried o n th e m ain m as t t h e bo o m

.
,

bein g j oi nt ed f or s tow age She h as be e n thr ough so m e .

bad w e ath er o n Lak e O n tario pro vi n g h erse l f a fin e ,

rough w at e r boat ridi n g l igh tly a n d goin g w ell to win d

-
,

w ard in rough w at er I n ordin ary s a i li ng sh e is v ery .

fast a n d w i th two o r th re e p erson s aboa rd c a rr i es h er

,

s ai l easily .

”
PLA TE XXXI I I . C ASSY .

L en g th
B e am
D e pt h m i dsh i ps
Sh ee r b w , o .

s t e rn
B w t a f t e r s i d e o f t a be rn acle
o o

f r e n d f tr un k
o e o .

af t e r en d f tr u n k o

af t e r n d o f w ell e

r wl o k s o c

Ar e a m ai n s ai l —ra i n g c

m ai n s ai l —r u i si n g
,

mi ze n
Le ng t h o f t a be rn acle .

oa rs
Wid th of r udd er
 P R O GRESS OE CAN OEI N G .

PLA TE XXX V .
—SAI L PLAN or C ANO E YA W L .

“
Th e t erm ya wl appli e d to a cutt er rigg ed b oa t is an -

an o m al y bu t th e type o f boat i n qu e tio n is n o w c o m

,
s

“ ”
m onl y kn o w n a s t h e c a n oe ya w l fro m i ts de ri v ation ,

d ir ec tly fro m t h e c an o e a nd the fac t th a t it i s al m ost

i n v ari abl y y a w l rigged The bo at sho w n i n Pl a t e XXXV . .

was bu ilt fro m th e lin e s of th e Vita l Spark Pla te ,

XXXI V but w as rigged as a cut ter H er d i m e n sions

.
, .

ar e as fol lo w s
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Ba ll ast i n si d e i ro n .

P l an k i n g
M a s t f ro m f o r e s i d e o f st e m
,

M as t d e ck to h o u n d s
, .

M ast d e ck t o tr u c k
,

M as t di a m e t e r at d e ck
.

B o ws pr i t o u t bo ar d
,

B o ws pri t di am e t e r at s t em
,

M ai n b o o m
M ai n b oo m di am e t e r ,
. .

G a ff ( o v al Q MX HQ D ) ,
.

Ce n t e r o f l a t e ra l re s i s tan c e af t c e n t e r o f
C e n te r of e ffo rt f o r ward o f c e n te r o f l o adl i n e
C e nt e r o f e ff o rt a bo v e l oadl i ne

SA I L A R E A .

Foo t . Ar ea .

1 50 sq f t . .

8 2 . sq . ft .

45 sq . . t
.

T o ta l sai l ar ea 2 83 sq . ft .

Ar e a of r ee f e d m ai n sai l 80sq ft . .

With the above a moun t ballast the draft is a little less of

than 261m but in cruising the crew and stores would bri ng
,
 A MA TE UR C A N OE B UI LDI N G .

h er to her loadli ne The center of eff ort o f reefed mains ai l

.

and whol e staysail is sho wn at C E 2 and o f t he two head .

sails at C E 3 M any will obj ec t to the double rig bu t i n

.
,

practice it i s found to work excellently being very easily ,

handle d The three s mall sails are easily set by a b oy and

.
,

the head sail sheets leadin g to the rai l as sho wn m ay be , ,

reached from the tiller I n tacking they are read ily got .

do wn with o ne ha nd without leaving the sti ck The j ib is .

set flying the outhaul being an endless line with a snaphook

, ,

spliced in The hook i s snapped to the j i b tack the sail

.

partly hoisted and hauled o ut When n ot i n use it I S stowed .

in a bag instead of being furled on the bo wsp rit No jibstay .

being needed the bo wsprit is fitted with a tackle on the

,

bobstay and is easil y housed enti rely which is so meti mes a ,

great convenience in running I nto o dd p l aces as s uch s mall

boats constantly do The fitti ngs are very si mple a ga mmon.
,

i ron bo lted to port side o f ste m head a sam pson post of ,

2x 6in o ak pl ank with a 3i in h o l e b ored through for th

.
,
.

heel o f the round bo wsprit a fid o f tin round iron and two , .

,

s mall i ron bl ocks for the bo bstay tackle one hooking into ,

a wire rope bobstay .

I n so me cases a tabernacle and lo weri g mast are desirabl e n

,

and with a forestay both are easily fitted T he tabernacle .

is made o f two pieces B B o f o ak l i x l inches stepped in , , ,

the k eel D an d co ming to the coa ming I I

, , The mas t is .

stepped in the bloc k C under the floor K and is held by the ,

forestay an d two shrouds al l fi tted with turnbuckles A , .

bar F o f l l in iron is bolted to the tabernacle s sides one ’

.
,

b olt G b eing fit ted with a thu mb nut while the bar is slotted ,

o n th e starboard side to sli p over the neck o f the bolt turn ,

ing on the port bolt Whe n G i s loosened the bar may b e

.

turned over out o f the way and the mast lo wered To avoid .

c utting away th e floor for a distance aft of the m ast a block ,

of o ak E is bol ted to the heel of the latter o n the a l ter

, , ,

side When the mast is lowered the block turns on the edge
.

L l ifting the mast o ut o f the step as it fal ls a tt

, I n l o wer .

i ng the hal liards are stop ped to the mast o ut o f the way the
, ,

j ib halliard is carried forward an d hooked to s tem head the ,

 PR O GR E SS OF CA N OEI N G .

bar F is s wung back and the m ast is lowered by the j i b hal

l iard . The shrouds and also th e parrel on the g aff m ust
both be sl ack ened O ne man can readily lower and hoist
.

the m ast for bridges etc , .

Th e leads o f the various li nes are as fol l o ws : Throat hal

liard s to eleat d on starboa d side peak to cleat b on sa me r
,

side so that both can be rea ch e d at the same ti me ; staysail

hal l iards on clea t c j l b on cl ea t a toppi ngl ift o n cleat e on
, .

mast staysail d o wn haul kno tted i n hole i n coa ming atf

, .

The mainsail is thus se t fro m the starboard an d the head

sails fro m the port si de o f the bo o m and the do wnhaul is ,

h andy to th e st aysai l h alliard Al l are easily reached by .

leavi ng the tiller for a moment an d one m an can m an age all ,

lines The boat has air tanks in each end a large cuddy
.
,

for ward and seats i n the cockpi t For cruising the seats .

would fold out m aking a bed for two o r even three

,

while a tent would be pitched over the boo m The ya wl .

rig would ans wer wel l for such a b oat but the present o ne ,

has proved very satisfactory for singlehanded sa iling and

crui sing .

The following descriptions o f si milar boats are given by

corresponden ts of the London Field i n ans wer to inquiries : ,

O ne wri ter says “

I have j ust l aunched a can oe ya wl ,

length 1 8 ft by 5ft 8l n bea m an d a draft of 2f t aft and

. . .
, .
,

l i t 3 i h forward
. . She has at presen t 90wt o f l ead and iron
. .

ballast inside but req u ires 4 cwt o r 5cwt m ore She is

, . . .

fitted with a we l l 7ft 6ih i n length the fore end being 7 ft

. .
,
.

6i n fro m the fore side o f the s te m

. She is rigged with a .

standing lug mainsail h oisted wit h a single halli ard and , ,

the tack purchased do wn with a gun tackle ; the cle w is

haul ed o ut wi th a traveler o n the boo m which is fitted to ,

the m ast with a gooseneck ; the mast is stepped 2ft 6l n aft . .

of the outside of the ste m ; the m izzen mast is stepped l i t .

in b oard fro m the stem the sail bein g a leg 0 mutton ,

’
.

Hei ght of m ain mas t above deck 1 9ft height o f mizzen mas t ,
.

above deck l Oft ; l eng th o f h ead of l ug 1 4ft ; lengt h o f

, . ,
.

l uff o f lug 9ft ; length o f leach of l ug 23 ft length of

,
. ,

foot o f l ug 1 3 tt 61a ; lengt h of l uff of mizzen 8i t 6i n ;

, . ,
.
 PR O GR E S S OF CA N OEI N G

PLA TE X XXV I — ME R SE Y C AN O E S
. .

T he Mersey canoes o r canoe yawls have grown out of the ,

s m all canoes and are used like the m for general cruising
, ,

but on more open waters The di m ensions are : Length 1 7 ft . .

,

bea m 4 ft 6i n de p th 2f t O ars are used as the bea m is too

. .
, .
,

great to ad mit of paddlin g The d e ck and wel l is si milar to .

a canoe Lead ballast i s stored un der the floors The rig

. .

consists of t wo lugs m ai n and mizzen th e di mensions being :

, ,

Ra cin g u
C r isin g
m ai ns ai l . m ain ai s l .

Ft I n . . Ft I n . .

1 0 00 6 06
1 0 00 7 06
5 00 2 O6
14 06 1 0 C0
14 08 9 00
10 09 7 00

As there is n o centerboard the interi or o f the well is e nti rely

unobstructed and there is roo m for three persons though o n
, ,

a cruise t wo wit h th e nece ssary stores and bag gage would

, ,

be enough Beds for two m igh t easily be m ad e u p on t he

.

w id e flat floor a ten t being pitched over the wel l W hil et he

, , ,

seats may be re moved entirely at night U nder th e fore and .

after decks is a m ple roo m for storage o f all sto res The .

ste e rin g is d one with a deck tiller as i n a canoe , .

I n bu i l ding such a boat the stern sternp ost and keel , ,

would be o f oak —o r the for mer o f hack matac k — sided l i in

keelson of oak pl an k o f ce d ar 1 56 o r gi n l apstreak ;
, , .

gun wale of oak or m ahogany ; deck o f gin pine covered .

,

with 6 to 8 02 4 ( 11 1 1 laid i n paint ; coa m in gs of oak gi n

. 1 , .

thick The ribs would b e fix g space d 9in with floors at

. , .
,

eve ry altern ate fra me .

or a yawl ri g
“
The sails are rigged as standing lugs ,

si milar to the Vip e r m ay be carried They will be of 6oz . .

”
d rill double bighted ; rigging o f s mall 6 thread manilla ;
,
“ -

blo ck s o f wood iron or b rass , .

The di me nsi ons o f a si milar canoe are given in Crui ses i n

“

”
Small Y achts and Big Can oes by Mr H F Speed as fo l , . . . ,

lo ws : 1 6ft long 4 ft l ain bea m 20i n deep a mi dships with

.
, . .
, .
,
 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LD I N G .

fil m . k e el c on tai n i n g 3c wt o f l ead I n sid e she c arri ed

of , . .

l cwt l Ol b s o f l e ad
. Th e sai l ar ea was 180ft m ai ns a il
. . .

and m i ze n l u gs w i th j ib t he d im e n si ons o f spars bein g :

, , ,

M a in m ast l 3 tt l i n . .

boo m f or l ug sa ' l 03t 4i n .

.

y a rd fo r l ug ai s l . 12ft GE
“ .

b o om f o r g a ff m ai ns il . . 8f t 5i n . .

g a fi fo r g a ff m ai nsai l 8f t 6i n
. .

M i ze n m as t 8ft .

b oo m 6tt 4 . 11 .

y rda 7 ft 4 ln . .

b oo m ki n , o u t b o ard 2ft (li n

. .

Bo ws pri t , o u t bo ard 5ft . 9i n .

Spi n ak e r b oo m l Of t Gi n
. .

T o nn ag e , one to n an d an a wf ul f ra t io n
c .

Her w el l was 5ft 6in l ong an d 2ft Gin w ide wi th a . . . .

,

l ocker af t fo r s to res ope n l oc kers alo n g th e side a n d , ,

two shifting th w ar ts s te er i ng w i th a h alf yoke o n t h e ,

rudde r a n d a ro d hi nge d th ere to the m otion o f c ourse

, , , ,

bei n g for e a nd aft Th e w el l was c ov ered c om pl e tel y by

. .

a t en t .

PLA TE XXXV I I . I RI S C A NO E Y A WL .

Th is boa t was b uil t in 1 88 7 by J A A k ester of Hor n

’

. .
,

sea n e ar Hull En g
,
a n d i s now o wn ed by Mr Ho n es . .
,

of th e Cassy Th e hul l i s c ar v el b uilt The m as t is fitt ed

. .

w ith a tabe rn acl e for l o w eri ng th e sail plan be i n g sh o wn ,

i n plat e The i n side b al l as t is i n four bl oc ks tw o be in g

.
,

ge n erally c ar ried w h i l e t h e lead ke el w eighs 4501b s

, .

A c ent erboard coul d re ad i ly b e fi tte d to w ork en tirely

b en eat h th e floor an d w oul d b e a gre at aid to th e bo at in
,

w in d w ard w ork The t i ll er is o f iron a n d c ur v ed as

.
,

sho w n so as to w ork a b ou t t he m i z e n m as t The di men .

si on s are as foll o w s :
Le ng th o v e r all

Be am e x tre m e,

D raf t, extr em e
Le as t f r eebo ard
 PR O GRESS OF CAN OEI N G .

Sh ee r, bo w
s t e rn
B all a s t k eel lea d
, ,

in s id e le ad ,

M ai n ma s t f r m , o

d e ck to t u k r c

M i ze n ma s t fr om s t e m , .

d e ck to tr u ck
M i ze n boo m k i n
M ai n
y ard
M i ze n boom ..

b att e n
M ai n sai l are a ,

M i ze n ar e a,

T t al
o

TA B LE O F O F FSET S—CA N O E Y A WL I RI S .

H EI GHTS . H A LF B R EA DT HS .

D e ck No 1 No 2
. . . . L WL N o 4 No 5 Rabbe t
. . . . .

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 62 2 56 2 47

2 06 1 11 5
 P R O GR E SS OF CA N OE I N G .

PLATE XX XI X —THE BARN E G A I ' ‘

C R UI SER .

The pro minence given to cruisin g of l ate years by the in

creased gro wth and i mportance o f canoeing has brought
many into the ranks who do not care for so s mall a boat as
the canoe but who wish a strong roo my and s erviceable
, ,

boat either for crui sing o r fo r general s ailing alone o r with

, ,

one or two friends The canoe is really a boat for one .

person an d must be capabl e of being paddled sailed and

, ,

handled on shore by o ne ; b ut where these conditions do n ot '

prevail a different type o f boat may often b e used to ad van

tage . I n places where the boat m ust lie afloat and a fin e
canoe would be da maged ; i n open waters where there is no
o ccasion to haul up the b oat and where transit by rail is ,

not an obj ect ; i n shooting tri ps and other cruises where sev
eral persons and perh aps a do g must be carried the boa t
, , ,

sho wn in Plate XX X I X will ans wer ad mirably This . .

”
boat n a med by its des i gner the Barnegat Cr u iser is an
,
“
,

adaptation of the co mmon sn eakbox found al l along the ,

New Jersey coast ( see Plate XXXVI I I p 21 5) to the wants ., .

of crui sers Mr N H Bishop so widely kno wn as a can oe

. . . .
,

ist crui ser traveler and an a b le writer in behalf o f cr uising

, , ,

has for so me ti me past m ade a special study o f the sneakbox

at his home at To ms River N J the ho me of the craft , . .
, .

He has built and tri ed boxes of all kinds has experi mented ,

largely with sails and has expended considerable study o n

,

the details of fittings The b oat sho wn i n Plate XXXI X is . .

a 1 4 ft crui ser of the n ew m odel a nu mber o f which are

-
. ,

n ow building at To ms River under Mr Bishop s person al

’
.

superv ision for m e mbers o f the A meri can Sin gle hand
,
-

“ ”
Cruising Club The lines sho wn were ta k en fro m Seneca s
.
’

boat described in the For est and Stream The di mensions

,
.

are :

O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

O O O O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LD I N G .

For e sid e f stem to o

Mas t tube

Trun k afte nd , r e

Well fore nd , e

W ell afte r nd , e

Ro wl k s oc

B ul k hea d
Diame te r f m ast tu be o .

In shape the new cruiser res embles the old sneakb ox es but ,

is deeper than m ost o f the latter The board is o f steel plate .

l in thick pivoted a t the fore end i n place of the dagger

.
,

boards on ce co mmon in these craft The construction is .

quite peculiar Both keel an d pl an king are of white cedar

.

gi n th ick
. The keel is flat in one piece its half breadth
. . ,

being sho wn by the dotted l ines in the half breadth and body -

plans There i s no ste m piece but th e keel is bent up

.
, ,

for ming the ste m The gar b oards also sh o wn by the dot
.
,

ted lines end along the gun wale ins tead of i n a ra bbet in
, ,

the stern as in most boats

, .

I n buildin g after the keel is fastened to the stocks with

, ,

the proper curve the stern an d m oulds are put i n pl ace

, .

Then two pieces A A are sa wn out of l in board the sh ape

, , .
,

being ta k en from the deck line on the floor These pieces .

are s cre wed i n place at the heigh t o f the l o wer si d e of the

,

deck and re main per manently i n the boa t The ribs are
, .

no w ben t an d fitted in place nailed to the keel and the ,

upper ends o f the for ward ones are nailed to the p i eces A A .

A s the planks are put o n they also are fastened at the fore ,

end to A A The corr ect breadths o f each plan k m ay be

.

taken fro m the body plan on e very fra me The fra m es are .

of sawn ced ar l igx l tin an d spaced mm Th e trunk is o f

. .

pine deck an d ceiling l in cedar The ro wlocks are of

, . .

brass fitted to fold do wn A very peculiar feature of the

, .

new bo at is a high washboard all around the gun wale to ,

keep off water and to serve as a receptacle for o dd articles on

deck For ward the two sides are bolted to a chock of woo d
.

or an i ron c asting of the shape shown the top making a fair

-
,

lea d er for the cable A long the s ides the washboards are
.
 PR O GR ESS OF CA N OE I N G .

held do wn b y an i ron catch a b The piece 6 m ade of

, , ,

band i ron 23 § in is scre wed to the deck and a notch i n the

, .
,

lo wer side o f the washboard h ooks under it The piece a .

is pivoted to b serving when closed as a stop to keep the

. , ,

board in place To re move the wa shbo ard a is turn ed to o ne

.
,

si d e when the board may he slipped free of b Af t th e

, .

washb o ard is fitted with two battens slidi ng into squar e ,

staples in the stern .

A s maller boat of the s a me kind j ust b ui lt is 1 3 ft 5in

'

. .

long The centerboard o f gal vanized i ron is pla ced 3 ft

.
, , .

am from st e m the trunk being 3 ft 1 2

.
, 5m long o n bo tto m
. . .

The rig o f the larger boat is a balance lug o f the follo wing
shape :
 PR O GRESS OF CAN OEI N G .

foot roo m be lo w d e cks I n t h e l at te r sp ac e are sto w ed

of .

th e tw o w ate r j ugs a rubber in fl at abl e m attress a ru b b e r

, ,

coa t an d a m aci n tosh cov ere d bas k e t con t ain i ng bre ad

-
,

pilot bisc ui t ch e es e et c I n th e s t ern c udd y are c an n e d

, , .

soups c a n n e d plu m pud d in gs s ard i nes a n d other tin n ed

, , ,

edi bles pota toes or ot her vege t abl es i n w at er proof m usl in

,
-

b ags ; a c an dl e l a n te rn ridin g l igh t a n d od ds an d e nd s

, ,

o f al l descriptio n s U nd e rn eath th e side d ec ks o n ei th er

.

sid e of th e c oc kpi t a re li ttl e s helv es be t w e e n e very t wo

deck b ra c es There ar e s ev e n o f thes e sh elves on e ach
.

sid e w hich n u m ber ed from the stern ar e oc cupie d as

, , ,

follo ws :
P o rt .

j Ba g o f sh o t . .

1 C an o f po wd e r

So ap, s ng e o
W hi s k roo m
Sc rub b rush
M o nk ey wr e n ch H atch pad l o ck
C an o pe n e r b g C ase k n if e fo rk
.

, i -

Spoo n pl e rs T h r ee t easp o n s
, .

, i . . . o .

C o fi ee ca n . .Su g ar c an .

Sal t c an .C n d e n sed m il k
o
e e B t tle cho w how
.

P pp r b ox o -c .

Ge n e ral l y vac ant , th e bed di ng b ag pre ve n ti ng

eas y a ce s s c .

Spar e r o wl o ck s H at ch e t .

S ar e bl ock s .

an d i es .

T o wels
S li ppe r s .

Th e gu n lies o n th e floo r u n der star bo ard sid e d ec k

an d th e s kippe r s ar tificia l aids t o w al ki n g u n d er port
'

si de d eck O n deck be t w e e n ste m an d m ast 2ft 9in

.
, , .

is c oi l ed t he a n c hor c able w ith C hester foldi n g 1 2l b , .

a n chor O n sid e d ecks w her e t he 6in h ig h w as hboa rd

.
, .

pre ve nts t h eir rolli n g off are th e oars bo at h ook m as t , , ,

a n d s ail w he n n ot i n use A ster n c able is coil e d on af ter

.

d ec k .

I n sailin g a lon g h and l e t ill er is u sed so th a t s tee rin g

-
,

c an b e don e fro m the coc kpit b ut u n d er c er tai n con di ,

ti ons th e skipper s te ers fro m th e afte r d ec k with th e ,

“ ”
tiller pu t o n t he rudd er h e ad ster n fore m ost th e ha n dl e ,

stickin g o ut aste rn li ke a boo m kin The cruising s ail .

 A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LD I N G .

ge n er al ly used is a sprits ail wh i ch c a n b e sto wed belo w

, ,

the h atch es pu t on a n d locked an d th e cruis er l eft at a n y

,

por t w ith every thing in h er w hil e th e skipper t akes th e

,

trai n ho m e to spe n d Su nd ay with h is fa m ily .

With suc h arran ge m e n ts as the ab o v e th e skipper lives

aboar d his boat so m eti m es n ot touchi n g sh ore for thre e
,

o r four d ays Si tt i n g o n h er oilcloth cov ere d floor to c oo k

.

a m eal h e c an reach ev erythin g n ec ess ary w ithou t m o v

,

i ng h is po sition ; sittin g t he re a t n igh t wi th th e te n t up h e

has 4ft of h ead room in a w aterproo f c abin wh ic h c an be
.
,

m ade w ar m a n d cosy i n D e c e m ber by k eeping on e o f

the o il stov es alight ; an d a n chored at ni ght i n a cove h e
“ ”
sl eeps like a to p o n a soft ai r m a t tress rocke d ge n tly
,

by th e w a ves .

”
PLATE S XL . A ND XLI . FO RE ST A ND STRE A M C RU I SER .

The sn eakbox is e ssen ti ally a hun tin g bo a t a n d th e ,

Bar n ega t cruiser sh o w n i n Pl at e X XXI X par tak es .

la rgely o f the s a m e c h ara c teristi cs A s t h e at te n tio n o f

.

boatin g m en h as b een m ore gen er al l y dra w n to th e crui s

i ng qu alities o f th e s n e ak b o x m an y co mm e n ts criticis m s
, ,

an d suggesti o n s h av e be n m ad e for t h e i m prov e m e n t o f

e

t he m odel as a cruiser le a vi ng o ut all con sidera tions of

,

duck shooting a n d l ooking onl y to th e en d of a s afe speedy ,

an d con ven ien t boat a dapt e d both for ge n er al cruisi ng

,

o n Ope n w a ter an d a s afe boat for su m m er sailin g To .

m e et th ese w an ts the acco mp anyi ng desi g n w as m ade an d

a b oat b uil t w hi c h has prov e d ve ry s ati sfa ctory on t ria l .

Th e n ew craf t is based o n the sn eak b o x th e bo rto m of ,

w hi ch is kept al m ost i nta ct ; but an i nspe ction o f th e for

m er bo at sho wed s everal fe atures c apable of alteration if ,

c rui sin g on ly was considered I n the fir st plac e the l o w

.
,

Sides excellen t i f th e boa t is to be us ed a s a blind h av e

, ,

be e n buil t up ; th e e x ce ssiv e cro w n o f de ck has bee n

reduced a nd t he w as hboar ds h av e bee n di sc arded A s
, .

the heigh t o f the deck in t h e n ew b oa t is l ess t h an th at of

th e washboard on th e ol d the w in d age is red uced w hil e
, ,
 PR OG RESS OF CAN OEI N G .

th e room in side an d the stability ar e both in cre ased by

th e addit ion al bulk o f th e n ew boat A t th e s am e ti m e .

th e n ew boat w ill sto w for tra n sport i n th e sa m e brea d th

an d heigh t a s th e o l d th e tot al depth b ein g th e s a m e
, .

Th e i n crease d free b oard a n d highe r b ow i m prov e the boat

grea tly i n rough w at er .

O n th e oth er h an d th e high w as hbo ard s m ad e a con

,

v e ni sh t rec ep tacl e for th e c ar s etc but th e e x tr a i n sid e

, .
,

roo m i n t h e l atter offers a ful l co m p ens a tion Th e fold .

i n g ro w l ocks a re giv e n u p e ntirely t hus re m ovi n g a ,

troubl eso m e appen dage an d cl eats ar e fi tt ed to the

,

c o a m in g i n w h ic h ordin ary s o c ke t ro w l o cks ar e se t

, If .

i t is d esire d to use a longer o ar th e cl eat s m ay be sc re w ed

to th e d ec k n e ar th e gu n w al e A s t her e is n o spec ia l
.

v irtu e i n t h e a w k w ar d lookin g s quar e s te rn of th e s n e ak

-

b o x th e d eck an d pl an k i n g h av e bee n e x ten d ed 2f t aft

,
.
,

th e l a tt er m er ely co n ti n ui n g i n a fair up w ard curv e un t il

th ey m e et a t th e gun w al e as i n t he b o w Thi s giv es a .

h andsom e fi n ish to t h e b o at i n th e shap e o f a n elli pti ca l

,

stern w i th an e asier ru n m or e buoya n cy a n d i n creas ed

, ,

d eck r oom Th e rudde r is o f th e balan ced v ari ety a

.
,

suggestio n o f th e o w n er o f the Bo j a m t h e s toc k b e i n g ,

o f gin i ron t o t h e lo w er e n d of w hic h tw o fl a t piec es

.
,

I X i in ar e w elded m aking a s h ap e l ik e a t u ni n g fork

.
, .

I n this fork a piec e o f l i n o ak i s s e t for m in g the rudd er

.
, ,

th e h e ad o f t he stoc k is squa re d for a till er an d a t th e ,

l ev el o f the d e ck a hole is drill ed for a n iron pin support ,

in g th e w h ole To for m t he rudd er tru n k a p i e c e 0 ?pin e

.

3 in s qu ar e is fi tted fro m t h e i n sid e o f th e pla nki n g to

.

th e de c k bein g s et i n w hi te l e ad a n d w ell scr e w ed

.

through pl an k an d d e ck Through th e c e n t er of t hi s .

pi ec e a v e rti c al hol e l in i n diam e ter is bored for t he

.

rudd er stock .

O win g to th e e xte nd ed deck aft b ot h th e c oc kpi t an d ,

cen ter b o ard are f ur ther aft t h an i n t h e ord i n ary s n e ak

b ox . Th e co am in g o f th e c ockpit is 255m high Th e . .

fl oo r bo ards are r aise d fro m 3 to 3 } in above th e bo tt om a .

,

so th at th e bilge w ate r w il l n o t slop ov er the m th e e x tr a ,

 PR O GR ESS OF CA N OEI NG .

TA B LE OF O FFSETS -
SI X T EEN F O OT CR U I SE R
.

Sta . K eel . D e ck D e ck

1 9

1 81 1 2

2 16 2 02

2 25

2 29 2 O6

2 13

1 1 04 36

1 53

“
D I M EN SI ON S OE F O R EST A N D STR EA M
L e ng t h o ve r al l 1 3tt
.

wate r l i n e 915t .

B e am ex tr e m e
, 3ft . 8 in .

D e pth a t g u n wale 1tt l ai n

. .

Sh ee r b o w
, 56 m .

s te rn l ai n .

C ro wn t d e ck
o 2i h .

Fo r e Si d e o f s t e m to
M as t
T r un k f or e end
,

af t e r en d
Well for e end
,

af t e r n d e

R o wl ock s

W id th o f well
 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LD I N G .

Th e sta tion s are 1 f t apart by bo th sc a l es . I n th e 1 3ft . .

b o at th e w aterlin es are l gin apart a n d i n the 1 6ft 2ih . . .

, .

The sc an tli ng fo r th e 13 tt bo at would b e pl anki n g .

,

gin de ck gin ” ti m bers é x tin spaced 9in The l a rger q .

bo at w ould h ave gi n plan k in g tin deck an d ti m bers

.
, .
,

1 x sin ” spac ed 1 0m Th e ste m is fra m e d as d escribed for

.

t h e ste m o n page 1 82 two qu arter pie ces b ein g cut to th e

,

ou t l in e O f d eck a n d faste n ed to tra nso m a n d upp er e n d Of

k eel A ste rn post a nd sc ag are fi t te d after the b oat is
.

t aken from t he stocks an d two bil ge keels are scre w ed ,

outsid e Th e cen ter b o ard is Of yello w pin e e dge bol ted

.
,
-

w it h gin iron an d w e igh ted wi t h l e ad

. The d e ck is .

c ove red w i th Goz d uck l aid i n fresh pain t A h alf roun d

.
, .

be ad m akes a fi n i s h aroun d th e gu n w al e a n d cov ers the

e dge o f th e c a n vas I f a h an dso m e li ttl e s ail in g boat is
.

d esir ed th e hull above wa ter will b e pa i n t ed bl ack or

,

w hite w i th a gold stripe as sho wn t he bot to m b ein g

, ,

c oated with copper bron z e Th e boat sho w n w as bu il t by .

J M aeW hir ter Of Wes t N ew B righton St ate n I s l a n d

.
, , .

The cos t wil l v ary accord in g to si z e a n d fi nish fro m $125 ,

fo r a 1 3ft boa t w ith sa il an d gal vanized fittings t o $160

.

for a 1 6ft boat fin ish ed w it h brass fittin gs

. .

O nly thre e for m s o f s ail are i n com m on use in Am eri

can w aters the boo m a n d gaff
, t he l eg Of m u tto n or ,

sh arpie a nd th e sprit an d o f these th e for m er is by far

, ,

the m ost com m on I n spite Of i ts s e rious dis ad van t ages

.
,

an d th e fact th at t here ar e m an y be tte r rigs it h a s h eld ,

its o wn for m an y y e ars a n d is still as popul ar Within a

, .

h alf do z e n ye ars t he c an oe m en h a ve giv e n t o t h e w orld

a n u mb e r o f n ew rigs ei th er of n ew design or adopted
,

fro m abroad a n d i n this poi n t Of g o od a n d e ffi cien t s ails

, ,

t h es e n ew s ai l ors ar e fa r ah ead Of t he Older bo at s ai l i n g -

e x perts w it h far m or e experi e nc e Chi ef a m on g the n ew .

fangl ed ide as of the c an oeis t is th e bal a n c e l ug an Eng ,

l ish a dapta tion o f a C hin es e sai l n o w e x ten siv ely us ed in ,

thi s coun try a n d appli cabl e to al l s m a l l boats This s ai l .

”
has b ee n chose n for the Fores t a nd Stre a m crui ser and "
,

has w or ked very su cc ess fully .

 PR O GRESS OF CA N OEI N G .

O f co urs e th e firs t re quisite i n goi ng to w in d w ard is a

t au t l uff as w i th i t s h a kin g n o thing ca n be d on e
, . Wit h
a ba dl y cu t an d m ad e lug sail th is can n ot w ell be h ad ;
.

but a b oom a n d gaff s ail h as th is doubtful a dvan tage th a t ,

b y m ea ns Of two halli ards i t m ay b e strain e d a nd s tretc h ed

in to so m e k i n d o f sh ape though n ev er w ha t i t s houl d b e
, .

With a properly cut sail this ad van tage in fa vor of the

b oo m a n d gaff d is appe ars .

O n a s m all boa t o n e sail i f ri gged so as to be eas il y

'

h a ndl ed is n o t onl y fast er but m uc h m or e e asily m an

, ,

aged th a n two o n e b ein g a j ib I t is Of cours e m u ch

, .

b e tter to w in d w ard o r fre e w h il e t her e ar e f e w er l i n es

, .

Th e r equi site s fo r suc h a s ail ar e diff ere n t i n a l a rg e an d

in a s m all b oa t as i n th e for m er t her e is m uc h m or e r oo m
,

to st a n d an d w ork h all i ard s a n d li n es ; t h ere ar e us u al ly

m ore to h elp a n d t h e m as t is al w ays k ept s ta n di n g Tn
, .

a s m all boat th e s ai l m us t hoist an d l o w er e asily s ur ely ,

a n d qui ckl y ; it m ust b e r e adily r e m ov e d fro m the m as t

fo r sto w age o r i n ro wi n g a n d it m us t be so pl ac ed as to
,

bal a n c e properly i n co n n ec tion wit h th e k e el o r c e n ter

b o ard . I n al l O f thes e p art icul ars t he sa il sho w n i s be tte r
for sn eak b o x es y ach ts y a wls r o wi n g an d s ai li n g boa ts
’
, , ,

a n d other s m all cr aft t ha n t h e boo m a n d g aff Th e

, .

form er h as n o m ast rin gs to j am i n h ois tin g a n d lo w er

in g as th ey a re a l w ays l i abl e to do ; i t c a n b e qui c kly r e
,

m ov e d fro m t h e m ast ; t h e l att er is st eppe d m uch furt her

fro m th e bo w ke ep i n g the w eight aft a n d b ein g eas i l y
,

r eac h ed a n d 1m stepped w hi l e before t h e wi n d th e sail is

,

n ot all o n o n e sid e o f th e m ast an d boat bu t a l arge po r ,

ti on is so pl ac ed as to h elp bal a n c e th e ou te r e n d .

Th e s ail s ho w n is fo r t h e 1 6ft c ru is er a n d is m ad e O f
.
,

yac ht drill (i o z doubl e bigh te d b igh ts run n in g par all e l

, .
, ,

w ith the upper portio n Of t h e l e ach Th e gear is rigged a s .

foll o ws : Th e boom 2m gre at est di a m eter is l 4i t lo ng

, . , .
,

to al l ow f or s tr e tc h a n d is l ac ed to th e foot o f t h e s a il
, ,

th e l a tte r ha vin g abou t 3 ih roac h o r roun din g

. A si n g fie .

bras s bloc k ( 1) is l ashed t o th e ou t er e n d for the sh eet ( f ) .

J ust abr ea s t of the mas t is l as h ed a sna phoo k As the . .

 PR OGRESS OF CA N O E I NG .

w orked o n i t a fi sh ba tt e n ( m m) bein g use d as o n the

,

boom Th e ey e o f th e s trap i s l arge e n ough to ad m i t a

.

sn aph o ok o n h all i ard , o r b e t ter yet , a sn atchbl o ck m ay

be e m pl oyed Th e h alli ard ( a a) Of 9thre a d m an il l a rope ,

.
-

le ads through a s h eav e a t m asth e ad , t h e n c e t h rough a

d eck pul l ey n e ar m as t , an d is b el ay e d o n o n e o f two
cle a ts o n d eck at th e fore e n d o f w ell I n i ts upp er e n d .

a s n ap or gaff tO psail h ook is spli ced a n d o n th e m as t is a ,

4i h gal va ni zed ir on o r brass rin g ( n ) be nt i n t o ov al form

.
,

3 5x 4 2in I t m ust b e l arge e n ou gh to slide r e ad il y w i t h

.

o ut d ange r O f j a m m in g Th e h al l i ard is p asse d t hro ugh

.

th e str ap o n yard a n d t h en h oo ke d t o th e ri ng Wh e n .

h aul e d t aut th e ya rd is al ways h el d i n to t h e m as t ,

w h eth er full s ail or r e efe d i s c arri ed .

A lug s ail can h ardly b e set t au t by a h al l i ard b ut a ,

tack t ackl e m ust b e e m ployed an d a very po w erful o n e

,

i s rigge d as follo ws : O n th e m as t is a n ot h er rin g to ,

w hi ch i s l ash ed a brass bl ock ( d) O n d eck is a d eck

.

pul l ey at por t sid e O f m as t The t a ck l in e ( b) i s m ade

.

f as t to t he d eck a b aft th e pul l ey t h e e n d is r ove up a n d

,

for ward t hro ugh the bl ock ( d) t h en c e d o wn a n d af t

,

through d e ck pul l ey t o cl e at a t fore en d o f w ell I n .

s etting s ail t he m as t is s tepped hook o n boo m is s n appe d

,

i nto t h e eye o f b l o ck (60 th e two p arr els o n th e botto m

,

are ti e d th e h all i ard i s p ass ed fro m aft for ward through

,

th e s trap o n yard an d h ooke d t o upper ri ng ( n ) ; t h e n th e

sail is hois ted as h igh as possibl e af te r whic h w h en t he
, ,

h alli ard is b el aye d t h e tack is h aul e d do w n u n ti l t he s a i l

,

is p erfe ctly fl at I n r eefing or lo weri ng i t is bes t to s ta rt

.

th e t a ck firs t t he n wh e n the h al li ard is s et up t h e tack

,

is h ard e n ed d o wn ag ai n .

A tOppin gl if t ( e) is t hus fi tte d : The lin e is doubl e r un ,

n in g fro m m ast h e ad d o w n e ach si de o f s ail an d splic in g

i n to o n e j ust b el o w b oo m l e avi n g e nough sl ack t o lo we r
,

the l at ter O n th e b oo m is a fa irl e ad er ( k) l ash e d fast ,

.

an d t h rough t his th e tO ppin gl i ft is ro ve t hen c e t o a cl e at ,

o n boom I t m ay th us b e e asily r e ac h ed for a pul l at any

.

ti m e e ve n wi th th e boom h ard Off

,
I n hois ti ng or r eef
.
 AM A TE UR CA N OE B UI LD I N G .

ing the tO ppin gli ft s hould take the w eigh t o f th e b oo m

al ways .

I n re m ovin g the s ail th e e n d is cast O ff an d t he li ft

re m ain s on th e m ast I n s ettin g s ail th e l att er is fi rs t
.

d ropped i nto t h e bi ght Of the tO ppin gl i f t t he fore e n d o f ,

sp ars o n deck a t por t S id e Of m ast The lift is m ad e .

fast to c l eat r aisin g th e s ail th e t ack an d h alliard a re

, ,

sn apped o n an d all is ready for h ois tin g

,
A j acksta y .
,

from m as the ad a n d m ade fas t to m ast a b ou t 1 ft abov e

, .

deck w ill b e foun d v ery useful i n h oldin g up t he for e

,

en ds Of sp ars a n d s ail .

O n e ach ba tt e n a parrel i s m ad e fas t to h old t h e s ai l to ,

th e m ast o n t he s t arboard t ack Thes e ar e s m a l l li n es a bou t

.

25ft lon g th e fore en ds fast to th e bat te n s w hil e th e

.
, ,

af ter e nds are tie d o r b o ok ed i n to ri n g s l ash ed to th e

bat ten s .

Th e shee t in a s m al l b oa t is al w ays a troubl e w h erev er ,

it m ay be m ad e f as t i t is al ways i n the w ay Th e pl a n .

adopte d in t h e presen t c as e is perh aps as good as a ny .

The s h eet r un s t hrough a block ( 1) o n boo m a n d a n eye

Sp l ice is w orked at e ac h e nd O n d eck are thr ee clea ts
.
,

o n e ( g) j us t ab aft th e rudderh ead a n d th e oth ers ( h) o n

,

e ach sid e Of w e l l Wh e n on t h e wi n d t he af te r eye o f

.

shee t is hooke d over th e after cle at ( 9) w hi l e th e Sh ee t is

h eld i n the h a nd o r be l a ye d to on e Of the forw ard cl e ats ;
o r if d esirable t he eye m ay h ook ove r o n e Of th e lat te r .

Whe n the boo m is O ff t he she et is cast Off fro m th e cl ea t

an d i ts w hole l en gt h is used th e eye a t th e e nd pre v en tin g
,

i t from u n re e v i ng fro m th e block By th i s m eth od a.

v ery short she et is required whi l e a good purc ha se m ay

,

b e had w he n o n the w ind an d t h e sh eet c an al ways be

,

arran ged to b e o ut o f the way o f t he s ail or .

Fi t te d as describe d th e sa il w ill be fo un d a v ery eff ec

ti ve o n e, an d on ce accus to m ed to it th er e is n o diffi cul ty
i n h andl i n g i t quickly w h il e i t is m uc h le ss tr oubleso m e
,

an d c u m brous t ha n a m ai ns ail an d j ib I f fo r any .

re ason the l att er m ust b e used i t c a n b e fi tt ed on a s ta y ,

,

th e luff Of the sa i l b ei ng c ut do wn as m uch as possible ,

 PR O GR ESS OF CAN OEI N G .

so as t o al lo w roo m fo r t he j ib bu t i n al m ost , all s m al l

b o ats the si ngl e s ail w ill b e foun d bes t .

PLA TE S XLI I . A ND X LI I I —SAI LI NG . A ND C R UI SI NG BO A T

”
“
D E LTA .

Th e m a n y in qui ries con c erni n g sn eak b o x es tuck ups , ,

s m a ll sh arpi e s a n d si mi l ar cr af t sho w t hat th ere is a ge n

er al d e m an d for s m all saili ng cr aft o f good design bot h ,

f or ordin a ry pl e asur e sai l in g an d f or m or e o r l ess e x te n d ed

c r uisin g This d e m a n d m ay b e largely ascribe d to th e
.

i n fluen c e Of c a n oe in g as i t h as arise n sin c e th e l atter

,

sport bec a m e ge n er ally pop ul ar i n t his c oun try Ther e .

are m a n y to d ay w ho h av e give n up t h e c a noe after a fai r

t ri al a n d m an y m or e w h o ar e re ady to do SO ; but th is is
,

n ot o n a ccou n t o f a n y d efe c t i n th e bo at Th e ge n eral .

popul arity Of c a n oe in g togeth e r w it h t h e m oderat e ex

,

p en e l e ads m a n y n ovices i n to i t n ot becaus e i t i s j ust

s
, ,

th e for m Of sail i n g w hich t h ey pr efer but beca us e t hey ,

kn o w o f n o oth er w hich w ould su i t th e m be t ter A fte r .

a ti m e so m e fin d th e c an o e to o s m all to c ar ry a p arty Of

fr ie n ds oth ers w is h a boat e x clusi vely for s a ili n g i n Ope n

,

w at ers a n d oth e rs again w ish to c arry a n a m oun t O f

, , ,

s to r es g un s a n d t ackl e for w hich t h e ca n oe n ev er was

, ,

i nt e n ded Th is prove s n oth in g agai nst the ca n oe a bo at

.
,

a d apt e d to w i de r ra nge o f use th an a n y oth er pl easur e

cr aft ; bu t w h e n a m an gets t o this st age an d b egin s to
l on g for a s n e ak box o r a sh arpi e h e is better out Of a ,

c a n oe th an in it though th er e is n o r e a son w h y th e bon d

,

b e tw e e n h im an d the m an wh o sti ll s w ea rs by a 1 5 x 60
c an oe sho uld be s ev e red ; t h ey are both c ru isers a nd s ailors
at botto m t hough t he i r cr aft m ay v ary
,
.

Th e boat sho w n i n t h e a cc om pa nyin g pl an s th e D el t a , ,

w as pl an n ed by Dr H G Pi fi ar d for m er o w n er O f the
. . .
,

s n e akbo x Boj a t l is an atte m pt to co m

.

bi n e th e best qual iti es Of s ev era l boats Th e bo tto m Of .

t h e s n e ak b o x i s pr es erv ed bu t w ith th e bo w s o f th e ordi

,

n ary ro wboat a s w e ll a s a h igh er sid e w hil e th e ov er

, ,

h an g an d r udd er of th e s h arpie ar e add ed The boa t was .

 PR OGRESS OF CA NOEI N G .

TA B LE OF O FFS ETS—EI GHTEEN F O O T B OA T -

.

H EI GHTS H A LE B RE AD T HS
.

s -
n
. .

o
i
t
a
t
S D e ck . K eel . D e ck . NO . 1 . NO 2. . NO 8 . . No . 4 . Keel .

1 8°

2 33

1 54 2 64

2 67 2 57

l 56 2 56 2 45

1 64 2 45 1 11 7

1 84 1 84

TA BLE O F O FFSETS—T HI RT EEN -

F OO T BOA T .

H EI GHTS . H A LE —
B R EA DTHS .

D e ck . K eel . D e ck . NO 1 . No 2. . NO 3 . . No 4 . . K eel
.
 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LD I N G .

The sc an tlin g for t he l arger boa t w i l l be : K e e l Of o ak ,

{in thick a n d Sin w ide ; st e m of h ackm a tac k or oak kn e e

. .
,

side d 2i n ; stern post oak 1 x 2in ; sc ag ye ll o w p i n e 1 in

.
, , .
, , .

t hick ; pl an k i n g c ed ar gi n th e garboar d 2ih ; d ec k

, , , .
,

c ed ar o r white pi n e tin sc an t ; coa m ing o ak ai m ; d eck , .

, ,

beam s l i x l i ; ri bs 1 x tin spaced 9i n A cl am p 2x gin

, , q .
, .

at m iddl e t peri n g to 1 5 ; x gi n at e nds w ill b e r un in side

, a .
,

fro m the b o w to t he bu lk he ad b e in g rive ted t hrough th e ,

ri b s an d upper stre ak I t shoul d be s e t so far belo w t he .

gun w al e a s to all o w t h e d ec k be a m s to rest o n i t A soli d .

check shou ld b e fitted in plac e Of a bre ast h ook at t he -

b o w belo w th e de ck an d o n top Of t hese clam ps

, The .

after bulkh ead w ill be Of 1 i n pin e o r Spruc e Th e w ell . .

for the c en te rboard w il l h av e h ead ledges b b o f o ak , .

,

1 X 2i n w i th bed p i eces also Of o ak Sti n de ep a n d l i in

.
, , , . .

thick the sides a bo v e bein g Of l in cl e ar w hit e pin e

,
. .

The keel is gin e x tre m e t hick n ess but it m ay be taper ed

. , ,

begi n n in g at station 5 a n d r educin g i t t o ti n at t h e a fter .

en d so t ha t i t wi ll ben d m or e easily I t w i l l b e thick er

, .

th an th e garboards but W h e n th e pl a n kin g is co m ple te d ,

the bot to m w il l be pla n ed do wn o n t he edges to m e et th e

latter .

The s m all er boat w ill h av e keel gin t hi ck ; ste m sid ed .

,

1 } in ; ri b s
1 . spac ed 8in ; pl a n kin g tin ; de ck gin
,
.
, ,

co ami ng gi n sca n t ; d eck be a m s l in w ide a n d l i in d eep ;

, .
, . .

h eadl edges 1 } x § in b edpi eces 3 x l i i n

,
1 I n con struc , .

ti on th e ke el is firs t l aid o n the s tocks a n d th e s te m is got

,

out a n d fitted A m oul d is m ade for e ve ry st at ion th a t

.
,

fo r sta tion 8 being c arefully bev eled a n d fitted as it is to ,

rem ai n per m an en tly a s a bul khead A m ould is n o w .

m ade o f co mm on stuff to fi t t h e up ward cu r ve o f t h e ke e l

fro m statio n 5 to th e ster n an d is s et up o n the stoc ks , ,

th e ke el bei ng shored do w n i n to pl ac e Th e m oulds .

,

e ight i n n u m ber i nc lud i n g th e b ulkhe a d w ill t he n be

, ,

se t in plac e O n ly h al f as m a n y m oulds w oul d be used

.

by a regular builder bu t t he a m ateur w il l fin d th e wor k ,

e asier if h e h as pl e n ty Of m oul ds The sh ape Of th e ste m .

is gi ve n by two piec es ff ter m ed quar ter ti m be rs These , , .

 PR OGRE SS OF CA N OEI N G .

n eed be onl y o f l i n pi n e o r spruce They m us t b e

. .

m ar ke d o ut fro m t he li n es on t he floor an d c ar efull y

be v el ed T h ey are s cre w ed to t he ke el an d al so to th e
.

bul kh ead b ein g l e t i nto t he l a t te r

, .

A n u m be r o f ribban ds o f o ak o r yello w p i n e w i th cle ar ,

s traight grai n ar e n o w r u n arou n d t h e m ou lds abou t six

, ,

o n ea c h sid e The ribs are n o w pl a n e d up s te a m ed a n d

.
, ,

ben t in to pl ac e be i n g h eld by a n a i l p ar tly d riv e n t hroug h

,

E ach rib i s l on g e nough to l ap t h e ful l

'

eac h ribban d .

widt h o f t h e gar bo ard t h e t wo th a t go to m ake a fra m e

,

lyi ng side b y side w here th ey cross Wh e n th e ri bs ar e .

all i n a n d faste n ed per m an e n tly to th e keel an d tem po r

ar il y to th e ribban ds th e l o w er rib ba n d o n e ac h side is

,

t ake n o ff t he garboard got o ut an d set Th e n e x t ri b ba nd

, .

is th e n re m ov ed a n d a n other pl an k is set a n d so un t il the

bo at is pl an ke d The pi ec e a is o f o ak l i in t hic k se t
.
, .
,

do wn o n th e ke el to s tiffe n i t a n d for m a m as t step I t .

shou ld b e put in pl ac e before t he ri b s go in t h e l a tter be in g ,

j ogged in a n d w ell fast en ed to it Th e c lam ps shou ld b e .

pu t i n be fore th e fra m e is take n fro m th e s toc ks t he d ec k ,

beam s b ein g also fi tt e d .

Th e slot fo r the tr un k sh ould n e v er be out u n t i l th e l ast

thi n g bu t w h e n th e pl a n kin g is co m pl e ted tw o m orti ses
, ,

ar e c ut for t h e headl edg es t h e two b ed pi ec es ar e go t o ut

,

an d fast e n ed to t h e m w it h through riv ets t he boa t is ,

take n fro m the st o c ks an d th e tru n k put in scre ws be in g ,

driv e n thr ough th e k e el i n to th e bed pi ec es Th e sid es .

of w h ite pi n e ar e t he n put o n after w hi c h t he d ec k ,

b e a m s pr ev io umy fi tted w ill b e faste n ed

,
Th ey s houl d
, .

r un ac ross th e t r u n k bei ng j ogged do w n so tha t t he d eck

,

w il l clos e t h e to p o f t h e tr un k tigh tly Th e m or ti s e for .

th e ste r npost is n ex t c u t t he post pu t in a n d fas te n ed to

,

the bu l k he ad t he n t he sc ag is c u t a n d fi tted be in g f as t
, ,

e n ed t hrough wi th scre w s fro m i n sid e o f keel To m ak e .

a tigh t c as i ng for the r udders tock a piec e o f pi n e 31l in , .

squar e e is fitted to th e ke el r ea ch in g t o un d er side o f

, , ,

d ec k bei n g set i n w hi tel ead a n d w ell sc re w ed to m ak e a

,

w aterti gh t j oin t A h ole is th e n bo re d for t h e iron r ud

.
 PR O GRESS OF CA N OEI N G .

Th e s ail sh o w n i n Pl ate XLI is w ell adapt ed for the

.

sm all er b oat an d w il l be n on e to o l arge but i n Pl at e ,

X LI H tw o oth er suitable rigs are sho w n th e s c al es gi ve n

. ,

bein g ad aptabl e to ei th er si z e o f boat D e lt a w as rigge d .

w ith a singl e l arge lug o f a b out 1 50ft w hi c h sh e c ar rie d .

,

easil y w it hou t b all ast i n ord in ary w ea ther The l ug w as .

c ut wi th very littl e rou n d to t h e h e ad a n d t he yar d w as

straight There w er e n o batte n s in th e sa il but tw o ro w s

.
,

o f re ef poin ts Th e sh e et was fas t to a n eye b ol t o n the

.

qu arter a n d led t hroug h a bl ock o n t h e bo o m an d th e n ,

un der a t h um b cl eat o n t h e sid e o f c oa m in g o r thr oug h a ,

s n atc h bloc k o n th e floor o f the bo at U n der t h is rig the.

bo at h an dles v ery s atisfactoril y for sin gl eh an d s ail in g ,

but so m e ball as t w ould be n eed ed if n o p assen ge r s w ere

carried Th e d otte d l in es s ho w th e siz e o f a c at rig th e
.
,

m ast bein g stepped furth er for w ard The l ug is the .

be tter o f t he two bu t is m or e difficul t to rig a n d m a n y

, ,

w il l prefer th e c at si m pl y b ec aus e t h ey ar e use d to i t a n d

un fa mil i ar w ith th e other Th e m ai n an d m i z en rig i n
.

t h e secon d dr a w in g is s m a l l e r an d be tter ad apte d for

,

c ruis i ng an d s ail i ng al on e Th e d e tails o f t h e riggin g are

.

th e s a m e as i n t h e pre c edi n g s ail plan The s ail s her e .

sho wn ar e o f th e form usu all y c arri ed o n c a n oes a n d sm all

bo ats b ut a fl at te r a n d m ore effe ctive s ail c a n b e h ad by
,

m akin g t h e yard lon ger c ar ryin g i t d o w n to th e batt e n ,

,

roun din g t he he ad m uch m ore th a n is s ho w n a n d t hro w ,

i ng a l ittle m ore o f the y ard for w ar d o f th e m as t as i n ,

t h e Cr uis er s s ail Suc h s ail s re qu i re to be c arefull y

’
.

rig ged a n d m ore or l ess trial is al w ays n e ed ed to fin d the

,

best positio n fo r h alliard a n d ta ck o n th e sp ars b ut wh en ,

o nc e com pl e te t h ey are good e n ough to fu ll y repay th e

tr ouble Th e di m e n sion s o f the si ngl e l ug are as fo l lo w s
. ,

t he m ast i n t h e p l a n be in g sh o wn for w ard o f its proper

position , w hic h is giv en in t h e t able :
1 8m . BOA T .

M as t, f ro m s t em 4f t .

a bo v e d e ck 1 5ft
di am e te r at d e ck
 AM A TE UR CA N OE B UI LD I N G .

18m . BO AT .

B oo m
d i am e te r
d i am eter .

Foo t of

Lu :
‘
h
He ad
Lee h c . .

T a k to pe ak
c

C le w to t h r o at
A re a
The di m ensions of th e m ai n an d m i z e n
1 8m . B O AT . 1 3m . B OA T .

M ai n . M i ze n .

Ft I n
. . Ft I n. .

M ai n , f r om s tem 2 00 17 00
a b v e d e ck
o 12 06 7 00
d iam e t e r at 03 0 02
Bo o mk i n , o n tb oard 1 09
Boom 6 06 8 10
d i am ete r 0 01 % 0 01 54
4
Yard . 5 03 7 00
0 01 0 O ;
Foo t -
. 6 00 8 04 fi 8
Lufif . 3 06 4 09 w3
09
t
4 6 06 8
Lee ch 7 07 10 06 8
T ack t o 8 00 1 0 10 m8
Cle w t thro at o . 6 06 9 00 P 8
A re a . 9
0sq f t . . 26sq f t . . 498 q f t
. l 4sq f t . .

Th e dra win gs sh o w the siz e o f s ails w h e n s tre tch e d o n

the sp ars a fter a li ttle use Th ey m ust be cut a littl e .

s m all er th an thi s in m aki ng a n d after a se aso n they w i ll ,

h ave stre tched to the fu l l size o f th e spars sh o wn .

PLA TE X LI V —THB DE LA W AR E RI V ER DU CKE R

. .

A lon g th e D el a w a re t h es e bo ats are m uc h us ed fo r ro w

i ng a nd sail in g gen era l ly gu n n i ng a n d fishin g b ut especi
, ,

al ly for r eedbird s hootin g i n t h e m arsh es be lo w Phi l ad el

phi a The flat floor al lo ws them to be pol ed far up on the
.
 PR O GRESS OF CA N OEI N G .

m ars hes w here t h ere is m or e m ud tha n w at e r a nd they ,

ar e ofte n prope lle d by a lo ng po l e w it h thr e e pron gs o n

t h e low er e n d , f or po l in g o n m uddy bottom s Th ere i s .

n o fi x ed t h w ar t bu t a m ovabl e b o x
, is us ed s o tha t th e ,

gun n er m ay si t in th e for e e n d a n d hi s as sist an t m ay use

th e pol e i n th e af te r e n d : t h e l at te r may si t forw ar d an d
r o w w hil e t he g un n er oc cupi es t h e after se a t ; o r th e boa t

m ay be backed d o w n by t h e o ars m a n i n th e a fter se at ,

th e g unn e r sit tin g o n t h e b OX i n t h e b o w Bot h e n ds o f .

th e bo at are ex ac tly a li ke t h e onl y d iff e re n c e bein g i n ,

th e s e at ro w l o ks a n d c oa m in g
,
c .

The di m ens ion s ar e : Le ngth l 5ft ; be a m 3ft l Oin ; , .

, . .

dep th 1 3i n ; sh e er 8i n Th e st e m an d ste rn ar e sided

,
.
, .

3 in ke el sid ed Gin a m ids hips an d m ould e d l in ; pl ank

.
,
. .

in g gm ; ti m bers fl u x 36mg d eck gi n fl oori ng l in

-

, , , , .

TA BL E OF O FFS ETS—D ELA W A R E R I V ER D U CK EB .

HA L F B R EADT HS
- .

Th e s ta t i n s ar s pa ed 2f t apar t m e asur i n g ea
o e c . , ch way f ro m
m i d shi p se c ti o n an d th wa t e r l in es ar e 3 l n a pa rt
, e . .

A lon g th e botto m o f kee l a re two w o od en run n ers A A , ,

a n d sh od w ith h alf rou n d ir on I t w il l b e noti ced

-
.

th a t t h e s te m an d stem ea ch proj ec t t he sam e dis tan ce

 PR OG RESS OF CA N GEI N G.

“ ”
cas e in m ost c atbo a ts o f an y siz e but i t t ur n s o r tuc ks ,

up in build er s p ar l a n c e to t h e h eigh t o f th e w a te r l i n e
,
’
, ,
”
as in th e D el ta Forest a n d Str ea m
.
‘
cru ise r an d the ,

s n e a kbo x ; a separ at e sc ag b ein g a d d ed b el o w th e ke e l .

Th e w ord c a m e i n t o gen eral us e from t h e c ons tructi on

an d is n o w appli ed s ol ely to su ch a boat as is h er e sho wn .

Th e tw o boats h er e d esc r i b ed Pri scill a an d I gi di ous , ,

are o w n e d o n th e Sc hu y l kil l a b ou t fi t e e n m il es fro m f

Phi l ad elphia an d s ai l i n the r ac es but th e h o m e o f the

, ,

craft is in t h e K en s i ngton dist r ic t o f Phil ad e lph ia ne ar ,

th e fa m ous C ra m p s shipyard
’
H ere t h er e are s ev eral .

l ong w harv es li n ed o n e ac h side w ith ro w s o f tw o s tory

,
-

bo a t ho us es t w e n ty to thi rty in a r o w
, I n t hes e h ous es .

ar e s tored hun dr ed o f ducke rs a n d tucku ps whil e the ,

upper s tory o f e ac h is fit te d up m or e o r less co m fortably

fo r th e use of the cr e w s ; g un n in g fis hi n g a n d ca m pin g ,

outfi ts wi t h sa ils a n d ge ar b e i n g k ept t here O n Sun

, , .

days i n particu l ar the w h arv es an d houses ar e cro w d ed ,

t he boats ar e o ff fo r shor t c rui ses up o r d o w n th e ri ver ,

o r r ac es ar e s ail ed be t we en th e rec ogni z e d cracks h an ,

dl ed by o l d an d s kill f ul ca pt ai ns a nd t rain ed cre ws Th e .

foll o wi n g t ables gi ve v ery full y t h e det ail s o f th e boats :

D D E N SI O N S A ND ELE ME N TS O F TU CK U PS .
I gi di ous .

Length o ve r all 1 5 02 15 044

1wl . . 1 4 11
Beam , ex t rem e
3 07
3
s te rn 10

Depth , am i d sh i p . 1 03 2
ee
Sh r, b o w 6
6
s l ac em e nt t
Di p lbs o 716
to 7i n le v el l i n e l b s . . . 760
pe i n h i mm e rs i n l bs
r c o , . 1 75
A r ea l w p lan e sq f t
. . . . . 48 52
l at e ral pl an e 8 00
 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LD I N G .

C LR
. a b af t fo r e end l w l wi th bo ard 9 00
. . . . . .

CE a b a f t f o r e en d l w l
. 6 27 . .

S tat ion 0 to m as t c e n te r 1 00

sl o t i n k eel g82
po in t o f co am i ng 3 04
fo r e t h wart 6 02
af t e r t h wart 9 93
Mas t d e ck to , 1 6 00 1 5 00
d i am e t e r a t d e c k 3 2

tru ck 16
Boo m
10 00
ete r
di am
Bo ws pri t u t bo ard , o

Ce n te r bo a rd
M ai n s ai l foo t , 18 00
lu ff 1 1 08
h e ad 9 04
lee h c 1 ) 10
5
ta ck to pe ak 1 9 10
cle w to t h wart 20 02
A r ea sq f t , . 19
8
Pri s i ll a ha a k eel s i d ed M n a t rabbe t Gléin i n e d e l in thi k
c s . , . l , . c ,

stem an d s te n po s t s id e d l i n tran s om %m thi ck r bs

r .
,
.
, i

spac e d 9i n na il s ( oppe r r iv e ted o v e r bu s) s pac e d 3 m Pl ank

.
, c rr .

i ng l apstrak e %l n d e ck
, c e n te r bo a r d Mi n o ak
, c am i ng .
, o

%in; o ak 35 m h i g h a t poi n t Mi n at m i d shi ps an d %i n at s t e r n

, . , . . .

R o un d f d e ck 1 }§ i n
o We a ri ng s t ri ps A A ak
, .
, , o ,

s pace d 6in apart T hwar ts 7i n wi d e mm a bo ve b o tt m of k eel ;

. . . , . o

tru n k 11i n h i gh . .

I n g idi us i 3 f t 2}§i n wi d e ac r ss s te m wi th s ka g 3f t 4i n l on g
o s . . o ,
. .

an d 9 }§ i n d ee p; co am i n g M n h igh at p i n t l i n f ro m m id s h i ps
. . o , .

to s te rn . K eel M i n ex trem e wid th ; r u n d o f d e k 1 54 m; m a s t

. o c ,

s tep o f i r n b ace d wi t h tw rod s wi t h t u rn bu k les R i bs and

o , r o c .

f a s te n i n gs as i n P ri sci l l a P l an k i n g %in . .

The boa ts ar e al l l apstra ke very care fully buil t a n d ,

co ppe r faste n ed
-
an d ar e de cked a s sho wn w it h a b ou t
, ,

Him w a ter ways t h e w e l l ex t en ding to t h e tr an som The

, .

bo ard is o f th e d agger patte rn oft e n b eing m uch lar ge r ,

th an show n a n d th e ru dder is o f t h e fa m ilia r barn d oor

,

pa tte rn o f gr eat l e n gth with til l er to m atch The b oa rds

, , .

are al ways of w ood but at N orr is to w n s te el plat es h av e ,

la tely bee n in tr odu c ed , a n i nn ovation not approv ed of by

 PR O GRESS OF CA N OEI N G .

th e Phi l ad elphia e xper ts Fiv e m e tal bo ards of 501bs dow n. .

,

o n e a br ass board are n o w i n use a t N orristo w n

, Th e sail .

ig ru l es o n t h e D el a w ar e allo w 4 f t 6in be a m fo r a 1 5ft

'*
g
-
. . .

If Twat w i th fiv e m en all tol d w hil e the s ai l is lim i te d to 56

“
,

TA BLE OF O FFS ET S T U C K U P P RI SCI LLA .

-

H EI G HTS . HA L F—
B R E A D THS .

D e ck . Ra bbet D eck 8i n . 6i h . 4l n . 2i n .

1 53 1 29 1 12

1 84

1 105 l 62 1 42

2 07

0 0 0 0 0 0

1 97

0 0 0 0 0 0

l i n earfee t o f bol t rop e w he n n ew gi vi n g about 1 80ft , .

ar ea This w ill giv e 1 5f t on foo t l 3 i t luff 8ft h ead

. .
, .
, .
,

a n d 21 ft lee ch I n t h e M S C t his ru l e i s n o t used the

. . . . .
,

bo ats b ein g c l ass ed to g e th er w it h a pe n al ty for e xc ess of

sail are a over t h at all o w e d Th e l i m it is 1 65ft for tuck ups,
. .

1 1 0ft for duck ers a n d 80f t for c a n o es an d s m al l bo ats th e

. .
,

tuck ups allo win g t he oth ers five m in utes ov er a five m i l e

 P R O GR ESS OF CA NOEI N G .

w ere a dd ed r epl ac ed a little l ater by a s e at 5i n b elo w

, .

gun wal e , w hic h s e e m ed v ery high at first I t was soon .

e v ide n t th at t h e cre w c ould si t far o ut t o w i n d ward an d ,

w ith m ore co m fort , w hil e th e p ad , s e w n i n the b ack o f

th e coat , to prot ec t th e backbon e w h e n sittin g i nsid e ,
w as disc arded The n e x t m ove was to pl ac e a sea t c an oe
. ,

fas hi on , across the gu n w al e, a v e ry gre at i m prov e m en t ,

as a b e tter c o m m an d o f t h e b o at i s ob tai n e d w i th l ess

effor t I n s aili ng with but two s ails th e ar e a was t o o

.

s m a l l for raci n g , wh il e th e balan c e w as bad , th e boat

con sta n tly l ufii n g Th e addit io n o f a j ib c ured bo t h
.

fa ults th e boat b ein g fa ster e x ce pt w he n fre e a n d stee r

, ,

in g to p erfec tion I n e very p uff sh e w i l l e at h ers elf to

.

w in d w ard w i thou t a tou ch o f th e till er o n ly a slig h t ,

m otio n o f th e body for ward or aft b ei ng n ec ess ary to l uff

h er up or thro w h er h e ad o ff I t is to this t h at s h e o wes
.

m uch of h er gai n as li ttle s te ering with th e ru dd er is

,

n e ed ed to m ak e h er w ork w ell i n th e cons tan t l y v aryi n g

pu ff s th at rush do w n fro m t he hil ls i n all dir ections Sh e .

is s aile d w ithou t a fly s uch as is use d by m ost o f t h e oth e r

,

bo ats as i t is very d eceptive

. I n r un n i ng fre e o r i n t ac k
.

in g t he rudde r is us ed b ut m ost o f t h e st eeri ng is d on e by

,

th e body o nly The boat s w orst poi n t o f sail in g i s befor e

.
’

th e w in d her best re ac hi ng She rec eiv es ab o ut 9min

,
. .

in fiv e m il es fro m boa ts 6in an d s ail e d by .

,

four o r fiv e m en h an gin g out to w i n d w ard by m e an s o f

ropes The di m e n sio ns o f G racie are as fo ll o ws
.

Le n g th extr e m e 12ft .

Beam 2f t . mm .

D pthe , sh ips
a m id . 1f t .

a t e nd s 1 tt . Si n .

M ai n m as t f r o m s t e m
,

ab v e d e k o c

d i a m e t e r d e ck , he ad
M ai n b oo m
d i am e t e r
Y ard
di am e ter .

B att e n
M i ze nm ast a b ove deck , .
 A MA TE UR CA N OE B UI LDI N G .

M ize n m as t , di am e te r a nd

f ro m s t e m . 9ft . 7i n .

M ize n boo m 5f t . Sin .

B att e n 4 t 10
- . m .

B ows pr i t o u t b oard 4f t . 65§ i n .

J ib , or 7f t . 6i n .

f oo t a nd lee ch e a h , c 5f t . 3 ln .

Th e j ib h alliard a n d do wn haul are i n on e l en gth th e ,

bight bel aye d to a cl eat o n t h e port sid e a s m all cl ub is ,

l a ced to t he foot o f t he j i b Th e m ain m as t a nd boo m ar e .

o f ba m boo m a i n boo m ye l lo w p i n e m i z e n m as t of w h i te
, ,

pin e Th e m ai ns ail is fitt ed to reef to a l ate e n by m ea ns

.

o f a j aw a t B o n th e boo m so plac ed th at n o ch ange o f ,

the halli ard is n e cess ary

'

The batt e n is fi tted wi th cl ea ts

.
,

C C C C o f spring brass w i th a si ngl e re ef poi n t Oppo

, ,

site each The boom i s lif ted a re ef poin t m ad e fast by

.
,

o n e t urn about th e cl e at th e n t he b oo m is shi fted u n til ,

th e s eco n d j aw e ngages th e m as t Th e oth er re ef poi n ts .

m ay t he n be m ade f as t a t l eisur e though i n a short squ all ,

th e j ib is dr opped th e m ai nboom m ad e fas t by but o n e

,

re ef poin t a n d shift ed to s et b y the i n n er j aw The

, .

m i ze n is n ev er re efed I n m a kin g th e s ails the sp ars

.

w ere b en t to position on th e floor a n d th e s ha pe m ark ed ,

th e n the s tu ff a si ngl e w idth o f sh e et in g w as cu t a n d

. ,

se w n The w ea the r grip a dopt ed after m a ny ex per i

.
,

m en ts is 3 ft 7 ln on top 2ft o n botto m an d l 5m de ep

, . . . . i .
,

b ein g i m m ersed 10m The to p edge is gin thick bottom . .

,

l in .The dist an ce fro m sid e is 2f t 4m an d the i m m ersed . .

a re a 295sq in A ke el h as al so be e n ad ded 4i n deep in

. .
, .

all o f w hi c h t he lo wer h alf is l e ad 25lbs

, Th e are a o f , .

ke el is 33 dsq ih o r wi th grip 63 05 q in The grip is hun g

. .
, . .

fro m th e sockets for t he ro wlocks by two cross pieces of

w oo d i n the for m o f a n X rivete d w h ere t hey cross a n d ,

also to th e top o f t h e grip Th e boa t does n ot poin t as .

c los e as so m e o f he r co m petitors bu t go es e nough faster ,

to m ake up for it m akin g so m eti m es fi ve t ac ks to th ei r

,

four Th e tabl e of offse ts is as fo l lo ws bot h e n ds be in g

.
,

ex ac tly ali ke :
 PR O GR ESS O F CA N OEI N G .

TA BLE OF O F FSET S—
0 PM SA I LI N G BOA T G R A CI E.

H A L F B RE A D T H S
-
.

S tat i o n s .

D e ck . No 1 . . No 2 . .
‘

l! o . 3 . No 4
. .

0 an d 12

oo o o o oo
o

10

1 12

1 32 1

1 46 1 41 1 3

In th e w i n te r 1887 8 a pl at e board o f thi n s te el w as -

a dded th e rig w as c ha nged to a singl e lug o f 86ft

,

rigged as in Pl ate X LV I I an d a light hori z on tal w hee l .

,

w as fi tt ed d irec tly on t h e rudd er h ead i n p lac e of th e ,

til ler all t hes e ch a n ges b ein g for th e b etter

,
.

PLATE X LVI I I . H A LF D E CKED SA I LIN G BO A T .

Toron to Bay o n Lak e O n tario is t he h o m e o f a fle et o f

, ,

s m al l boat s a n d m uc h rac in g is d on e th er e t hrough th e

,

s e aso n Clio was t h e ch am pion i n 1 88 7 a n d is a good

.

e x am pl e o f h er cl ass Sh e is o f pi n e lapstre ak o f .
, ,

pl an k and is 1 6ft l on g 3 ft 8in bea m a n d d ec k ed fo r

,
.
, . .
,

4 ft 6in for w ard 2f t aft a n d w ith w ater ways o f 4 to

. . ,
. .

6ln th e co am i n g b ein g 3 m high

.
,
Th e le adi n g di m en . .

sion s are
M ast d e ck to h e ad
,

f ro m s t em
d i am e t e r d e ck 5i n head ,

B ows pr i t o u t b oard ,

B o om
Ya rd
Spi n ak er b o om
h ist
o .
 PR O GR ESS OF CA N OEI N G .

sides tu mblin g h o me at the stem and along the side This

, .

tender is remarka ble for the l oad she carries and for her
stiff ness which makes her a more reli able and us eful ad j un ct
,

than m any d i ngeys t wice the length She is only 6ft 6ln . . .

long over all with an extre m e bea m of 3 ft l gin Her faul t

,
. .

is towing heavily when sailing fas t and the diffic ul ty o f ,

sto wing on deck o n acc ount o f her width .

PLA TE L —SP O R T I N G BO A T S
. .

The larger dra wing represents a boat for ducking and

shooting thus described by her builder :
,

She sho ws but little above the w ater dra ws but little and , ,

so can be used in shoal water can easily be transforme d into ,

a capital blind by using a little grass weed or brush on the , ,

deck She is not easily turned over and a person can sh oot
.
,

fro m any position in her w hich he cannot do i n a canoe I , .

kn o w this fro m experience as I have spen t m any a day in ,

o ne
.

In the fi rst place to get fra mes or ribs lay out o n the
,

floor a cross section both ways of the boat full size ; l ay off ,

the ribs or fra mes a foot apart the wh ol e length and taki n g ,

the m easure o f each o n e on the horizontal pl an gives you

the length an d in the perpendicular section th e bread th
, .

Then on the ends leave the width of the sides whic h in my ,

bo at is only 1 25i n Then take a strip of thi n st u ff and from

.
,

a dot that you m ake for t he width on each side of the center
Spring the strip to the width o f sides at each end top and ,

botto m an d you h ave th e curves for the ribs Saw out the
,
.

center as far as the cockpit co mes an d you have the forms , .

Stay them to the floor and put on the botto m first , .

M aterial for fra mes and ribs l in oak also for th e sides .
, ,

which are only l l m wide Scre w the sides to the ribs

e . . ,

stem and sternpost with § in N o 6 W ire brass scre ws I t . . .

is n o w ready for the botto m U se 13, i n oak ripped to 6ih .

-
. .

in width and wh ere eac h j oin t com es use a batten 1 6 by

l i in . cl i nched through about B in apart with brass
,
.

escutcheon pins d riving the m through o n the face of a

,

ha mmer or piece of iron .

 A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LDI N G .

Use p lenty white lead

the battens an d on th e edge
of on

of the sides Fasten the covering to the ribs and sides with
.

gin N o 1 wire s cre ws and escutcheon pins

. . .

For floor to the cockpit use gin pine an d the washbo ards .
,

to cockpit gin black walnut worked up an d down and

.

scre wed to a stri p let into th e top of the fra mes and at the ,

botto m by strips put bet ween the ribs The m idship s ec tion .

( No 3) sho ws it i n detail
. .

A mount o f ma terial : about l ooft of 13, ih o ak 20ft o f tin .

-
.
, . .

o ak enough an o ak for ste m sternpost and keel

, . l 2i t o f , , .

gin pine for floor and enough m aterial for the washboards
.
, ,

which can be black walnut pine o ak o r whatever a person , , ,

chooses 1 } gross o f fiin N o 6 wire brass scews 3 gross o f

,
1 . .
,

s in N o 1 wire brass scre ws an d 8 oz o f stout brass

. . , .

escutcheon pins s in long This i s all that is required b ut .

p aint .

I shal l rig my boat to sail using two legs of mutton sails , ,

sh arpie rig and also to ro w The oarl ocks will wan t to be

, .

placed o n the o u tside and raised up high enough to clear the

washboards which can be done by a block o r an iron the
, ,

boat bein g so wide it can be used with quite a long o ar and ,

by a good oars man i t can be sen t along very fast .

Th e s maller boat i s for a si milar purpose but is built of ,

canvas as follows : The ribs and long strips are made of o ak

,

i by scant i in the ribs are placed 5ih apart and there are
. .
,

six l ong strips on each side and two m ore 8 ft l ong to fill up ,
.

the l arger space in th e middle Where each s trip and rib .

cross they are clin ched together with a copper n ail The .

gun wale str ips are square and each rib is l e t into them and ,

nailed with two copper n ails Bring the canvas over the .

dado in th e ste m and ste m and put in a spline ; then put o n ,

a keel made o f o ak outside o f the canvas and scre w i t to the

center keelson The cockpi t is made of hal f in ch black wal
.
-

h ut scre wed to the gun wale strips an d h as a piece by 1 in °

scre wed o n top on the sides an d back so that it leaves gin ,

.

proj ection I n front use a piece s in by 3 ih

. . .

The seat is made of two gin pin e pieces 310 wide screwed .
, .
,

to the ribs and the top i s rabbeted {as} and the top is made of
, ,
 PR OGR ESS OF

2ih by gin pi n e strips pla ce d l in ap art a n d cl ea ted to

.
«
. .

get her .

Th e d ec k is r aise d l in i n c en te r of boat so t ha t it sh eds

.
,

th e w ater bo th sid e w ays a n d en d w ays

, .

B rin g th e ca n vas aroun d t he bo at a n d n ai l it o n to p o f

g un wal e an d t h e d ec k th e s a m e an d th e n pu t a n eat tin
, , .

hal f rou n d m oulding o n top o f the ta cks so t ha t i t m a ke s

-
,

a n eat j ob .
 FLA T B O TT011!ED B OA TS
- .

square to the sides the latter bein g either planed o r left

,

rough These two side pieces (a) are laid o ne o n the other
.
,

and two o r three s mall n ails dri ven through the m to hold
the m te mporarily together and the out l ine o f the side is no w
,

marked on the u pper one The upper edge of the boat will
.

be straight the botto m will b e straight for 5ft a midships

, .
,

and at each end for 2ft 6ih will slan t up ward until the
. .

end pieces of the boat (6 b) are but 4in deep The two boa rds . .

are now sawn to shape and pl aned square o n the ends and the
slantin g portions o f the b otto m then they may be taken ,

apart.

Each end piece will be 3 ft lon g or longer if a W ider boat

. ,

is required and Hi m wide in the rough The upper edges

, .

FI G . l — SCO W .

are plan ed up and the sides are each nailed to the end s
, ,

using eigh t penny n ails o r ten penny if the stuff is over gin
-
,
-
.

thi ck The fra me is n o w turned botto m up the two end

.
,

pieces are plane d on their botto m edges to correspond with

the bevel of the botto m then a sufii cient nu mb er o f pieces to
,

cover the bo tto m are sa wn o ff the re m aining bo ards I n .

this case they will each be 3 ft z in long Their ed ges are

. . .

”
carefully j ointed u p straigh t and square and they are
“
,

n ailed in place across the botto m When all are n ai led o n .

the ends may be planed do wn even with the sides o f the

 A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LDI N G .

boat To stifl en the botto m a strip 5in wide an d 2 to l i n

.
’
. .

thick ( see Fig 2) is laid down the center o f the botto m

.

inside and n ailed with wrought or clin ch nails to each plank ,

the nails being driven through and their points clinche d or

turned in usin g a ha mmer and an i ron set
,
About 2f t at . .

each end will b e covered with a deck as at h Fig 2 O ne , , . .

s eat will be put i n for rowing being supported on two cleats , ,

o ne nailed to each side I ron rowlocks m ay be obtained i n .

most localities at a cost o f seventy five cen ts per pair and -

,

are better than wooden ones but if they are not t o be had , ,

the latter can be made of oak A cleat o f oak l i iu thi ck . .

,

21h deep and 9in long is scre wed along the inside o f the
. .

gun wale I n each cleat two mortises are cut I tin l ong
.
, .
,

sin wide and 3 1 ih apart

.
, The ro wlocks are each 7ih
-
. . .

long si n thi ck z in wide above the cleat and I tin wide in

,
.
, .
, .

the m ortises proj ecting 4ih above the gun wale and 3ih
, . .

belo w .

I f all the joints are neatly m ade the boat should be tight ,

after b eing i n the water a short ti me ; but it is al ways best

to paint or tar the entire boat inside and out preserving the , ,

wood and lessening the chance o f leakage I n no case should .

caulking be needed in a new boat I f the b uilder desires .

,

e ach edge can be pai nted as the board is put in place whi ch ,

will still further prevent any leakage .

While such a boat is often all that is needed with a little ,

more care an d skill a much better o ne may be built The .

pun t as it is co mmonly called (Fig

, is a scow o f rather bet .

ter design than the o ne described above b u t the op erations o f ,

building are si m ilar These boats are ofte n used for fishing
.

o n rivers and ponds as they are roo my stiff and safe fro m , ,

any danger of capsizing and the occupants can sit all day in ,

co mfort or m ove about freely which cannot be done i n a

, ,

round b ottomed boat o f si milar size Such s hoat may be

-
.

14 to 1 6ft long 4 ft bea m at gun wale 3 ft 4 ih at botto m

.
, .
, . . ,

and th e sides 1 4 in deep The sides ( ff ) will eac h be a little

. .

lon ger than the length of the co mpleted boat 1 4i n wide , .

and gin thick . They should be free fro m knots and

.

sap wood an d as nearly alike as poss ible so as

, ,
 FLA T B OTTOMED B OA TS .

to bend equally O ne is laid on two b enches the

.
,

outline of the boat is m arked out as shown the ,

ends s weeping up ward in easy curves and it is sa wn and ,

planed to shape I t is then laid o n the second board the

.
,

two are lightly nailed together and the latter plan ed to match
, ,

a center l ine being m arked on both whil e n a i led together .

The two end pieces (0 c) are next sa wn o ut o f l in o ak or ash .

,

the ends being bevel ed as the botto m o f the boat thro ugout
,

will be n arrower th an the top N ext a piece (d) 1 4 to mm

. .

wi de an d 4 ft long is sa wn o ff and the ends beveled m aki ng

.
,

it 4ft long on the upper ed ge and 3 ft 4 ih near the l o wer

. . . .

The two s mall projections (e e) are left to a id in setting the ,

FI G 2—Fuur
.
'
.

side correctly This board o r m ould is pl aced on ed ge

. ,

o ne side board is laid i n plac e against it at the center mark ,

an d a few nails are driven through the sid e board into th e

end of the piece Now the other side is fitted in the sam e
.

m anner . The three pieces resting o n a level floor the corre

sponding ends o f the side p i eces are dra wn togeth er with

ropes un til the end pieces wil l j ust fit bet ween then the sides ,

are nail ed or scre wed to the ends The best way to do thi s
.

is to bore the holes and fit each side in turn to its corres po nd

ing end piece putting i n the scre ws before the sides are
, ,
 FLA T B O TTO M ED B O A TS
-
.

isthat of the skiff or bateau shown in Fig 3 I n thi s boat

. .

the after end is si mi lar to th e previous o ne but the b ow is

,

very diff erent rese mbling more a roun d bottom ed boat

,
- .

sidebo ards are m arked and c ut as i n the for mer boat but at
,

the fore en d they are not cut up at all but are sawn off at a
-
,

slight b evel to fit the for ward rake o f the ste m ( k l shows

the side b oard in the roug h with th e side marked out) The
,
.
 A MA TE UR CAN OE B UI LD I N G .

gun wale will have a slight sheer part of it being due to the ,

bending o f the sideboards b ut to increase it the upper edges ,

are m a l e a little hollo w their concavity being fro m 1 to 2ih

,
.
,

accord ing to the sheer desired A middle m ould is cut o ut .

si milar to d and also a stern piece the l atter o f l in o ak I t

, , . .

is fitted and scre wed to eac h side b oard in turn then it is ,

taken off the sideboards are n ailed to the mo u ld along the

,

lines A B and the sternboard is replaced and s crewed fast

, .

No w the two sides are d ra wn together w ith a rope at their

fore ends until they n early or quite m eet as at t and a piece
-
, ,

of o ak o f triangular for m ( 7 ) is c ut to fit i n the angle

bet ween the m and they are scre wed fast to it The bend
, .

o f the sides will cause th e botto m of the boat to have

considerable rocker usually m uch more than is desirable

, .

To avoid this when the fra m e is thus fa c o mpleted the bot

,
r
,

tom ed ges of both sideboa rds are planed do wn fro m m to n ,

until the botto m is straight for som e distan ce amidships .

This can best b e determined by setting the fra me top up ward , ,

o n a level floor When the edges are planed o ff equally the y

.

must be beveled as in the preceding boat the floor is nailed

, .

o n th e mid dle piece is put i n an d nail e d d o wn

,
and the ,

th warts put i n Both in b ow and stern there will also be

.

sea ts at about 3 ih below the gun wale and of the sha pe

.

sho wn To co mplete the ho w the ends of the sideboards

.
,

are planed o ff and anoth e r triangular piece o f o ak (s) is

,

sa wn out and n ai led against t he ends and the piece r as ,

shown m aking a sh arp b ow A scag ( o) is also ad ded wale

, .
,

strips are put o n and the boat is ready for paintin g Such
, .

a boat may have a centerboard as described i n the previous .

chapters and may also be fitted with sails in the sa me man

,

ner as an ordinary round bot to med boat -

.
 FLA T—
B O TTOM ED B OA TS .

THE D O RY .

Th ese bo ats ar e la rgely use d by t h e fi sh er m e n o f th e

A t l an tic Coast both al on g s hor e a n d o n t h e fishin g v es
,

se l s a n d t h ey are a l so s uitabl e fo r ro wi n g an d as s erv i c e

,

boa ts for yac hts .

Th e b oa t h er e sho wn is pl an ke d wi th w h it e p in e the ,

s ides o f t hre e pie c es e ac h b ein g 196m” a n d t he bo tto m

, ,

gin The l aps o f t h e sidi n g a re r ab b ete d so as t o m ak e a

.
,

fl ush s urfac e i n sid e a n d out Th e t i m bers a re o f oak

.

l in a n d Min i n t hw ar ts
. . The gu n w ales ar e 1 §i n x l i in w
. .

w ith a si n strip o n to p c overi n g edge o f u pp er str e ak

.
,

a l s o There are three m ovabl e th w ar ts res ti ng on risi n gs

.
,

an d r e m ove d w h e n t he bo ats ar e n est ed or p ack ed Th e .

sizes ar e so arran ged th at fiv e boats c an b e stored togeth er ,

o n e w it hin t he ot her th us oc cupy i n g l i ttl e sp ac e o n de ck

, .
 I N D EX .

e
A nni , Can o e Y aw] CA N O E
A pro n . 62, 1 1 5

B ack R abbe t O nta r i o

B ack b ard Can o e
o 66 P ape r
B o at 1 19 P e arl
B al an ce Lug
B all as t i n Can o es 1 61 R ar i tan i a . .

Ba rn eg at C r u i se r 21 6 Ri bb
an d C arv ] e
Sn e a k b ox 215 R 1v er
Bate a u Sai ls
Batt e n s e
.

. 84; 1 41 S at
B e am 126 Sh ad o w
B e adi n g Li n e S nu be am
B e d s Cam p 1 04 T a n d em
V ag a b o nd
,

B e n ch
.

34
B e n d i ng T im be rs V es pe r
.

1 19
B e v el
.

49 Y aw]
Bi lg e K eels Ca n e C n s tr u c ti o n
o o
Bl o ck M o d el 19 C an vas B a t o
B o at Fl at
, 167 C a v e ] B u il d
r
B o d y Pl an 12 C ass y
C a ul k i ng
.

Br e a s th o o k 11 7 1 21
Br o ad str e ak 49 Ced a r 1 32
B u il d ing C e nt e r b a rd s 88 93 1 25 1 27 1 5
855
27 , 40 o , , , ,

B u rr s .
4
B u t to ck Li n e 1 2 1 8 1 23 Ce nt e r bo ard Tr u nk s 40 9 0
B u tt o n B oard s C e nt e r f E tf
,

11 8 t o 71 or
La t e ral R es i s tan c e 71
. .

CA N O E C l am ps 34
C an ad i an 7 C le a t B u t le r 19 9
s Cl i n k e r B u i l d
,

C an va 27
l ss
C a i fic a t i o n Cl i o O en B o a t 216
l e
C yd 1 41 p
C l yd e ( an e
,

J o 141
u se
C r i r , Ba r n eg at 21 6 C l yd e Te n t
C i ui si ug 1 45 1 49 C am i ng s
o 55
C fli i n t of D i s pl a e m e nt
.

7 oe c e 9 c
D ot 139 Co v e 117
uble C r ss S pa lls
.

Do 1 53
. o 52
D ou b l esk i n 29 C ro wn o f De k c54
le e s
E m nt ” C ut h
r c 129
s
Fi tt i n g
Guen n D e ksc 54
He ra ld D e ck B e a ms 54 1 1 2 ,

[ o ne F l aps 60
Ja k e t
c H at ch es
Je rse y B lue T lle r i l 3l 1 9 0 ,

Laeo wsi c Y ke o .

Lal o o
Las ise
M e rse y .

M e ta l
 N ai l ing P l ank
O ff se t s T a bles
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O

D o ry , of 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

D rafi O l i v e Latee n
r
s tr um e nts
D ra wi n g I n
Pape r . Paddles o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

a C um Pai nt i n g
D rop R u dd e r Pan els o o

Pape r Canoes
. o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

D u ck e r o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

P e co wsi c o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

P l a n k i ng
m
Fai r ing 17
l T
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

63 1 33 P an k , a x i n g O i?
.

F arnha s Apro n u s
56 P n t
.

s
Fi n i h i n g
=
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

F i tt i n sS 57
l
F aps., ee k 60 R a t Li n bbe e 40, 11 5 o

s
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Ra c k 11 8
l
F oo r B o a rd s
e
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Kn ees 117 R ee li ng G ar 78 , 1 41 , 145, 19 8

bs
0 0 0 0 0 0

Foo tl i n 1 18 R i 44, 52, 1 12

F oo t Y k e
es
129 R i b an d B att n C an o
.

e es 28
s s
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

o
R i ing 1 18
.

Fo r e st an d S tr ea m C ru se
.

i r e ooo
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

10 Ri v t i n g o oo
.

52
Freebo r d a
Roc k r e 10
R o w o at b s 11 5, 122, 1 56
l s
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

R o w oc k 1 18
u e s
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

R dd r 94, 1 19, 189, 19 9

se s
.

Fa t ni n g 96
es
. .

Li n 132 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

H al f B re ad th P l an Sail s
C an o e Y aw]
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

208
H a tch es C l io 246
D el ta
.

Head l ed g es . 236
Hun ti ng Boats 1 40
Fo r e st S tr e am C r u se r 235 i

I n wa le G raci e 244
l n o e 203
I ri s
.

J ac k sta y Lal oo 1 43
Lass i e
o o o o o o o o o o o o

1 77 .

Lat ee n
o o o o o o o o o o o o

K ee l
o

76
Batte n Leg o f M u tt o n
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

76
K eels o n Lo rd R oss Lat ee n
o o o o o o o o o o o o

76
Ki tti wak e Te n t Lug s 82 166 1 89 o o o o o o o o o
,

M e a su r e m e nt
o
o o o o o
,

Lam ps M o hi ca n 78 1 59
N t us
,

Lapstrea k o 178
La i n g D o wn
n

O li v e r Lat ee n
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

78
Le ges Pec wsi c o 1 73
e
Li m b r h o les Sea B ee 1 80
e
Li n s Sha pi e r 76
S n e a k bo x
Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q

1 66
M as t S teps S t e v e ns
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

55 19 2

M ate rial s S u n be am
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

” 31 169 .

M attr es s 1 04 T an d e m C an e 1 55 o
M ea su re m e nt R ul e s V agabo n d
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

” 10, 125 19 2
M e ss C h es t
.

Ves pe r
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 10 76
M i dd le 0 d i n ate1 V ta ] Spark
i 208
M i d s hi p Sec ti o n Ya wl
M o d els Scag B an d 1 19
M oh i c an Sa i l 1 59 Sco w
M o uld s 24, 1 15 S a , C e ts an oe
 LI S T OF PLA TES .

Telesc pic A pr on o
e
Sh ar pi R ig Te nt s
ee Th wa t s
.

Sh r 10 r
Sh utter 121 Ti lle r
T i m be r s B e d ug
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

S ir m a r k 48 1
J e
S k i rt a c k t 62, 64 T im be r
e b x
Sn a k o . 215 T1 m b e i ng Can o e r
Spili n g . 46, 1 19 T ls oo
Spi na k er 19 6 Tr an s m Kn ees o
Tr un k s
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

St a ff 46
St me Tuc k up o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

1 19
S t e am B ox U ppe r Stre ak
S t ee ri n g G e ars
0 0 0 0 0

3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 23 1 59
St e ph e n s C e nt e r b a rd o 187 V arn ish in g 0 0 0 0

V ag a bo n d
0 0 0 0 0 0 0

R u d d e r G e ar
0

18g
129, 1 32
36 Vi t a] S par k
44
W at e rt i gh t H atch es
1 06 108 We ath e r Helm
W o rk B e n ch
Ya chts B o ats ’

Ya w] C an o e ,

Yok e

LI S T OF P LA T ES .

us
C r i i ng C an o e Je se lue
r y B —Lin s e ”
”—
.

C an o e Je se
“
r y B ] ue u
C onstr ctio n D rawi ng .

R iv er C an o e R a r i t an i a
”
”—
.

us n
Cr i i g C a n o e“
D o t Sh ad o w M o d el .

”—
“
Do t R a c i ng S a i l .

l e
C yd C an oe Lal o o
“
.

“
Lal o o ” Sai l P l an .

a
R c ga i n n d C r u s i n i
g C an o e “
N a u til us .
”

C r u i s i n g C a n
o e “
P e a r l ”
No 3 . .

R aci n g Can o e P e ar l N o 6
“ ”
. .

A m e r i an C r u i s i n g an d R acing C an oe
c .

T an d em C an o e
T an d em Can o e —Sai l Pl an
.

C anva s C an c e .

Fo ur te e n f oo t R owb oat
- .

R o win g a n d Sail i n g Bo at .

M oh i ca n Sa il C an o Foo tg ear.
. e
 OUGLAS
W A U KEGA N ,
I LL .

SMALL CRAFT OF ALL TYPES .

Furn it ure an d Fittin gs o f all kin ds .

WORKMANSHIPANDMODELSUNSURPASSED .

P r ice s M o d e r a te .

Send fo r o ur ill u st rat ed cat al o gu e o f b oo k s on

fishing, sho o t ing, cano eing, y acht ing ,

cam ping, d o gs,

n atu r al hist o ry, o u t do o r l ife

,
fiel d spo rt s ,
t r av el ,

ad v ent u r e, etc .
,
etc . Fr ee to any addr ess . FO R E S T

AND ST R E A M PUB LI SH I N G C O M P A N Y , 3 1 8 Br o ad way,

N ew Yo rk .
am m o l w m
o s NE
PT ORW
UNEANCH ORKS .

DE GRAUW AYMAR 8: CO , ,

M anufacturers an d I mpor ters of

Cordage Oakum , ,
Wire Repe ,

Chains Anchors Oars Bl ocks

, , , ,

BU N T I N GS FLAGS C O TT O N , ,
FLA x D U C K S ,

R U SSI A BO LT R O P E , M A R I N E HA R D W A R E ,

S HI P G OO D S G EN ERA LLY
’
C H A N D LERS .

34 3 5 S O U T H ST R E E T ,

N EW Y O R K .

range porting owder .

( O R A N GE M I LLS , E s t ablish e d
M A N U FA C T U R E D BY

Laflin Rand Powder Co .

O R A N G E R I F LE ,
O R A N G E S P E C I A L,
O R A N G E D U CK I N G ,
O R A N G E L I G HT N I N G .

heM
T u
stPa
pilla
rPw
o fSu
derinUse O pe rE
rio llence
xce . .

S E N D PO S TA L CA R D F OR I LL US TRA TE D PA M PHLE T
SH O WI N G SI Z E S O F GRA I N S M A I LE D F R E E . .

N EW YO RK O FFI GE : 29 M U R RAY S T R EE T .

B R A N CH O FF I C ES
ST . LO U I S ,M o ; C HI CAGO
.
,
I LL ;.D UBUQ U E I OW A ; C I NCI N NA Ti , O HI O
, .

BALTI MO R E M n , ; PI TTSBURGH PA ; D ENV ER , Co L . .

Fo r sa le g e n e ra lly throu ghout the U nit ed S t at e s .

 Uni versi o f Califo rni a
SO UTHERN REGIO ALLIBRARY FACILITY
4 05 Hilgard Avenue, Lo s Angeles , CA 90024-1388
Return thi s material to the li b rary
fro m whi c h it was b o rro wed
.